section 7 drawings, conceptual design and design requirement … · 2016. 5. 11. · drawings,...

Design & Build for Fit-out of

Passenger Terminal Building North Extension

At Macau International Airport (RFQ-221)

Section 7 –

Drawings, conceptual design and

Design Requirement Brief

DESIGN AND BUILD FOR FIT-OUT OF PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING

NORTH EXTENSION AT MACAU INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT

(RFQ-221)

DESIGN REQUIREMENT BRIEF

May 2016

Macau International Airport Co., Ltd. (CAM)

http://www.camacau.com/en/

362937 NEA BLD 0011 B

Working Paper 3 - WP3

April 2016

M865-5 Consultancy Services for Automation of Arrival Bags

Working Paper WP3

Submission No.:MOT/M865-5/O/0011/A

DESIGN AND BUILD FOR FIT-OUT OF PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING NORTH EXTENSION AT MACAU INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT (RFQ-221)

Design Requirement Brief

May 2016

Macau International Airport Co., Ltd. (CAM)

May 2016 Design Requirement Brief

DESIGN AND BUILD FOR FIT-OUT OF PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING NORTH EXTENSION AT MIA (RFQ-221) DESIGN REQUIREMENT BRIEF

Revision Date Originator Checker Approver Description

- 31 March 2016 Various

Draft

- 26 April 2016 Various Final Draft

- 03 May 2016 Various Final

Issue and revision record

Information class: Secure

This document is issued for the party which commissioned it and for specific purposes connected with the above-captioned project only. It should not be relied upon by any other party or used for any other purpose.

We accept no responsibility for the consequences of this document being relied upon by any other party, or being used for any other purpose, or containing any error or omission which is due to an error or omission in data supplied to us by other parties.

This document contains confidential information and proprietary intellectual property. It should not be shown to other parties without consent from us and from the party which commissioned it.



Chapter Title Page

1 Introduction 1

1.1 Overview _________________________________________________________________________ 1 1.2 Abbreviation _______________________________________________________________________ 2

2 Outline Brief 5

2.1 Introduction ________________________________________________________________________ 5 2.2 Services to be provided by the Contractor ________________________________________________ 5 2.2.1 General Scope of Services ____________________________________________________________ 5 2.2.2 General matter covered in the Services __________________________________________________ 6 2.2.3 Services and deliverables specifically required during the work stages of the works ________________ 7 2.3 Technical Schedule _________________________________________________________________ 9 2.3.1 General Requirement ________________________________________________________________ 9 2.3.2 Detailed Design documents __________________________________________________________ 11 2.3.3 Construction documents _____________________________________________________________ 11 2.3.4 As-built documents _________________________________________________________________ 11 2.3.5 BIM Model Files ___________________________________________________________________ 11 2.3.6 Spare materials and parts ___________________________________________________________ 11 2.3.7 Rectifications of Defects and Maintenance During Defects Liability Period ______________________ 11 2.3.8 Net Operational Floor Area ___________________________________________________________ 12 2.3.9 Architectural Building requirements ____________________________________________________ 12 2.3.10 Structural Building requirements ______________________________________________________ 14 2.3.11 Building Services requirements _______________________________________________________ 15 2.3.12 BIM Model requirements ____________________________________________________________ 31 2.3.13 Civil requirements __________________________________________________________________ 32 2.3.14 Requirements of the Works __________________________________________________________ 32

3 Specifications for Architectural and Interior Design Works 35

3.1 Specification ______________________________________________________________________ 35

4 Specifications and Standards for Structure Works 241

4.1 Specification _____________________________________________________________________ 241 4.1.1 Design Load for the Northern Extension ________________________________________________ 241 4.1.2 Design Code _____________________________________________________________________ 242 4.2 Particular Technical Requirements ____________________________________________________ 245 4.2.1 Construction Materials: Cement _____________________________________________________ 245 4.2.2 Construction Materials: Aggregates___________________________________________________ 245 4.2.3 Construction Materials: Concrete ____________________________________________________ 246 4.2.4 Construction Material: Reinforcement _________________________________________________ 247 4.2.5 Formwork and Method of construction _________________________________________________ 248 4.2.6 Placing and Compacting of Concrete __________________________________________________ 249 4.2.7 Sampling and Testing of Concrete ____________________________________________________ 250 4.2.8 Construction Materials: Structural Steel _______________________________________________ 251

Contents



4.2.9 Fabrication of Steelwork ____________________________________________________________ 253 4.2.10 Erection of Steelwork ______________________________________________________________ 259 4.2.11 Tolerances ______________________________________________________________________ 260 4.2.12 Touch Up _______________________________________________________________________ 261 4.2.13 Submittals _______________________________________________________________________ 262 4.2.14 Trials ___________________________________________________________________________ 269 4.2.15 Handling, Storage and Transport of Materials ___________________________________________ 270 4.2.16 Construction Materials: Safety Glass__________________________________________________ 271 4.3 Survey of Existing dimensions and levels _______________________________________________ 273

5 Specifications and Standards for Electrical Services 274

5.1 Scope of specification______________________________________________________________ 274 5.1.1 Installations to comply with this general specification ______________________________________ 274 5.1.2 Scope of the installations ___________________________________________________________ 274 5.1.3 Statutory obligations and other requirements ____________________________________________ 274 5.2 Particular Technical Requirements ____________________________________________________ 276 5.2.1 Power Supply and Distribution System_________________________________________________ 276 5.2.2 Essential and Emergency Power System _______________________________________________ 278 5.2.3 Electrical calculations ______________________________________________________________ 279 5.2.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) System ___________________________________________ 279 5.2.5 Lighting System __________________________________________________________________ 280 5.2.6 Earthing and Lightning Protection System ______________________________________________ 282 5.2.7 Lift System ______________________________________________________________________ 283 5.3 Testing and Commissioning _________________________________________________________ 283

6 Specifications and Standards for Fire Services 286

6.1 Specification _____________________________________________________________________ 286 6.1.1 Statutory Obligations and Design Requirements _________________________________________ 286 6.1.2 Particular Requirements ____________________________________________________________ 287 6.2 Testing and Commissioning _________________________________________________________ 288

7 Specifications and Standards for Plumbing and Drainage Services 290

7.1 Specification _____________________________________________________________________ 290 7.1.1 Statutory Obligations and Design Requirements _________________________________________ 290 7.1.2 Particular Requirements ____________________________________________________________ 291 7.2 Testing and Commissioning _________________________________________________________ 293

8 Specifications and Standards for Mechanical Ventilation and Air-conditioning Services 295

8.1 Specification _____________________________________________________________________ 295 8.1.1 Statutory obligations and Design Requirements __________________________________________ 295 8.1.2 Particular Requirements ____________________________________________________________ 296 8.2 Testing and Commissioning _________________________________________________________ 299

9 Specifications and Standards for Airport Systems 301



9.1 Scope of Work ___________________________________________________________________ 301 9.2 Design Standards _________________________________________________________________ 303 9.3 Particular Technical Requirements ____________________________________________________ 306 9.4 Testing and Commissioning _________________________________________________________ 324

10 BIM Model Files 327

10.1 Requirements ____________________________________________________________________ 327 10.2 Software Requirements ____________________________________________________________ 327 10.3 Deliverable Requirements __________________________________________________________ 327

11 Specifications and Standards for Civil Works 328

11.1 Scope of Work ___________________________________________________________________ 328 11.2 Design Standards _________________________________________________________________ 328 11.3 Particular Technical Requirements ____________________________________________________ 329 11.3.1 Surveys and Inspections ___________________________________________________________ 329 11.3.2 Bus Staging Area Layout and Configuration _____________________________________________ 329 11.3.3 Site Clearance and Utilities _________________________________________________________ 330 11.3.4 Bus Staging Area Pavement ________________________________________________________ 330 11.3.5 Footpath Island and Pedestrian Canopy _______________________________________________ 332 11.3.6 Surface Water Drainage ____________________________________________________________ 332 11.3.7 Perimeter Fencing ________________________________________________________________ 332 11.4 Testing and Commissioning _________________________________________________________ 333 11.4.1 General _________________________________________________________________________ 333 11.4.2 Pavement Formation ______________________________________________________________ 333 11.4.3 Pavement Works _________________________________________________________________ 333 11.4.4 Drainage Works __________________________________________________________________ 334 11.4.5 Fencing Works ___________________________________________________________________ 334

12 Remote Boarding Gate (Optional) 335

12.1 Introduction ______________________________________________________________________ 335 12.2 Technical Requirement _____________________________________________________________ 336

13 Decorative Solar Film Replacement on Upper Part of Glass Façade in the Airside Departure

Hall 338

13.1 Introduction ______________________________________________________________________ 338 13.2 Work requirements ________________________________________________________________ 338

14 Rectification of Defect Requirements during Defects Liability Period 340

14.1 Requirements ____________________________________________________________________ 340

Appendices 341

Appendix A. Concept Layout __________________________________________________________________ 342 A.1 Concept Layout __________________________________________________________________ 342



Appendix B. Room Area and Finishes Schedule ___________________________________________________ 343 Appendix C. Architectural Appendix _____________________________________________________________ 344 Appendix D. Room Data Sheets ________________________________________________________________ 345 Appendix E. Scope of Works carried out by Contract RFQ-198 ________________________________________ 346 Appendix F. Drawings _______________________________________________________________________ 350 F.1 Contract RFQ-198 Drawings for Information ____________________________________________ 350 F.1.1 Architectural _____________________________________________________________________ 350 F.1.2 HVAC __________________________________________________________________________ 352 F.1.3 Electrical Services System __________________________________________________________ 354 F.1.4 Plumbing System _________________________________________________________________ 357 F.1.5 Drainage System _________________________________________________________________ 358 F.1.6 ELV Systems ____________________________________________________________________ 359 F.1.7 Fire Services System ______________________________________________________________ 362 Appendix G. Demolition and A&A Works _________________________________________________________ 363 G.1 Departure Level __________________________________________________________________ 363 G.2 Mezzanine Level _________________________________________________________________ 364 Appendix H. Requirements of Statutory and Detailed Design Documents ________________________________ 365 H.1 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT _______________________________________________ 365 H.2 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS ________________________________________________________ 365 H.2.1 Drawing Submission Schedule _______________________________________________________ 365 H.2.2 Size of statutory and detailed design Drawings __________________________________________ 365 H.2.3 Contents of statutory and detailed design Documents and Drawings _________________________ 365 H.2.4 Statutory and Detailed Design Documents and Drawings __________________________________ 366 Appendix I. Requirements of Construction Documents ______________________________________________ 367 I.1 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT _______________________________________________ 367 I.2 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS ________________________________________________________ 367 I.2.1 Drawing Submission Schedule _______________________________________________________ 367 I.2.2 Size of Installation Drawings ________________________________________________________ 367 I.2.3 Contents of Installation Documents and Drawings ________________________________________ 367 I.2.4 Builder’s Work Documents and Drawings ______________________________________________ 368 I.2.5 Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings ______________________________________________________ 368 Appendix J. Requirements of As-built Documents __________________________________________________ 370 J.1 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT _______________________________________________ 370 J.2 Submission of As–built Drawings _____________________________________________________ 370 J.3 Size of As-built Drawings ___________________________________________________________ 370 J.4 Content of As-built Documents and Drawings ___________________________________________ 370 J.5 Framed Drawings _________________________________________________________________ 371 Appendix K. Requirements of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual and user Manual _________________ 372

i May 2016 Design Requirement Brief




1

1.1 Overview

Since the opening of Macau International Airport some 20 years ago,

there are underlying growth in air travel through the airport. The current

terminal and airport site have generally supported the growth in the

operation to date. With the latest recovery and growth in traffic,

expansion of the existing facility shall be built to provide the necessities.

The aforementioned expansion plan includes extension of the existing

Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) to the north of the existing structure

and follows the layout and levels of the existing facility but adding an

additional fourth level to accommodate new office space. It is expected

to accommodate an additional 1,800,000 arriving and departing

passengers a year.

The Arrivals Level will focus on providing additional area in the zones

that require additional processing capacity and remote departure

lounge, while trying to maintain existing facilities.

The Departures Level will be a full build out providing additional area in

the departure lounge, while boosting additional retail and office space.

The extended Mezzanine will provide additional space for departure

lounge, CIP lounge, smoking lounge, offices, retail and food & beverage.

A new office level will be provided to accommodate new office space.

There will be an additional loading bridge connected to the sterile

corridor and the Departures level.

The extension is delivered through a separate Design & Build Contract

for the main structure of the building «RFQ-198» and this Design &

Build Contract for the fit-out of the building «RFQ-221».

The Services to be provided under this Contract comprise the provision

of full design consultancy services and construction services for

the fitting out work project which is intended to provide fit-out works

including architectural, structural, building services works in extension

of the existing Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) and modification,

diversion, alteration and addition works including architectural,

structural, civil, building services works for the diversion areas in Bus

1 Introduction



2

staging area, Remote boarding gate and existing terminal of Macau

International Airport.

1.2 Abbreviation

ABWF Architectural and building works and finishes

ACR Automatic Code Reading

ACS Access Control System

AEL Airport Express Line

AODB Airport Operation Database

ATM Air Traffic Movement

BIM Building Information Modelling

BMS Building Management System

CAM Macau International Airport Co., Ltd. (The Authority or

the Employer)

CCTV Closed Circuit Television

CVRM Cost, Value and Risk Management

E&M Electrical and Mechanical

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

EVA Emergency Vehicle Access

FIDS Flight Information Display System

BMS Building Management System

HoB Head of Stand Road

KPI Key Performance Indicator

LAN Local Area Network



3

LMCC Localized Motor Control Centre

LPN Licence Plate Number

LUS Look Up Server

M&E Mechanical and Electrical

MAEDS Machine Automated Explosive Detection System

MCC Motor Control Centre

MCS Manual Coding Station

MCT Minimum Connection Time

MICS Management Information and Control System

mppa million passengers per annum

OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer

OOG Out of Gauge

O&M Operation and Maintenance

PA Public Address PLC Programmable Logic Controllers

PMU Pricing Make-Up

PS Particular Specification

PTB Passenger Terminal Building

PTS Particular Technical Specification

QAP Quality Assurance Plan

RBAS Reclaim Belt Allocation System

REE Registered Electrical Engineer

RF Radio Frequency



4

RFID Radio Frequency Identification

RGE Registered Geotechnical Engineer

RHO Ramp Handling Operator

RSE Registered Structural Engineer

RTF Remote Transfer Facilities

STA Scheduled Time of Arrival

STD Scheduled Time of Departure

T&C Testing and Commissioning

TODC Time of Day Clock

TMR Trunk Mobile Radio

TRMICS Total Replacement Management Information and

Control System

UID Unique Identification Tag

ULD United Load Device

VSU Vertical Sort Unit

WP Working Paper



5

2.1 Introduction

The Services to be provided under this Contract comprise the provision

of full design consultancy services and construction services for

the fitting out work project which is intended to provide fit-out works

including architectural works, structural works, building services works,

systems works and landscaping works in extension of the existing

Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) and modification, diversion,

alteration and addition works including architectural works, structural

works, civil works, building services works, systems works and

landscaping works for the diversion areas in Bus staging area, Remote

boarding gate and existing terminal.

The Contract shall include for all floors of north extension including but

not limited to office areas, public areas, processing areas, VIP and CIP

areas, back of house areas, hard and soft landscape at the

surroundings of north extension and appropriate design and build

reserves shall be provided to the retail areas.

2.2 Services to be provided by the Contractor

2.2.1 General Scope of Services

The works to be designed and built by the Contractor under this

Contract (the Works) comprise the fit-out works and alteration and

addition (A&A) works which shall include the following:

(a) Design of fit-out works including architectural, structural,

building services works, systems works, landscaping works for

the extension of the existing Passenger Terminal Building

(PTB);

(b) Design of modification, diversion, alteration and addition works

including architectural, civil, structural, building services works,

systems works, landscaping works for the diversion areas in

Bus staging area, Remote boarding gate and existing terminal;

(c) Design coordination with Government departments, CAM,

airport operators and stakeholders, and existing contractors,

Project RFQ198 contractor and consultants;

(d) Liaison with the public utilities companies, other authorities or

public bodies and consultants;

(e) Liaison among the contractors, Project RFQ198 contractor, the

client departments and Government Representatives in relation

to the fit-out works and alteration and addition works;

2 Outline Brief



6

(f) Undertaking of all necessary surveys and site investigations,

levels and surroundings for the purpose of or in connection with

the fit-out works and alteration and addition works;

(g) Preparation, vetting and submission of «Statutory Design»,

«Detailed Design» documents (as set out in the Section 2.3.2

of this Brief);

(h) Provision of a detailed programme for the fit-out works and

construction method statements for the fit-out works and to

address any comments on either of which made by

Government, CAM, airport operators and stakeholders, project

manager;

(i) Preparation, vetting and submission of «Construction»

documents (as set out in the Section 2.3.3 of this Brief);

(j) Preparation, vetting and submission of «as-built» documents

(as set out in the Section 2.3.4 of this Brief);

(k) Preparation, vetting and submission of «BIM Model»

documents (as set out in the Section 2.3.5 of this Brief);

(l) any other works described in the following sections of this

Design Brief.

2.2.2 General matter covered in the Services

(a) Statutory procedure

a. Preparation of relevant documents and provisions of

necessary input to complete the statutory procedure,

including resolving objections and revisions of design

and construction to obtain statutory approval.

(b) Employment of specialist consultants

a. Proposals for agreement by the Client if specialist

consultants to be employed by the Contractor.

(c) General submissions for designs

a. Recommendation of design criteria in consultation with

all maintenance and operating departments.

b. Submission of design memoranda to maintenance and

operating departments.

c. Surveys, site investigations, certificates, testings and

independent third party verification/checking if

necessary.

d. Submission of statutory designs, detailed designs –

particular requirements as required by Government,

CAM, airport operators and stakeholders, project

manager.



7

(d) The Contractor shall verify as-built drawings to ensure that any

inaccuracies and/or lack of detailed information within the as-

built records at early stage of the design process. The

contractor shall carry out survey works as necessary to ensure

the complete integrity of the as-built information on which the

Contractor design is based on.

(e) The Contractor shall submit design proposal on any

modifications to existing elements for CAM Project Manager for

review and approval prior to commencement of works.

(f) The Contractor shall prepare statutory submissions and obtain

approval for their design proposal. The Contractor shall make

such submissions in good time as to ensure there is no delay to

the Works. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any

delay due to late receipt of such permits, consents or approvals.

(g) The Contractor shall reinstate any damage during construction

and make good finish to existing elements

(h) The Contractor shall comply with the design standards,

statutory requirements and technical requirement as specified

in the specification.

2.2.3 Services and deliverables specifically required during the

work stages of the works

(a) Workstage 1 – Statutory Design Stage

a. Coordinate with stakeholders for developing design

details.

b. Submission of plans, elevations, calculations, reports

for information and review of design and progress of

design development.

c. Prepare, update and submit reasonably accurate and

timely estimates and cash flow forecasts when required

by CAM Project manager.

d. Provide necessary input for preparing the materials,

details and updated project programme when required


e. Submission of all necessary drawings and documents

to the authorities for obtaining statutory approval of the

design.

(b) Workstage 2 – Detailed Design Stage



8

a. Submission of plans, elevations, calculations, reports

for information and review of design and progress of

design development.

b. Prepare, update and submit reasonably accurate and

timely estimates and cash flow forecasts when required


c. Preparation, vetting and submission of «Detailed

Design» documents (as set out in the Section 2.3.2 of

this Brief);

d. Provide necessary input for preparing the materials,

details and updated project programme when required


e. Preparation, vetting and submission of «Construction»

documents (as set out in the Section 2.3.3 of this Brief).

(c) Workstage 3 – Construction Stage

a. Submission of monthly financial statements giving

actual and forecast expenditure, cash flow.

b. Submission of monthly programme, progress report

and construction method statements. A covering report

and progress photographs, specific to the fit-out works

shall be provided.

c. Provide estimate and forecast of expenditure and

report progress on expenditure for the processing and

draft estimates.

d. Submit proposals on the investigation and

implementation of prompt mitigation measures.

e. Submission of Shop drawings with installation details,

combined building services drawings and combined

builder works drawings associated with the fit-out

works for CAM Project manager consent prior to

ordering and installation of any fit-out works.

f. Preparation, vetting and submission of «as-built»

documents (as set out in the Section 2.3.4 of this Brief).

(d) Workstage 4 – Post Handover Services

a. Submission of maintenance manuals and operating

manuals upon completion of the fit-out works.

b. Submission of programme reports of the maintenance

and defect rectification works on quarterly basis or at

times as required by the CAM Project manager.



9

2.3 Technical Schedule

2.3.1 General Requirement

The Contractor shall comply with the following general requirements to

the satisfaction of the CAM Project manager:-

(a) The fit-out works areas and alteration and addition areas shall

be designed and constructed in accordance with good practice

generally and to the particular requirements set out in this

Design Brief and in such a way that future maintenance costs

are minimized and to a standard at least as high as that

achieved in comparable terminal-built facilities and

government-built facilities. Materials and workmanship for all

finishes and features that form an integral part of the fit-out

works areas shall require minimum maintenance and shall

comply with all standards indicated herein or as may be

required by the CAM Project manager, and shall be compatible

with the finishes and features of other integral or adjacent

accommodation within the development.

(b) The Works shall comply with Macau Law and Regulations, all

specification, codes of practice relevant to public works

contracts in Macau, the requirements of the ICAO and relevant

international standards and in particular the specifications and

standards listed in Sections 3 to 9 of this design brief. The

Contractor shall submit a list of standards proposed for the

Works which shall be subject to review without objection by the

CAM Project manager before use. In the event that the CAM

Project manager does not accept the Contractor’s proposed

standards or specifications, CAM shall have the absolute

discretion to specify the standards to be used for the Works.

(c) The Contractor shall ensure that all elements of the design and

build for the Works are fully coordinated and integrated and

that the design is accurately recorded in the deliverables

required. The design and build of the Works shall

incorporate all requirements resulting from the resolution of

interface matters with all other parties who have a relation to

the Works.

(d) The Contractor shall at every stage of the design and build

development process assume full responsibility for liaison

and coordination with all user departments, all stakeholders,

all Relevant Authorities and other relevant parties and shall

develop and finalise details in the client / user brief. The



10

Contractor shall also be responsible for the design, build and

development of detailed room data sheets (RDS) to include all

requirements from user departments, all stakeholders, all

Relevant Authorities and other relevant parties.

(e) The Contractor shall prepare presentation papers and drawings

and make presentations to the various user departments as

and when requested by the CAM Project manager.

(f) The Contractor shall submit full details of his design proposals

for CAM Project manager to review without objection at

schematic design, detail layout plan and elevation plans at

various design stages. All proposed finishing materials and

building services installations (with samples on request) shall

be submitted for CAM Project manager to review without

objection prior to the placement of orders.

(g) The submission of design details to or the inspection of the

construction works by, or any pertaining comments by the CAM

Project manager shall not relieve the Contractor from his

responsibility for satisfactory compliance with the above

stipulations and requirements under this design brief.

(h) At the end of each design and build stage, as agreed with

the CAM Project manager, the Contractor shall set up a

series of detailed briefing meetings with all relevant project

stakeholders or users to run through drawings in detail

explaining and demonstrating, with the use of renderings,

computer generated perspectives and physical working

models, as and where appropriate, exactly how the user

requirements have been implemented and illustrating how

user comments have been incorporated in the design and

build works.

(i) The Contractor shall arrange special site inspections and

meetings:-

a. Before substantial completion,

b. Upon substantial completion,

c. Prior to handover,

d. For handover,

e. At the end of the Defects Liability Period – for briefing(s)

on specific electrical/ mechanical and/or other

installations, to be attended by other Government

Departments, airport operators, stakeholders and as

required by the CAM Project manager.



11

2.3.2 Detailed Design documents

The Contractor shall provide detail design documents in accordance

with the requirements in Appendix C of this Design Brief.

2.3.3 Construction documents

The Contractor shall provide construction documents in accordance

with the requirements in Appendix D of this Design Brief.

2.3.4 As-built documents

The Contractor shall provide as-built documents in accordance with the

requirements in Appendix E of this Design Brief.

2.3.5 BIM Model Files

The Contractor shall provide the BIM Model files in accordance with the

requirements in Section 10 of this Design Brief.

2.3.6 Spare materials and parts

The Contractor shall provide 30 days of the date of handover of the

completed portion(s) of the fit-out works areas to the CAM the following

spare materials and parts to the CAM Project manager:-

(a) Spare and special tools for 1-year operation and maintenance

of all the E&M plant and equipment, a list of which shall have

been agreed by the CAM Project manager;

(b) Materials which in the opinion of the CAM Project Manager are

not readily available in the market, with quantities to be

determined by CAM Project manager.

2.3.7 Rectifications of Defects and Maintenance During Defects

Liability Period

The Contractor shall be responsible for the full rectification of Defects

and maintenance of the installation during the Defects Liability Period.

Detailed requirements are Section 14 of this Design Brief.



12

2.3.8 Net Operational Floor Area

For the purpose of this Technical Schedule, the Net Operational Floor

Area shall, unless otherwise stated, be taken as the total floor area fit-

out works areas allocated to a user for carrying out the intended

activities, excluding any structures and partitions, circulation areas,

staircases, staircase halls, lift landings, space occupied by toilet

facilities, mechanical and electrical services such as lifts and air-

conditioning systems unless otherwise stated.

2.3.9 Architectural Building requirements

Design / Shop drawings

Contractors shall submit a full set of Design documents:

(a) List of documents

(b) Design criteria (according to Macau / HK / international

standard and regulation, where Macau standard and regulation

should be the first priority to be applied)

(c) Drawings (including construction details in coordination with

existing installations).

(d) Specifications

(e) Equipment schedule

(f) Design finishing schedule

(g) Catalogues for main equipment’s

(h) Calculations and justification (Ex: Hydraulic, cooling, exhaust,

fresh air and ventilation, power supply load, lighting levels,

emergency evacuation routings, etc.)

Scope of Work:

The Contractor shall design, supply, furnish, install, test & commission

all required materials, equipment, fixture, furniture and miscellaneous

accessories necessary to complete the construction for fitting out works

for passenger terminal building (PTB) north extension as specified. No

matter mentioned or not, the Contractor shall completely execute the

detailed works according to the final design.

The fitting out works for the PTB north extension includes ground, M,

first, second and third floors. The fitting out areas of each floor can be



13

referred to the highlighted area of the attached reference drawings with

the conceptual layout (drawing no.: MMH-365511-A-C-000-1100~1500).

These drawings are for reference only and final configuration shall

subject to design coordination after contract award.

Ground Floor (Arrival Level):

The ground floor shall include the areas as shown in the attached

reference drawing (drawing no.: MMH-365511-A-C-000-1100). And the

corresponding room areas shall be referred to the area schedule for

reference.

M Floor (Sterile Corridor Level):

The M floor shall include the sterile corridor. The corresponding area

shall be referred to the attached reference drawing (drawing no.: MMH-

365511-A- C-000-1200) for reference.

First floor (Departure Level):

The first floor shall include the areas as shown in the attached



reference.

Second Floor (Mezzanine Level):

The second floor shall include the areas as shown in the attached



reference.

Third Floor (Office Level):

The third floor shall include the areas as shown in the attached



reference.

Design Work

All necessary design work shall be included for completing the project.

The full set design shall include but not be limited to the followings:

design, calculation, drawings, material list, specification, catalogue for



14

equipment/furniture/fixture, testing report. The full set design should be

signed by Macau Registered Engineer and approved by Government

Authorities and project related entities. The conceptual layout

plan/drawing is just for reference, the final design should be approved

by related entities. The design criteria are according to Macau / HK /

international standard and regulation, where Macau standard and

regulation should be the first priority to be applied. All design shall be

HIGH CLASS and GOOD QUALITY.

All necessary architecture works for completing the project as in the

design, including but not being limited to the above areas.

2.3.10 Structural Building requirements

The fit-out works areas and alteration and addition areas shall be

designed and constructed to the satisfaction of the CAM Project

Manager and to incorporate, inter alia, the following structural

requirements wherever applicable:-

(a) The Contractor shall verify as-built drawings to ensure that any



Contractor shall carry out survey works as necessary to ensure



(b) The fit-out works loading shall not exceed the design load listed

in clause 4.1.1 or the capacity as per checking of as-built

information by the Contractor. The Contractor shall

demonstrate the fit-out works fulfil the loading requirements.

(c) The Contractor shall submit design proposal on any

modifications to existing structural elements for CAM Project

Manager for review and approval prior to commencement of

works.

(d) The Contractor shall provide design proposal when loading for

fit-out work exceed existing design load and/or alternation to

existing structural elements is required. Design proposals shall

include design calculations to justifying the capacity of existing

structures and method statement of construction for the

proposed works, which shall be agreed by CAM Project

Manager. If such permission is granted, all beams or other

members of the structure which are subjected to loading other

than the design loading shall be strengthened and supported to



15

the satisfaction of the Project Manager and the Contractor shall

be responsible for any extra expenses.

(e) The Contractor shall have to prepare statutory submissions and

obtain approval for their design proposal. The Contractor shall

make such submissions in good time as to ensure there is no

delay to the Works. The Contractor shall be solely responsible

for any delay due to late receipt of such permits, consents or

approvals.

(f) The Contractor shall reinstate any damages during construction

and make good finish to structural elements

(g) The fit out work shall comply with the design standards,



(h) Carry out any necessary tests including concrete cube tests,

steel reinforcement tests and make submission of test reports,

construction records.

2.3.11 Building Services requirements

The fit-out works areas and alteration and addition areas shall be

designed and constructed to the satisfaction of the CAM Project

Manager and to incorporate, inter alia, the following Building Services

requirements wherever applicable:-

(a) Environmental and Building services shall be provided in

accordance with the requirements listed in the Appendixes to

this Design Brief or as may be approved by the CAM Project

Manager.

a. For each party's office areas and processing areas, the

building services inside the areas shall be solely for

and directly serving the areas.

(b) The Contractor shall verify as-built drawings to ensure that any





Contractor design is based on. The Contractor shall submit

survey reports to CAM Project Manager.

(c) The provisions shown on the Room Data Sheets attached in

this Design Brief are for reference only. The Contractor shall

at every stage of the design and build development process



16

assume full responsibility for liaison and coordination with

all user departments, all stakeholders, all Relevant Authorities

and other relevant parties and shall develop and finalise details

in the client / user brief. The Contractor shall also be

responsible for the design, build and development of detailed

room data sheets (RDS) to include all requirements from user

departments, all stakeholders, all Relevant Authorities and

other relevant parties. The finalised RDS shall obtain no

objection from the CAM Project Manager before construction

on site.

(d) All equipment installed for each department in each group

location shall be operated solely for each department.

(e) All equipment shall be easily accessible and adequate space to

be provided for servicing and replacing equipment.

(f) The Works shall aim to comply with «Manual de Procedimentos

Técnicos para Conservação de Energia em Edifícios de

Macau» developed by DSSOPT for the Works. At the end the

Works, necessary measurement for the Works areas shall be

provided and survey report shall be submitted by this

Contractor to CAM Project Manager.

2.3.11.1 Mechanical Ventilation and Air-conditioning Services requirements

The Mechanical Ventilation and Air-conditioning Services installations

for fit-out works and alteration and addition works shall include, but not

limited to, the following:

(a) This includes the works of the Mechanical Ventilation and Air-

conditioning Services installation that the Contractor shall

design, supply, install, testing and commissioning of the entire

Mechanical Ventilation and Air-conditioning Services

installation as specified in this contract.

(b) Mechanical Ventilation and Air-conditioning to be provided to

areas as referenced in the Room Data Sheets.

(c) The provision of air conditioning, except the primary air and

chilled water supply that may be centrally supplied by the

building, shall be segregated to serve each group of areas by

department or party and separately metered and controlled for

each group of areas by department or party.



17

(d) The system shall be acoustically treated to achieve a noise

level of NC 40 maximum inside the air-conditioned area and the

air quality and the noise level shall meet the current

requirements of Macau Law, Regulations and Guidance. At the

end the Works, necessary measurement for the Works areas

shall be provided and survey report shall be submitted by this

Contractor to CAM Project Manager.

(e) The system shall achieve IAQ requirements in the IAQ

Guidance issued by the Direcção dos Serviços de Protecção

Ambiental (DSPA). At the end the Works, necessary

measurement for the Works areas shall be provided and survey

report shall be submitted by this Contractor to CAM Project

Manager.

(f) For the PAU solely serves the area, CO2 sensors shall be

provided for demand control.

(g) Where mechanical ventilation is required, it shall achieve

adequate air change rates in accordance with the room data

sheet and the ASHRAE standard. The air quality and the noise

level of such system shall meet the current requirements of

Macau Law, Regulations and Guidance.

(h) The location of any exhausts shall not case nuisance to users

of facility, or the general public.

(i) All thermal insulation for air duct, chilled water pipe works and

raised floor slab shall be either Phenolic Foam or Flexible

closed cell elastomeric insulation.

2.3.11.2 Electrical Services requirements

The electrical services installations for fit-out works and alteration and

addition works shall include, but not limited to, the following:

(a) This includes the works of the electrical services installation

that the Contractor shall design, supply, install, testing and

commissioning of the entire electrical services installation as

specified in this contract.

(b) Demolition/ reinstatement/ diversion/ modification of existing

electrical services installations to suit the renovated E&M



18

installation/ architectural layout/ structural layout/ site

conditions/ construction progress etc. and for any demolition of

existing redundant electrical installation, it shall be removal off

site with prior approval from CAM Project Manager

(c) Electrical meter room/ cupboard shall be provided for exclusive

use of the different parties. Electricity supply to each unit shall

be independently metered for each group of areas by user

department or party

(d) Sufficient energy meters shall be provided for each user

department in each group location for energy usage record and

electricity consumption record.

(e) Artificial illumination shall be provided to levels as

recommended by the relevant lighting guides published by the

Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineering. LED

tube lighting and LED type downlight shall be provided at the

fit-out areas and alteration and addition areas, except the

unmanned area (e.g. plant room, equipment room) where T5

tube with electronic ballast shall be provided.

(f) Recessed type luminaires shall be provided in areas with

suspended ceiling.

(g) Sufficient numbers of self-contained emergency luminaires

shall be provided according to Macau Law and Regulations, BS

5266 and BS EN 60598.

(h) Motion sensors (i.e. dual sensor type with by-pass function)

shall be provided at all male/ female showing, locker area,

toilets, associate common corridors and pantry, where

minimum lighting level shall be maintained for security guard

patrol purpose and means of escape requirements.

(i) Day light sensors shall be provided at the zone near to window

with day lighting source for automatically dimming the lighting

down to acceptable level.

(j) Power points shall be provided to rooms and areas as indicated

in the Room Data Sheets. Spare sockets shall be provided for

each room in addition of the requirement stated on Room Data

Sheets:-



19

Room Size No. of Socket Outlet(s)

10 sq. m or below

1 socket outlet

Above 10 sq. m

1 socket outlet per each 10 sq. m

All electrical provisions, including socket outlets, inside any

area having water/ weather damage potential shall be

waterproof/ weatherproof.

(k) Electrical provisions to be provided to areas as referenced in

the Room Data Sheets.

(l) The Contractor shall verify if existing electrical system is

suitable for the Works at early stage of the design process. The



contractor design is based on. The Contractor shall submit

survey reports and design reports to CAM Project Manager.

(m) The Contractor shall design and build an electrical system for

the Works based on the existing electrical system for extension

of the existing Passenger Terminal Building (PTB), Bus staging

area, Remote boarding gate and existing terminal. The

electrical system will cover the demolition, diversion,

modification and addition of HV/LV transformer, HV and LV

switchboards, generator and associated electrical distribution

systems, the LV main switch room; and associated

distribution electrical rooms at Macau Airport PTB Expansion

Area and existing terminal; the fixed link bridge and airbridge

facilities. All excavation, diversion and reinstatement works if

required shall be deemed to be included in the cost provisions

for this power supplies arrangement.

(n) The Contractor shall provide an 11kV/LV transformer unit with

at least 1600kVA power capacity connected to existing HV

switchboards and provide associated electrical system. The

capacity shall be based on electrical load estimation of

extension of PTB for this Works. The electrical loadings shall

be fed from the existing and new 11kV/LV transformers.

(o) The Contractor shall submit the electrical calculations includes

but not limited to the follows:-



20

a. Overall electrical load estimation of extension of PTB

with all loadings in this Works: The calculation shall

include normal, essential and emergency power

distributions on transformer(s) and generator(s);

b. Electrical load estimation with all loadings in this Works:

The calculation shall include normal, essential and

emergency power distributions on transformer(s) and

generator(s);

c. Cable and busduct Sizing calculation;

d. Cable containment Sizing calculation;

e. Power system discrimination calculation;

f. Earthing and lightning calculation;

g. Lighting calculation;

h. UPS sizing and battery sizing calculations; and

i. Generator system calculations (if generator set(s) is

modified and added);

i. Generator sizing and fuel supply system

calculation;

ii. Air Pressure Drop Calculations of Generator

system;

iii. Acoustic Treatment Calculation for Generator

Rooms;

iv. Exhaust Back Pressure Calculation for

Generator; and

v. Acoustic Calculation for Exhaust System of

Generator

(p) The Contractor shall provide the Low Voltage (LV) Power

supplies and Distribution System.

(q) The Contractor shall provide General Lighting, Essential and

Emergency Lighting System for office areas and smoking

lounge and modified public area, airside facilities and landside

office/ store area, Back of House area, roof area and plant

rooms in the fit-out areas, .

(r) The Contractor shall be responsible to check the weight

allowed for lift car decoration of the existing lift systems for

stone replacement work. The overall weight of the new stone lift

car floor shall be within the weight allowed for lift car decoration.

The details of the stone replacement work are shown on

Architectural section in this design brief.



21

(s) The Contractor shall provide the UPS System Installation for

new ELV/ server rooms as well as the CCTV rooms which

related to the Works.

(t) The Contractor shall provide power supplies to all related MEP

systems, Airport ELV Systems, Isolators; Fused Spur Units and

Socket Outlets for Small Power System for the Works.

(u) The Contractor shall provide the Cable Containment System

including cable ladders, cable trays and surface and

concealed type conduit system with mounting and support

accessories for the Works.

(v) The Contractor shall provide the complete Electrical Earthing

and Clean Earthing System for the Works.

(w) The Contractor shall provide Lightning Protection System

Facilities for the Works.

(x) The Contractor shall provide the appropriate demolition

works and manage waste disposal services; adjust any

electrical system elements and items in the existing

interfacing boundary of the existing PTB building to facilitate

for the Works.

(y) The Contractor shall be responsible to liaise with the base

building Contractor for interfacing and connection of new

design, supply and install electrical installation to existing

electrical installation at the Contractor own cost.

(z) The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination with

other trades to enable the installation works, including

coordination with reflected builder's work. The setting out of the

E&M and electrical installations shall be based on the reflected

builder's work and layout in acceptance to CAM Project

Manager.

2.3.11.3 Fire Services requirements

The fire services installation for this fit-out contract shall include, but not

limited to, the following:

(a) This includes the works of the fire services installation that the

Contractor shall design, supply, install, testing and



22

commissioning of the entire fire services installation as

specified in this fit-out contract.

(b) Demolition/ reinstatement/ diversion/ modification of existing

fire services installations to suit the renovated E&M installation/

architectural layout/ site conditions/ construction progress etc.

and for any demolition of existing redundant FS installation, it

shall be removal off site with prior approval from CAM Project

Manager.

(c) Modify/ divert/ make additional provisions/ replace and reinstate

the existing installed equipment to the FS installation to suit the

latest architectural layout, interior design and updated reflected

ceiling plan.

(d) All modification/ revision/ additional works required on the FS

installation shall be included in the Contractor’s tender price.

(e) The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of

existing F.S. installation.

(f) The Contractor shall be responsible to liaise with the base

building Contractor for interfacing and connection of new

design, supply and install FS installation to existing FS

installation at the Contractor own cost.

(g) The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination with

other trades to enable the installation works, including

coordination with reflected ceiling plans. The setting out of the

E&M and FS fittings on the false ceiling shall be based on the

reflected ceiling plans and layout in acceptance to CAM Project

Manager.

(h) The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and

installation of sprinklers with all associated pipework and all

necessary accessories to complete the works under this contract.

(i) Design, supply and installation of concealed type sprinkler with

all associated pipework and all necessary accessories on false

ceiling to suit latest layout and to complete the works. All

concealed sprinkler heads colour should match the colour of

the adjacent ceiling and refer to Architecture reflected ceiling

plans. Final approval of colour shall be required by the CAM

Project Manager consent prior to installation.



23

(j) Design, supply, installation and modification works of sprinkler

heads and associated pipework within ceiling void.

(k) Design, supply, installation and modification works of sprinkler heads under obstruction to suit new E&M installation.

(l) Design, supply, install and modify fire hydrant system with all associated pipework together with associated fire hydrant outlets, F.S. inlets and all necessary accessories to complete the works.

(m) Design, supply, install and modify hose reels with all associated pipework together with associated alarm bells, break glass unit and visual fire alarm with wiring and all necessary accessories to complete the works.

(n) Design, supply, install and modify automatic fire detection and alarm system including detectors, break glass units, alarm bells, visual fire alarm, power supply units, and all necessary equipment and accessories to complete the works. The Contractor shall ensure the proposed materials shall be fully compatible with existing AFA system of base building and this Macau Airport Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) North Extension.

(o) Design, supply and install of clean agent fire extinguishing system for protection of Electrical/ELV equipment rooms and plantrooms with all associated pipework, discharge nozzles, gaseous storage cylinders together with associated control panel, alarm bells, break glass unit, detectors, manual release button, lock off unit and visual fire alarm with wiring and all necessary accessories to complete the works. This system signal shall be full repeated back to this extension building AFA panel in addition to base building control centre AFA panel.

(p) The Contractor shall be responsible for the make good of the existing FS installation which is affected under the works to the satisfaction of CAM Project Manager.

(q) Design, supply and install portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets.

(r) Submission of survey drawings, shop drawings, calculations, sample boards, materials catalogues, as-built drawings, testing and commissioning records, operation and maintenance manuals.

(s) Contractor shall be responsible for the interfacing works with MVAC trade.

(t) The Contractor shall be responsible to set works the FS system including all necessary testing and balancing exercise to obtain the designed performance and to handover in good working



24

order of the complete system.

(u) The Contractor shall be responsible to provide testing and commissioning of all equipment and system and training to the management company staff. Carry out performance evaluation of equipment/ systems supplied/installed.

(v) The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the final installation of the designed, supplied and installed FS system is in full compliance in accordance with the requirements of Relevant Government Authority and any other requirements and regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible of invitation of fire services inspection and obtaining the relevant Certificate of Government Authority for the complete fire services installation undertaken by then and shall be responsible for all statutory submission; the contractor shall be responsible to submit the Form of “Notification to fire services department on the occasion building FSI is shut down for work: to fire services department for suspension of system during construction period.

(w) The Contractor shall inform the CAM Project Manager well in advance of any necessary change of pipe sizes or F.S. layout in order to suit the site conditions. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the taking down and re-fixing works without charges to the Employer.

(x) Incidental works and attendance to works design, supply, installation and inspection by relevant government authorities are required

(y) The Contractor shall include all necessary costs in water discharging and re-charging from the existing FH/HR and sprinkler system of existing system in order to carry out the interfacing connection, testing and commissioning works and FS inspection. Precaution work shall be provided to the satisfaction of the CAM Project Manager prior to the execution of work.

(z) The Contractor shall include the costs in order to carry out the software re-programming of the deleted and additional of designed, supplied and installed of AFA devices, testing/ commissioning and FS inspection if necessary and the re-programming of the existing Fire Alarm panel shall only be carried out in a time period which is agreed with CAM Project Manager.

(aa) The Contractor shall be responsible for testing and Commissioning of the entire fire services installations including but not limited to the modification areas of the existing fire services installations, fire detection and alarm system, fire hydrant / hose reel system, portable fire extinguishers, emergency lighting and exit signs, emergency power, VAC



25

control system, fire shutters, audio visual advisory system. Phasing of the testing and commissioning, if any, should be included.

(bb) The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe guard of the portable equipment design, supply and installed under this contract until the handover of such equipment including the current existing installation. Portable equipment installed for fire services department’s inspection(s) shall not be regarded as being handed over.

(cc) The Contractor shall provide for, make good for, and supervise all builders' work required, including drilling and plugging of walls, floors and ceilings for securing of brackets, and other builders' work as is considered normal to the trade.

(dd) The Contractor shall provide and allow sufficient arrangement for working overnight at site whenever it is considered necessary or as requested by CAM Project Manager.

(ee) Provide maintenance and emergency repair services during the

defect liability period (DLP) including submission of all statutory

documents and drawings.

(ff) All statutory submission for fire services systems including

submission of forms, documents, drawings and calculations.

The Contractor shall be responsible for signing all fire services

certificates in accordance with the requirements and

regulations from the relevant Government Authorities. Attend all

statutory inspections as required.

(gg) Supply, installation and modification works of sprinkler heads

under obstruction to suit new E&M installation.

2.3.11.4 Plumbing and Drainage Services requirements

The plumbing and drainage installation for this fit-out contract shall include, but not limited to, the following:

(a) This includes the works of the plumbing and drainage system that the Contractor shall design, supply, install, testing and commissioning of the entire plumbing and drainage system as specified in this fit-out contract.

(b) The works shall be carried out in a good manner to the satisfactory of CAM Project Manager.

(c) The Contractor shall design, supply and install the plumbing water system including but not limited to pipeworks, valves, fittings, energy meter, motorized valve, water tank, water pump, pneumatic tank, local motor control panel and all necessary



26

accessories where as necessary to form a complete and healthy system.

(d) The Contractor shall design, supply and install complete soil, waste water and vent disposal systems including but not limited to floor drains, pipeworks, fittings, stainless steel holding tank, submersible pump, level sensor, local motor control panel and all necessary accessories where as necessary to form a complete and healthy system.

(e) The Contractor shall design, supply and install under basin sump pump system complete with submersible pumps, stainless steel holding tank, local motor control panel, pipeworks, fittings, level sensor and all necessary accessories where as necessary to form a complete and healthy system for remote and isolated basin where gravity drainage is not viable. The discharge of this pumped system connected to gravity drainage network shall be provided with pressure relief treatment of change in state from pressurized to gravity flow prior to entering the gravity network. This drainage provision arrangement shall subject to the approval and acceptance by CAM Project Manager prior to installation.

(f) Provision of all steel sleeves and puddle flanges as required by the plumbing and drainage installation.

(g) The Contractor shall provide for, make good for, and supervise all builders’ work required, including drilling and plugging of walls, floors and ceiling for securing of brackets, and other builders’ work as is considered normal to the trade.

(h) The Contractor shall provide and allow sufficient arrangement for working overnight at site whenever it is consider necessary/requested by CAM Project Manager.

(i) Set to work the plumbing and drainage system including all necessary testing and balancing exercise to obtain the designed performance and to handover in good working order of the complete system.

(j) Provide the balancing, test and commissioning of all equipment and system and training to the management company staff. Carry out performance evaluation of equipment/systems supplied/installed.

(k) The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the final installation is in full accordance with the requirements of Relevant Government Authority and any other requirements and regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible of invitation of Water Authority and obtaining the relevant Certificate of Government Authority for the complete plumbing and drainage installation undertaken by them and shall be responsible for all statutory submission.



27

(l) The Contractor shall inform the CAM Project Manager will in advance of any necessary change of existing pipe size or plumbing and drainage layout in order to suit the site conditions. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the taking down and re-fixing works without charges to Employer.

(m) Testing and commissioning for the entire installation and submit the pipework hydraulic test report to the CAM Project Manager for approval.

(n) Provision of painting and labelling of all equipment, pipeworks and materials in accordance to requirement as stated in this specification.

(o) Incidental works and attendance to works design, supply, installation and inspection by relevant government authorities are required.

(p) The Contractor shall be responsible for liaison with all statutory authorities to obtain all necessary certificates and approvals including the completion, preparation and submission of all forms, calculations, drawings, and other documents necessary for submission purpose and payment of any fees and charge. All the costs for each of the tests required by various statutory authorities shall be included.

(q) The Contractor shall seal all gaps and openings around all sleeve-free service pipes/ducts/cables and outer surface of sleeves with approved fire resisting mastic. Whilst, the gaps between the inner surface of pipe sleeves and the services pipes/ducts/cables shall be sealed up with approved fire resisting and/or waterproof mastic.

(r) The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the actual site conditions during installation works. The Contractor shall coordinate with the other services trades to determine the exact positions of the services without conflict. The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out adjustment on routing of pipework due to the actual site requirements. The adjustment shall be in no way having any contradiction to the statutory requirements.

(s) The Contractor shall coordinate on site for exact routing for the new plumbing and drainage pipes with existing services installed. For any existing services such as support to existing services, the Contractor shall inform the CAM Project Manager well in advance of necessary change of existing services in order to suit the new installation. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the taking down and re-fixing works without charging the supporting system for the existing services to Employer.

(t) All plumbing and drainage supply and installation work shall be in full compliancy to the satisfactory of statutory bodies



28

requirement.

(u) Design, supply, install and connection to all the interfacing points with existing BMS system. The dry contact shall be compatible with existing BMS system.

(v) The Contractor shall be responsible to sterilize, clean and flush down of the completed plumbing system including but not limited to distribution pipeworks, water storage tank, etc. upon acceptance of installation works and prior to handover in accordance to the statutory bodies requirement.

(w) Water sampling to be conducted by this Contractor upon completion of the plumbing system. The sampling point locations and analysis methodology shall be submitted to the CAM Project Manager for approval in accordance to the requirement as stated in the statutory bodies requirement.

2.3.11.5 Airport Systems requirements

(a) In this fit-out works, the following airport systems, but not

limited to the following will be involved:

Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System

Public Address (PA) System

Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) System

Access Control System (ACS)

Wireless Network (WLAN) System

Radio Communication System

Voice and Data Cabling (VDC) System

Building Management System (BMS)

(b) Subsequently, the Contractor shall design for the following airport

systems which shall be extended from the existing systems:

Flight Information Display System (FIDS)

Master Antenna Television (MATV) System

Immigration Desks and Display Systems (Arrival)

(Option) Advance Visual Docking Guidance System

(AVDGS)

(c) The Contractor shall design, develop, construct, programme,

configure, engineer, supply, deliver, install, set up, test and

commission the system works as hereunder described,

Specifications, and any works not specifically mentioned but

required to complete the Works.



29

(d) The Contractor shall be responsible for undertaken their own

survey and verifying the findings in terms of the existing capacity

and spare provisions and submit the site investigation report to the

CAM Project Manager for consent prior to commencement of any

service diversion works.

(e) In general, the Contractor shall be responsible for all the works

including but not limited to design, supply, configure, installation

and the interface among with different trades.

(f) The Contractor shall liaise closely and be co-operative with the

CAM Project Manager for detail planning of the services in all fit-

out areas.

(g) The Contractor shall relocate, remove and modify of the existing

facilities which will associate to the fit out works. The proposed

modification works shall be submitted for review without objection

by the CAM Project Manager prior to manufacturing and

installation. All the new installation equipment and modification

work shall be considered as part of this project. The Contractor

shall submit the installation program to CAM Project Manager for

consent.

(h) Should there be any modification, reconfiguration, addition of all

the Airport/ELV systems within the fit-out areas, the overall system

performance in the existing systems shall not be degraded in any

form or causing implication to the airport operations of the existing

systems. All the works under this project shall follows the current

MIA operation and existing system arrangement to upgrade or

modification the existing systems without reduce the performance

of existing system.

(i) The Contractor shall design, supply and install cable containment

system for Airport/ELV systems which including all necessary main

and secondary cable containment facilities (trunkings, conduits etc.)

for the complete system installation.

(j) All the proposed equipment shall be compatible with the existing

CCTV system. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate

with the existing system throughout the interface, installation and

testing and commissioning of the system.



30

(k) The Contractor shall be responsible for site survey on the existing

equipment and system in order to have a basic knowledge on the

design criteria and concept.

(l) The Contractor shall submit the System Integration Plan for

system configuration to existing system, re-configure or modify the

existing software in the central computers to accommodate the

additional equipment into the existing system, including the

implementation of the new configuration. Modification of all

software/firmware is needed if necessary, which including but not

be limited to the software and databases that reside in the

headend processors, controllers, databases, server and all

workstations.

(m) Any works to be carried out by the Contractor shall not affect the

normal operation and current accepted performance of the existing

systems. The works shall also be planned to minimise disturbance

to the airport operations.

(n) The Contractor shall be required to obtain sufficient information

from the CAM Project Manager and to co-ordinate with him to

ensure a smooth interconnection to the existing systems without

service interruption. The Contractor shall submit a detailed Method

Statement and Changeover Plan with necessary fallback/

contingency plans for CAM Project Manager’s consent. The

content of the plans shall contain, but not be limited to:

1. Procedure of works;

2. Possible causes of failure;

3. Activation of contingency arrangement; and

4. The Contractor is required to take up any necessary co-ordination role with the suppliers and/or maintainers of the system.

(o) The Contractor shall coordinate with the CAM Project Manager

and work out a detailed contingency plan before interconnection

and re-configuration to the existing systems. The contingency plan

shall include description on how to minimize the disruption or



31

operations and ensure some levels of organizational stability and

an orderly recovery after system failure. The plan shall:

5. Provide a sense of preparedness and security;

6. Minimize risk of delays and complications;

7. Define actions for alternative processing systems;

8. Minimize decision-making in the event of a disruptive circumstance

2.3.12 BIM Model requirements

The BIM Model requirements for fit-out works and alteration and

addition works shall include, but not limited to, the following:

(a) The Contractor shall apply BIM as the design authoring tool for

fit-out works and alteration and addition works construction

developments.

(b) The Contractor is to model the fit out design in Autodesk Revit

which is a BIM Authoring tool. This is to be modelled in to Level

of Development (LOD) 300. Design elements under 50mm in

size such as cables do not need to be modelled; however the

cable trays/ conduits are to be modelled.

(c) CAM shall provide a BIM model to the Contractor for

information and for coordination. The model shall be based on

the as- built works in RFQ-198 Contract.

(d) On receipt of the RFQ-198 as-built model, the Contractor is to

coordinate this and carry out clash detection to further finalise

the design. Clash detection is to be undertaken in Autodesk

Navisworks. This will assist in the smooth design of the fit-out

and visualisation of the design for the client. At the end of the

Detailed Design Stage, the Contractor shall submit a complete

Design Model of the works to CAM Project manager in the

native Revit format.

(e) At the end of the construction stage of the fit-out works and

alteration and addition works, the Contractor shall submit the

as-built BIM model of the works to CAM Project Manager in the

native Revit format.



32

2.3.13 Civil requirements

The external civil works shall be designed and constructed to the

satisfaction of the CAM Project Manager and to incorporate, inter alia,

the following civil requirements wherever applicable:-

(a) The Contractor shall verify as-built drawings to ensure that any



contractor shall carry out survey works as necessary to ensure



(b) The Contractor shall submit design proposal on any

modifications to existing elements for CAM Project Manager for

review and approval prior to commencement of works.

(c) The Contractor shall prepare statutory submissions and obtain

approval for their design proposal. The Contractor shall make

such submissions in good time as to ensure there is no delay to

the Works. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any

delay due to late receipt of such permits, consents or approvals.

(d) The Contractor shall reinstate any damage during construction

and make good finish to existing elements

(e) The Contractor shall comply with the design standards,



(f) The Contractor shall carry out any necessary tests including

concrete cube tests, steel reinforcement tests etc. and make

submission of test reports, construction records.

(g) The Contractor shall refer to the drawing “Civil Works Layout

MMH-365511-C-0001” in the Appendix as the basis for his

design development. This drawing provides reference for the

scope of works and the interfaces with existing features and

works by others.

2.3.14 Requirements of the Works

The following table shows typical area type only; the Contractor shall

take reference to the Design Requirement Brief, Concept layout, Room

Area and finishes schedule and Room data sheets for the detailed

requirement of each room (Appendices A to D).



33

Typical Area Type General requirements of works for RFQ-221

Office

False ceiling

Sprinklers*

Flooring tiles or raised floor as appropriate

Wall painting

Full MEP provisions including ELV and airport system

Furniture layout design or provide full furniture as appropriate

Room numbers 1-012, 1-013, 3-001

Provide fire extinguisher

CIP Provide Isolators

Provide fire extinguisher

Public Washroom/ Staff Washroom

False ceiling* with sprinkler*

Flooring tiles

Wall tiles

Full MEP provisions including ELV and airport system*

Provide full furniture including sanitary wares, minor etc

Nursery Room False ceiling with sprinkler

Flooring tiles

Wall painting


Provide full furniture including sofa, water basin etc

Fire Vestibule Ceiling*

Flooring tiles

Wall painting*

Landside Corridor/

Airside Corridor

Ceiling*

Flooring tiles

Wall painting *


Public Staircase Ceiling*

Flooring tiles

Wall painting *

Public Area False ceiling* with sprinkler*

Flooring tiles

Wall painting*

Full MEP provisions including ELV and airport system*

Provide full furniture

New ELV Room Ceiling



34

Raised floor

Wall painting


Lifts/ Disabled Lift Flooring tiles

Loading Bridge Provide new carpet

Guard House 4 Provide full furniture


*Works carried out by RFQ-198, the Contractor shall reinstate or modify

to suit the new layout design and functionality.

The Contactor shall refer to the table attached in Appendix E, which

outlined the scope to be carried out by the other RFQ-198 contractor.

The Contractor shall coordinate closely with the other contractors, such

that provisions to be provided by RFQ-198 are clearly understood and

the Contractor shall take up the final installation to complete the fit out

works as required under this Contract.



35

3.1 Specification

3.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 MATERIALS

All materials incorporated in the Works shall be in accordance

with the requirements of this Specification and shall be new

and of pristine commercial quality, free from imperfections,

and selected for long life and minimum maintenance under the

conditions specified. Any reference to any specific material or

equipment does not necessarily imply that such is required to

be included in the Works.

The Contractor shall select and/or treat all materials to prevent

any damage from any possible combinations of atmospheric

deterioration, corrosion, wet rot, dry rot, fungi, mold and any

other deleterious effects including atmospheric pollution, saline

atmosphere and pH of the atmosphere either during

manufacturing, finishing, transportation, storage and

installation.

The Contractor shall use materials, fixers, sealing and finishing

materials that, as a minimum, satisfy current environmental

legislation and do not give off emissions of any sort that may

be considered harmful. In-site replacements shall not cause

harm or nuisance to the building users.

At no time shall silicone be used in a visible location unless

specified as such in the Drawings or with the prior consent of

the Employer’s Representative.

The Contractor may propose alternatives to

design/construction provisions and equipment/materials

specified for the consideration of the Employer and the

Employer’s Representative, if, in his opinion, these would

achieve costs savings, accelerate the working program, and

maintain full compliance with building requirements, without

changing the basic design concept.

1.02 WORKMANSHIP

Where not otherwise specified, all materials and workmanship

shall be to a standard of good building practice in Macau. All

materials shall be of first class quality and of an approved

3 Specifications for Architectural and Interior Design Works



36

brand and type, fixed and applied strictly in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions and to the Employer’s

Representative’s satisfaction.

1.03 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS AND LOCAL

ORDINANCES

The Works shall conform to all Statutory Ordinances, Orders

or Regulations currently having the force of law even if they

supersede the edition specified.

Where the choice of materials or equipment are affected by

the Government of Macau Regulations or local Ordinances,

the materials or equipment supplied shall comply with all

relevant sections of such regulations even though no particular

reference may be mentioned in this Specification.

Where no alternative standards are stated or agreed in the

Contract, all details, materials, equipment and workmanship

for which the British Standards Institution has issued

standards shall be in accordance with such standards, even

though no specific standard may be mentioned in the

Specification. Alternatively, the Employer’s Representative

may approve internationally recognized standards, provided

that all parameters specified can be met.

The Contractor must be able to provide copies of up-to-date

certification for all and any details, materials, equipment or

workmanship procedure, upon request from the Employer’s

Representative.

1.04 MOVEMENTS AND FITTINGS

The Contractor shall construct the Works to withstand all

reasonable static and dynamic loads placed upon it without

causing permanent deformation of components or the failure

of members or opening of joints and shall transmit such loads

safely to the points of support. In particular, all panels provided

shall be stable and free from permanent deformation or

distortion by the worst possible combination of likely

environmental conditions, and withstand all likely static and

dynamic loads applied to them.



37

PART 2 - ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY AND ELECTRICAL

BONDING

2.01 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

The works, including control equipment, microprocessors,

communication links and other items of electronics shall be

designed to achieve the performance criteria in the

electromagnetic environment as specified in the following

standards: BS EN 50082-1 “Electromagnetic compatibility,

generic immunity standard for residential, commercial & light

industry”, BS EN 55014 “Electromagnetic compatibility,

requirements for household appliances, electric tools and

similar apparatus” and BS EN 55015 “Limits and methods of

measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical

lighting and similar equipment”. Immunity shall be

demonstrated by applying test conditions as specified in the

above standards at the various interfaces of the system to the

external electromagnetic environment. In general, the works

shall demonstrably not affect other installations. The

electromagnetic emission of the works shall be controlled to

fall within the limits stipulated in BS EN 50081-1

“Electromagnetic compatibility, generic emission standard for

residential, commercial and light industry”. This restriction shall

apply to the emission from the enclosures and at the coupling

point to the ac (alternating current) mains.

2.02 ELECTRICAL BONDING

The Contractor shall ensure that all extraneous conductive

parts of the works are effectively bonded to earth. (An

extraneous conductive part is defined as being any part, which

is liable to transmit an electrical potential, generally earth

potential, and not forming part of the electrical installation).

Each component shall constitute an extraneous conductive

part. The works shall be electrically continuous as required by

the latest edition of the IEE Regulations. The Contractor shall

provide equipotential bonding in a manner that ensures that

the various exposed conductive parts and extraneous

conductive parts, as defined by the applicable regulations, are

at a substantially equal potential.



38

PART 3 - WATERPROOFING

3.01 WATERPROOFING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The waterproofing of floors and walls and the structural

stability of the finishing system are the prime responsibility of

the Contractor.

The waterproofing requirements shall be in accordance with

each selected product by the Architect (please refer to the

Architecture project “Drawings materials list”, “Finishes

Schedule” and Drawings.

3.02 CEMENTITIOUS COLD APPLIED WATERPROOFING

SLURRY WITH HIGHLY ELASTIC PROPERTIES

The waterproofing of floors and walls and the structural

stability of the finishing system are the prime responsibility of

the Contractor. All floor and wall surfaces on basement shall

be waterproofed by treating with a water repellent coating of

elastomeric cementitious waterproofing membrane and the

Contractor shall particularly make good the water repellent

coating at fixing points. Also areas with plumbing & drainage

services and/or other areas (when specified on drawings) shall

be waterproofed all floor and wall surfaces up to 500mm

A.F.F.L.

This product shall be applied in 2 coats (second coat shall be

applied at right angle to the first coat) with adequate thickness

and dosages required from the manufacturer/supplier. The

contractor shall allow the first coat to dry for 2-4 hours, before

applying the second coat.

This product shall be applied also in the Lower Basement floor

and walls surfaces up to 500mm A.F.F.L. , in 3 coats (second

coat shall be applied at right angle to the first coat, and the 3rd

coat at right angle to the 2nd coat) with adequate thickness

and dosages required from the manufacturer/supplier. The

contractor shall allow the each coat to dry for 2-4 hours, before

applying the next coat.

All waterproofing works shall be warranted for a minimum of 5

years and any defect or water seepage found within the

warranty period shall be sealed and made good all at the

expense of the Contractor.



39

This waterproofing is a two component cement based, graded

fine-grain aggregates with special additives and synthetic

polymer modified high performance non-toxic waterproofing

membrane, which is applied to concrete and mortar substrates

to prevent the ingress of water. After curing, it forms an elastic

waterproof layer impermeable to chlorides, carbon dioxide and

sulphates. The two components are simply mixed at site to

form a highly workable coating, which is spray, roller or brush

applied to the prepared substrate.

A. Surface Preparation:

Concrete, mortar and masonry surface must be clean, free

from grease, oil, laitance, loosely adhering particles and

sharp edges. Remove all grease oil and loose particles. All

absorbent substrates must be dampened down with clean

fresh water prior to the application.

B. Application:

Pour the liquid component into a clean dry mixing container

and mix using a slow speed drill fitted with a paddle. Slowly

add the powder component into the liquid and continue to

mix. When all of the powder has been added, increase the

mixing speed and continue to mix to produce a lump free

slurry. Spray, roller or brush applies, in two coats or tree

coats (depending on the application surface – consult the

manufacturer advises). The second coat should be applied

at right angles to the first and after the first coat has cured

for 2-4 hours.

3.03 WATERPROOFING PVC MEMBRANE

A. Description:

A single-layer homogeneous, non-reinforced liner, with high

tensile properties and high resistance to static and dynamic

puncturing

Flexibility in low temperatures

Insensitivity to hot-cold cycles

High mechanical resistance



40

Vapour permeability

Adaptability to structural movements

Resistance to root growth and micro-organisms

Do not rot.

The surface colors may be chosen from the RAL range

B. Uses:

Typical application are foundations and floor slabs, plaza

decks, roof decks, terraces, fountains, wet rooms, tunnels,

planter boxes, balconies, bathrooms.

C. Application:

After laying the membranes they have to be mechanically

fixed around the perimeter. Weld the membranes using:

The manual hot air welding,

Automatic hot air or wedge welding,

THF solvent welding.

These techniques are not independent of each other; they

can be used simultaneously depending on the particular

circumstances and requirements of each job.

It is essential that the strips of membrane are clean and dry.

3.04 WATERPROOFING CONCRETE SYSTEM

An approval Hydrophobic Waterproof Concrete System, or

other equivalent system as approved by Architect and

Engineer, shall be used in the outdoor areas as indicated /

substantiated on the intention drawing as per above Appendix

(when applicable). The concrete shall contain an approved

Hydrophobic Pore blocking Ingredient as below Table 1’s Type,

Dosage, Thickness and Water absorption rate as measured by

BS 1881: part 122: 1983 except that the age at test shall be at

7 days.



41

HPI System Dosage

per cubic

meter

Water

Absorption

Thickness of

the concrete

All slab section

for

Waterproofing

concrete

30 litres ≤1% 150mm –

400mm

Beams or

columns

8 litres ≤2% Above

400mm

PART 4 - FIRE RATING

The Works shall be composed of materials which do not

readily support combustion or give off noxious fumes, and

shall be non-toxic and non-hygroscopic. The Contractor shall

design and install the Works in compliance with the relevant

Codes and Statutory Requirements, and the requirements of

the local government fire services department.

Specifically, all fire rated materials used should be tested in

accordance with or assessed against B.S. 476 Parts 20 to 24:

1987 or similar and certified as being capable of resisting the

action of fire for the specified fire rated period (FRP).

All combustible materials, if used as false ceilings, partitions

and wall furnishings, shall be of class 1 or 2 Rate of Surface

Spread of Flame as per British Standard 476: Part 7 or be

brought up to that standard by treating with two coatings of fire

retardant paints/solutions on all exposed parts and certified by

a Registered Fire Service Installation Contractor.

All draperies, curtains and carpet should conform with the

relevant British Standard of fire rating or treated with an

approved fire retardant solution conforming to that standard

and certified by a Macau registered Fire Services Contractor.

PU foam filled mattresses and upholstered furniture shall meet

flammability standard as specified in British Standard BS

7177:1996 and BS 7176:1995 for use in medium hazard

premises/building or standards acceptable to the Director of

the Corpo de Bombeiros (Government of Macau Fire Services

Department).



42

Gaps between ducts and openings, as well as those between

sleeves and pipes are to be sealed with approved fire

resistance/waterproof materials to fully comply with Corpo de

Bombeiros requirements.

Similarly, steel dampers/sleeves to all duct penetrations in

walls and slabs shall be grouted for fire isolation.

PART 5 - IRONMONGERY

A. For all ironmongery items, such as door handles, hinges,

locksets, stoppers, etc., refer to “Ironmongery Schedule”

from the Architecture Project. For complete and specific

information about locksets, such as electric/automatic-

controlled locksets devices, etc., refer to Access Control

System Project.

B. All products brands are for reference only. The Contractor

may propose alternatives, with the equivalent quality.

C. Ironmongery is to be supplied and installed in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions, care being taken to

ensure that all parts function properly and are not strained.

Screws shall match the finish of the ironmongery, and shall

be of suitable size and head shape. Any screws or

ironmongery damaged during installation shall be replaced

at the Contractor’s own expense. The Contractor shall allow

for cutting mortises, drilling holes, screwing in place, etc. as

required.

D. All locks are to be provided with three keys. Each key shall

be provided with an approved circular chromium plated

brass plate 25mm diameter x 1.5mm thick stamped (by the

Contractor) with the identification of the name or number of

the room to which it is matched.



43

PART 6 - SECURITY AND FIRE RATED SHUTTERS

A. The metallic security roller shutters shall be in

Galvanized Mild Steel, Stainless Steel Grade 316 or

Aluminum (refer to the drawings for the chosen/specified

material), with motor driven operation, and vertically

orientation. The posts shall be strong and durable

enough to cope under extreme conditions, such as

tropical storms.

B. Electrically operated security roller shutters shall be

used for secure enclosure of openings and shall include

one set of push button.

C. Shutters shall be tested to meet the relevant recognized

standards for impact resistance and fire retardancy.

D. Shutters can include, if specified, polycarbonate infill, UV

stabilized and resistant to staining or discoloration.

E. The electrical motor powering the shutter shall have a

brake release level limit switch, manual chain override

and adjustable pre-set opening and closing speeds.

F. The distance from the power point to the motor shall be

within one metre.

G. The manufacturer shall provide, at least, one year

warranty.

H. For painted shutters, which are from galvanized mild

steel, the painting system shall be applied in the factory

and shall be as follow:

1. Prime paint – Rust inhibitive prime paint base coat,

in accordance with ANSI A250.1;

2. Top coat – Two-part urethane top coat,

electrostatically applied over the primer, and then

oven cured.



44

PART 7 - VENTILATION LOUVERS

A. The structural stability of the windows and louvres shall be

designed to meeting with the following regulations and

codes:

1. The Building (Construction) Regulation Cap. 123 –

Section B.

2. The Code of Practice under the Building Ordinance for

wind effects.

3. The British Standard Institute Code of Practice no.

118 – “The use of Aluminum”.

All aluminum extrusions used will be of alloy 6063-T5 with a

tensile strength of 22,000 p.s.i. for architectural application.

The surface finish of aluminum will be powder coating, color

to match existing frames.

All louvers shall include an integrated rust-proof metal mesh

screen for protection against animal entry.

Before erection to the structural opening, all aluminum

framings will be covered with protective p.v.c. tape to avoid

scratches and or damages caused by external and internal

wall finishes. Sections installed in contact with dissimilar

materials will be received by a heavy back coating of

bituminous paint to prevent corrosion. Protective tape will be

removed from the frames upon agreement with the

Employer’s Representative and cleaning of aluminum will be

carried out afterwards.

All scaffolding, if required, hoisting facilities, storage space

on site, all concrete box outs, water and electricity supplies

are the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. The ventilation louvers shall be:

1. A single bank universal louvers system type (refer to

Architecture Project Louvers Schedule)

Proprietary louvre system shall be Multi-purpose

Universal Louvre System, manufactured by an



45

accredited brand and shall be comprise 1UL/SH

(shallow) Single Bank Louvre (50 pitch).

2. A double bank universal louvers system type (refer to

Architecture Project Louvers Schedule)

Proprietary louvre system shall be Multi-purpose

Universal Louvre System, manufactured by an

accredited brand and shall be comprise 2UL/SH

(shallow) Double Bank Louvre (50 pitch).

C. Quality Assurance

Louvres, trims and all accessories, shall be designed,

produced, fabricated and installed to withstand the loading

Criteria, as specified herein, without failure including

permanent deflection/deformation, failure to meet

performance criteria, finish defects and other defects in the

Work.

Standards: Comply with referenced standards. Refer to

those standards for definitions of louvre terms not otherwise

defined in this section.

Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced specialist

who has completed the technical design, fabrication and

installation of proprietary louvre in material, design, and a

record of successful in-service performance. The

manufacturer shall confirm they have obtained ISO9001 (BS

5750 Part 1) certification issued by a certification body

acceptable to the Employer for the design and manufacture

of air and ventilation equipment and shall demonstrate to the

Employer’s Representative satisfaction that the quality

assurance procedures comply with the said standard.

The type of the louvre system shall have a substantial track

record, of not less than 10 years for the design of high

performance louvre systems worldwide in applications with

similar typhoon conditions in Macau and Hong Kong and

tested to standards listed in this specification.

For each panel the supplier shall issue an approved 5 year

warranty in respect of premature failure due to defective

materials or unsatisfactory workmanship in normal use.



46

D. Architecture

Architecture Full set of shop drawings, structural calculation

and samples shall be submitted to the Employer’s

Representative within 30 days of commencement of

Contract for approval.

Louvre panels shall be formed to give a continuous

horizontal line effect throughout the length of the panel, with

louvre blades supported on hidden mullions.

External louvre blades shall be attached to vertical mullions

without surface drilling on riveting and shall remain

horizontal with equal spacing at all times irrespective of

environmental temperature changes. Louvre fixing shall

allow for day-to-day expansion and contraction without

distortion.

The louvre system should be capable of being installed

horizontally, vertically or inverted and in the case of the

double bank design shall have the same air and rain

defense capabilities as in the conventional mode.

E. Construction

The construction of Louvres shall be from roll-formed alloy

to BS1470: 1972 NS4 H3 or extruded to BS1474, type 6063-

T5.

The louvre shall be supplied in either modular or breakdown

form and shall comprise:

External cill, side and top frames of channel section

Vertical support mullions with drainage channels

Horizontal louvre blades

All component parts shall be aerodynamically shaped and

cold roll formed or extruded to ensure conformity of shape.

The louvres shall incorporate a drainage system such that

water collected within each panel is drained down via the



47

mullion and internal drainage channels and down the louvre

face.

Bird guards, where required shall be fitted to the rear of

each panel and manufactured from expanded aluminium

mesh in mill finish.

Blank-off plates shall be fitted at the back of louvers where

the area is not active for ventilation. The blank-off plates

shall be made in aluminium with thickness to be 1.5mm to

3.0mm. Paint finish can be Powder-coating, PVF2 or in mill

finish.

Louvre system shall include all accessories necessary for

fixing and waterproofing of the system, which shall include,

inter alia, all concealed vertical and horizontal members,

bolts, fixing angles, flashings, copings, sealants, trimming

angles, insect screen to openings and blanking plates.

Wind loadings: All components and fixings of the system

shall be designed to withstand wind loadings according to

Macau Codes and Code of Practice on Wind Effects Hong

Kong 1983.

F. Louvres Type/Description

Fixed formed horizontal blades and frame, 1.2mm minimum

thickness; pitch of 50mm; blade angle of 45, sight proof;

hidden vertical support mullions; continuous horizontal line

effect; external mitred corner fittings where indicated on the

drawings; louvres shall incorporate a drainage system such

that water collected within each panel is drained down via

the mullion and internal drainage channels; expanded mesh

bird guards; free area of not less than 60%; blades to be

attached to mullions without surface drilling / riveting and

shall remain horizontal with equal spacing at all times

irrespective of environmental temperature change; fixings to

allow day to day expansion and contraction without

distortion; projecting frames to dimensions indicated on

drawings, including drips and concealed fixings , all to be

fully coordinated with integral profiled aluminium extrusion

head, transom and cill where indicated on the drawings.



48

G. Performance

1. General

Provide products and accessories capable of

compliance with the requirements specified herein.

2. Performance requirement

Louvres shall be designed to satisfy the following

performance requirements:

Extent Performance Description Requirement

Louvres Deflection Non-permanent No permanent

warpage, sag, or

oil-canning

Louvres Flame Spread Acceptable

rating as noted.

Class 1 or better

Louvres Toxic smoke

release due to

fire.

Acceptable non-

life threatening

incapacitation

level.

Max. LC50

Louvres Vibration &

rattling

Acceptable level. No vibration,

rattling or

dislodgement

due to train

piston effect or

wind.

Static pressure loss shall not be more than 20Pa and

40Pa for single and double bank louvers respectively at

a face velocity of 2.5m/s when tested in accordance to

UK HEVAC standard.

No permanent damage, buckling, undue stress on any

component or assembly, failure of joint, undue stress on

structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners,

reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects

shall occur when louvres and vents and their

components are subjected to the loads and pressures

indicated in the table above.



49

No permanent damage, buckling, undue stress on any

component or assembly, failure of joint, undue stress on

structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners,

reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects

shall occur when louvres and vents and their

components are subjected to the loads and pressures

indicated in the table above.

Provide holes to accept equipotential bonding by others

in a manner that ensures that the various exposed

conductive parts are at a substantially equal potential.

Louvres shall be free of visual discontinuities and

defects such as: ripples, oil- canning, creases, dents,

bubbles and blisters, variation in colour and gloss, etc.

regardless of the measured deviation from flatness of

the panels.

Where used for ventilation, the specialist louvre shall

provide high volume airflow at the stated (or low)

pressure drop with listed rain defense requirements with

actual performance tests verified by independent

authority (performance class as listed). Louvre blades

shall be aerodynamically shaped to provide minimum

restriction to airflow, low velocity and shall have inlet

coefficient of not less than: Double bank 0.308, (Class

2). The coefficient shall be established as a result of full

scale wind tunnel tests carried out on a louvre

measuring not less than 1200mm x 1200mm to limit the

influence of edge effects and bird guard fitted.

Louvres employed for smoke ventilation shall be

capable of withstanding a temperature up to 250 degree

C for not less than one hour. The Contractor shall

submit test report issued by an authorized laboratory to

confirm compliance of such standard.

The performance of the combination of 2UL/Type R

shall achieve the minimum transmission loss dB as

follows:



50

Octave

Band Hz

Octave Band

Centre

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Frequency,

Hz

63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K

Transmission

loss dB

8 9 12 15 16 17 15 12

Purpose Velocity

m/s

Louvre / Acoustic /

Combination

P drop Pa

Intake 2.0 70

Exhaust 2.0 80

H. Decorative Finishing

1. The colour of decorative finishing shall be approved by

the Employer’s Representative. Contractor to submit

0.4m x 0.4m mock up sample for approval, when the

designed louvre size have the same or bigger

dimension. If the designed louvre size is smaller than

0.4m x 0.4m, the mock up sample for approval shall

have the exact dimension as designed.

Where Louvres are exposed to external, all the louvre

frames, external louvre blades, vertical and horizontal

projections and features attached to louvre system shall

be finished in PVF2 (3-coats system), color (refer to

Architecture Project Louvres Schedule). The inner

louvre blades, mullions shall be finished with polyester

powder coating with colour to match. Where louvres are

set behind the curtain walling features, all the louvre

components shall be finished with a polyester powder

coating to an average thickness of 40/60 microns to a

colour to be agreed by the Employer’s Representative.



51

Where louvre area is inactive, an aluminium blanking

plate in 1.5mm thickness with finished in polyester

powder coating 'BLACK' colour shall be fitted behind.

2. All exposed components of the louvre system shall

receive PVF2 coating as follows:

Colour Coating(s) shall be PVF2 Polyvinylidene

Fluoride 3 coats system and shall be applied to the

aluminium louvre in accordance with AAMA 605.2-90

and paint manufacturer's specification.

All components shall be factory finished by a single

applicator approved by the coating supplier in order to

ensure consistency of finish.

All components shall receive a spray coat primer on all

significant surfaces (as defined in BS5411: Part 1: 1980)

to the thickness recommended by the supplier and

allowed to cure for the interval recommended by the

manufacturer before the spray application of the

subsequent and top coats to a minimum dry film

thickness of 25 microns. All the coatings including the

primer and top coat shall be provided by the same

supplier.

The over coating of elements shall not be allowed.

All finished surfaces shall be smooth, free from

blemishes pinholes, tears orange peel effect and other

coating defects when evenly illuminated by diffuse light

and viewed using normal corrected vision from a

distance of one metre.

There shall be no 'seeding' of the cured film which shall

be dense and consistent.

3. Colour Uniformity: Limits for acceptable production

variations are to be established between the

Employer’s Representative and the Contractor by

reference samples.



52

4. Performance Requirements

Hardness - Pencil:

The finish shall achieve a minimum rating of F in

accordance with AAMA 605.6.3.

Film Adhesion:

The finish shall achieve excellent 'Knife' adhesion.

Impact Resistance:

There shall be no removal using a Gardener Variable

Impact Tester as AAMA 605.6.5.

Abrasion Resistance:

The finish shall achieve an abrasion coefficient value of

20 minimum according to AAMA 605.6.6.

Acid Resistance:

Using the Muriatic Acid Spot Test the finish shall show

no signs of attack after 15 minutes as AAMA 605.7.1.

Resistance to Acid Pollutants:

The finish shall achieve not more that 5 E Units (NBS)

as stipulated in AAMA 605.7.3.

Detergent Resistant (3%) immersion at @ 100° F:

The finish shall show no signs of attack after 72 hours

in accordance with AAMA 605.7.4.

Humidity Resistance 100% RH @ 100° F:

The finish shall have fewer than eight blisters after 3000

hours exposure in accordance with AAMA 605.8.1.

Salt Spray Resistance 5% salt @ 100° F:



53

The finish shall have 1.5mm maximum undercutting

after 3000 hours exposure in accordance with AAMA

605.8.1.

Colour Retention (ASTM-2244-90):

The finish shall have maximum of 5 E Units (NBS)

colour change after 5 years of 45° North exposure in

accordance with AAMA 605.9.1.1.

Chalk Resistance (ASTM-D-4214-89) (1970):

The finish shall have no more chalking than that

represented by a No.8 rating for colour and a No.6

rating for whites after 5 years of 45° North exposure in

accordance with AAMA 605.9.1.2.

Sealant Compatibility:

No deleterious effects to the coating shall occur in

accordance with AAMA 605.10.

Alkali Resistance (Mortar Pat Test 100% Muriatic Acid

Spot Test):

The finish shall show no signs of attack after 24 hours

in accordance with AAMA 605.7.2.

Erosion:

The finish shall suffer a loss no greater than 20% after 5

years at 45° North Exposure in accordance with AAMA

605.9.2.

I. The inner louvre blades, mullions shall receive powder

coating as follows:

1. Pre-treatment

The following process shall be provided:

Degrease in alkaline solution

Alkaline etched



54

Chromate corrosion

Phosphate corrosion

2. Powder coating shall be applied electrostatically.

Louvre to be stored to effect curving of paint 10/15

minutes at 200°C Film thickness achieved with single

coat application average 60 microns. There shall be no

colour variations.

J. Installation and Workmanship

1. General

Materials, products and support system shall be

installed in accordance with the following:

Before the installation work, the installer shall inspect

and accept the conditions of the substrate in which the

work is to be installed on or affixed to. Nothing in the

material, workmanship or construction method used in

the work of this section shall invalidate any

manufacturers’ warranties or reduce their warranty

period.

The installation shall only be carried out by the team

with authorization from the manufacturer and all in

accordance with the method statement advised by the

manufacturer and approved by the Employer’s

Representative.

2. Protection, Delivery and Storage

Protect louvre materials during delivery, storage and

handling complying with manufacturer’s directions and

as required to prevent damage to louvres related

materials from effects of moisture, condensation,

temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, exposure

to subsequent construction activities, and from other

causes.

Store materials at designated locations. Under no

circumstances shall the structure be over-loaded with

stored materials.



55

3. Preparation

Pre-installation meeting: At the Contractor’s direction,

louvre supplier and other trades relating to the Work of

this section shall meet and review procedures and time

schedule proposed for installation and co-ordination

with other Work.

List installation requirements specific to each primary /

secondary materials / systems.

4. Examination

Examine conditions, with installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of louvres.

Provide advance notice of such examination to the

Employer’s Representative, who reserves the right to

be present. Do not proceed with installation until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

K. Fabrication and Installation

1. Fabrication, General

Maintain equal louvre blade spacing, including

separation between blades and frames at head and sill,

to produce uniform appearance.

Fabricate frames, including integral projecting cills,

transom head and jamb sections, to fit in openings of

sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication

and installation tolerances of louvres, adjoining

construction, and perimeter sealant joints.

Include supports, anchorages, and accessories

required for complete assembly.

For Exterior Louvres: Provide vertical mullions of type

and at spacing indicated but not more than

recommended by manufacturer.



56

2. Installation

Locate and place louvre units plumb, level, and at

indicated alignment with adjacent work.

Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide

stainless steel washers fitted to screws where required

to protect metal surfaces.

Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections

accurately located and secured.

The louvre system shall be suitable for easy site

assembly where for large panels all components will be

supplied in total breakdown.

All bolts and fixings shall be stainless steel of

appropriate grade and mechanical properties to suit

designed functions.

Louvre panels shall be suitably fixed to prepared

framed openings with support framework/cleats suitably

sized to suit the required wind loadings.

3. Submissions

The Contractor shall submit the name of the

manufacturer with details of track record of the

manufacturer’s previous projects of similar scale and

nature of not less than 10 years. Other submissions

include the followings:

4. Shop Drawings Required

The shop drawings shall comply with the functional and

architectural requirements of the drawings.

The following information is required to be indicated on

the submitted shop drawings.

Complete plans, sections and elevations at a scale of

1:20 indicating all louvre, units, overall dimensions of

each of the panels, number and location of fixings

thereof, to the structural openings, and concealed



57

structural framing as required behind long span louvres,

etc.

Dimensioned sections of all jamb, mullion, transom, sill

and head details, drawn at full scale, indicating the

proposed methods of fixing, forming joints, location of

sealants etc. including the relationship of various

sections to the interior and exterior faces of walls.

Details shall indicate all section thicknesses,

dimensional position of blades in respect to frame,

sealant types back up rods, provision for escape of

water around seals, thickness of frame fixing, etc. and

specification for materials and finishes.

5. Calculations Required

The louvre system shall be designed to withstand wind

loading in accordance with the Code of Practice.

Structural calculation shall be provided for structural

supporting members.

Co-ordinate with building service contractor and submit

calculations, certified by a qualified engineer, confirming

individually that all the louvre panels are sized to satisfy

the specified air-flow criteria.

L. Certifications Required

Extent Requirement

General Certify that louvre materials and support systems

furnished comply with the applicable standards,

and manufacturing standards and specified

requirements.

Louvres. Provide certifications for compliance with HEVAC

standard for airflow requirements.



58

M. Samples Required

Number Size Extent

1 400×400mm Fabricated sample assembly of

louvre required.

Illustrate blade design, spacing

and frame construction.

N. Testing and Inspection

Tests Required

The following testing standards apply to the extent indicated:

Standard Test Extent

Designation Name

UK HEVAC Standard

with Witnessed by

BSRIA

“Testing and Rating of

Weather Louvres When

Subjected to Simulated Rain”

External

Louvres

PART 8 - LIGHTING TROUGHS AND AIR-CONDITIONING GRILLES

A. The Contractor shall be required to check the drawings

of the E & M Contractors and shall obtain full particulars

of their requirements with regard to position, size, the

weight of those fittings, accesses, cuttings, finishing and

other such details in sufficient time to allow in the design

and installation of the suspended ceiling system for

cutting and forming openings and providing additional

framings, stringers, hangers, etc., to accommodate the

said requirements.

PART 9 - ADHESIVES

A. Adhesives used for timberwork and joinery are to be

synthetic resin adhesives of gap filling type complying

with B.S. 1204: “Specification for type MR phenolic and

amino-plastic synthetic resin adhesives for wood”. The



59

use of animal glues will not be permitted.

B. Adhesive for fixing laminated plastic sheeting to be an

approved synthetic resin adhesive complying with B.S.

1204 (as above) and when the temperature exceeds

25°C, a “warm-setting” grade of adhesive is to be used.

In such case urea-formaldehyde or resorcinol adhesive

shall be used.

PART 10 - GASKETS

A. The Contractor shall:

1. Bond and mechanically fix all gaskets to their

appropriate panels. All gaskets to be manufactured

from “soft” neoprene profiles as per Drawings with

hardness values of between Shore hardness 50A to

70A when measured to ASTM D2240.00 (Shore /

Durometer Hardness test);

2. Provide all gaskets in a color to match their adjacent

material and with a 30% gloss factor; and,

3. Provide gaskets which do not shrink or warp and shall

not deteriorate between the periods stated in the

Contractor's stated times for replacement in the

Maintenance Guidelines.

PART 11 - SEALANTS

A. The Contractor shall generally not use sealants without

prior approval from the Employer’s Representative when

they shall:

1. Submit proposals to the Employer’s Representative of

type and color and silicone and receive a notice of no

objection prior to ordering;

2. Obtain written confirmation from the sealant

manufacturer and submit to the Employer’s

Representative for consideration as to the suitability of

the sealant for the application intended.



60

3. The period during which the silicone does not change

in appearance or color shall be stated, and should be

longer than the Signs warranty period. Any

discoloration of silicone during this time shall not be

acceptable;

4. Apply sealant in accordance with the supplier's /

manufacturer's written preparatory and application

procedures;

5. Remove excess silicone and leave all joints neat and

clean;

6. Use sealants compatible with the joint surfaces and to

each other, as stated in the manufacturer's published

data or as certified by the manufacturer for each

application;

7. Determine the proper hardness, compressibility or

consistency of sealants in consultation with the

manufacturer, considering the joint movement and

exposure for the size of joint;

8. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Employer’s

Representative that the silicone joints can

accommodate and are compatible with any movements

to which they may be subjected;

9. Use sealant that can withstand the applicable degree of

exposure to wear, abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant

exposed to traffic shall have strength and modulus to

resist damage indentation;

10. Protect silicone joints during the curing process to

avoid contamination by dust and other debris;

11. Use colored silicone to match the adjacent materials

as shown on the Drawings.

12. Use closed cell type backing rods compatible with the

silicone used.



61

PART 12 - FINISHES

The Contractor shall:

Submit samples of all finishes to the Employer’s

Representative for review prior to commencement of

production manufacture;

Use finishes which are durable, of uniform texture and color,

and resilient to all likely environmental and pollution effects;

Provide finishes, which are uniform in texture, color and

appearance within the limits of the agreed samples and

without irregularities or distortions. Welds, rivets, screws and

stiffeners, etc., which are intended to be visible shall be

treated so that there is no discontinuity of the finished surface

appearance;

Exert all necessary controls to ensure uniformity in

manufacture to maintain uniformity of all surface finishes for

the Works;

Achieve uniformity of identical surface finishes between

adjacent integral units, adjacent whole fabricated units,

between any part of the remainder of the Works as well as any

adjacent or existing finish.

Provide full resistance to any corrosion or any deleterious

effect to the applied finishes caused by manufacturing,

transportation, storage and/or installation. The Contractor shall

ensure total maintenance of the finish systems for components

that are secured or bolted to each other, paying particular

attention to the surface damage caused by such bolting or

securing.

12.01 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

Prior to the commencement of any installation, check and

verify the elevations and locations of the substrate in all areas

to receive finishes and compare these locations to the

indicated plan dimensions. This verification shall include

checking for walls out-of-square with each other, walls out of

plumb, window and door openings and all other substrate

conditions that might have an impact upon the accurate

placement of finishes.



62

The Contractor shall examine the background surfaces to

receive the finishes and shall report to the Employer’s

Representative all defects that will prevent proper installation.

The support structure shall be adjusted and completed so that

any stone, metal or timber finishes will be properly and

securely sustained. Work shall not be started until defects

have been corrected.

Backing walls shall be dry and free from dust, dirt, grease or

oil.

The Contractor shall report in writing to the Employer’s

Representative any condition which in his opinion will affect

the satisfactory execution of his work or endanger its

permanency as it will be considered that upon laying the first

piece of render, screed or finish, the surface has been

accepted without reservation and no subsequent claim as to

suitability or otherwise of the base and finishes will be

considered.

When work is not in progress the top of all wall areas where

finishes are being installed, shall be fully protected by a

waterproof cover.

Unless otherwise specified or shown, floor levels shown on

drawings are finished levels and base slabs are to be set down

to allow floor finishes of differing thicknesses to finish level.

Floors shall be finished truly plane either level or to falls as

indicated. All finished surfaces shall be finished to a true and

even surface over whole areas to within -3.0mm when tested

with a 3m long straight edge and the rate of departure shall not

be greater than 1.5mm for each 500mm in distance from any

point of contract along the straight edge.

Adjoining finishes, including those to fall, shall finish at the

same level at doors and elsewhere as applicable.

12.02 GALVANIZING

Unless otherwise specified, all galvanized coatings shall be

applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a smooth,

clean zinc coating free from defects and of uniform thickness

complying with BS729 [1971 (1994) Specification for hot dip

galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles]. Sherardizing,

parkerizing, or other alternative processes shall not be used

without the Employer’s Representative's review.



63

All drilling, punching, tapping and bending of parts shall be

completed and all burrs removed before galvanizing is done.

Any works not possible to be undertaken before galvanizing

shall be post-treated in accordance with BS 729 [1971 (1994)

Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel

articles].

The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall

not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the wire or

coated material.

12.03 PAINTING

Workmanship:

All painting shall be carried out by skilled workmen in the best

possible manner to produce a first class finish, free from all

blemishes, brush marks, blisters, weeping, exudation, peeling,

wrinkling etc.

All brushes, tools, pots, etc. used in carrying out the work shall

be clean and free from foreign matter, and shall be thoroughly

cleaned out before being used with a different type or class of

material. The mixing of paints of different types will not be

permitted.

All priming undercoats and finishes used on the same work

shall be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be those

recommended by the manufacturer as suitable for using

together.

All internal and external surfaces shall be perfectly dry before

any paint, etc. is applied. All coats shall be thoroughly dry

before subsequent coats are applied and all rubbing between

coats shall be done with fine glass paper. Successive coats of

paint shall be of slightly differing tints to aid in identifying

uniform coverage.

Unless otherwise specified, all paint shall be applied with

approved quality bristle brushes, or by means of compressed

air spraying or airless spray at the Contractor’s option with the

prior approval from the Employer’s Representative. The use of

rags or cotton waste for painting of any description will not be

permitted.

The Contractor shall ensure that any painted steel surfaces

are sufficiently hard to resist heavy impacts from hand held



64

objects without any noticeable change to the surface

appearance. As required by the Employer’s Representative,

he shall undertake tests to demonstrate the performance of

these surfaces in resisting abrasion from maintenance staff

(hands, rings, cleaning fluids, etc.) operations and any other

abrasion resulting from adjacent pedestrian traffic movements.

Preparation and Painting of Plastered and Rendered Surfaces:

All plastered and rendered surfaces shall be thoroughly

washed as necessary, swept down and stopped. “Washing”

shall mean the removal by washing with clean water of all

materials not absorbed into the underlying surfaces. “Swept

down” shall mean the thoroughly dry brushing of any surface

with a stiff broom or brush so as to remove all cobwebs, dust

or loose particles of previous finishes. “Stopping” to plaster

shall be carried out carefully by trimming the edges of all

crevices, cracks or holes of any description and filing with an

approved proprietary brand of filler to produce even, flat

surfaces.

All stains shall be removed from walls, ceilings and other

plastered surfaces prior to decoration.

Preparation and Priming of Metalwork:

All metalwork to be painted shall be first thoroughly scraped

and brushed to remove all rust and mill scale and painted with

one coat of rust inhibitor/primer.

Galvanized metalwork shall be given one coat of Galvanized

Iron Primer. All welded joints where the galvanizing has been

removed are to be painted with a paint that shall work both as

a primer (for conventional oil and alkyd topcoats) and as a

coat finish.

All non-galvanized metalwork not exposed to view such as

backs of angle frames, core rails covered by plastic brackets,

etc., are to be primed with one coat corrosion resistant metal

primer before fixing.

Cleaning Down:

All work, fittings, etc. shall be covered and protected during the

progress of the painting and all splashes shall be removed



65

from floors, skirting, etc., and the whole left clean and perfect

on completion.

Plastic Emulsion Paint:

Plastic emulsion paints shall be plasticized Polyvinyl Acetate

base emulsions of approved brands, supplied and used direct

from the manufacturer’s containers. Surfaces to receive

emulsion paint shall be prepared and painted with a minimum

of two coats of emulsion paint all in accordance with the

manufacturer’s specification. The first coat on porous surfaces

may be thinned with 10% (by volume) of water, the material

otherwise being applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions. Alkyd resin based emulsion paints shall not be

used without prior approval of the Employer’s Representative.

All plastic emulsion paint shall be lead-free of ICI brand or

other approved equivalent, except when other is specified.

Priming Paints

Priming paint for ferrous metal surfaces shall be a corrosion

resistant metal primer or a special rust inhibiting primer of the

same brand as the synthetic paint to be applied following, or

equivalent, except when other is specified.

PART 13 - INTERFACES

13.01 SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE

Before commencing the Works, the Contractor shall survey the

structure, checking line, level, fixing points and all relative E &

M points and report immediately to the Employer’s

Representative if the structure is unsuitable to receive the

Works. The Contractor shall confirm the suitability of structure

to the Employer’s Representative before starting work on Site.

13.02 CO-ORDINATION

The Contractor shall co-ordinate all interfaces of the works. To

facilitate this process, the Contractor shall obtain detailed

works programs from each separate contractor and supplier

for integration into the overall project program.



66

13.03 SERVICES INTERFACES

The Contractor shall consider the interfaces with the E&M

engineering services Works, in particular, any service

penetrations through the Works and manage, as necessary,

the relevant nominated sub-contractors. All penetrations shall

be agreed with the Employer’s Representative and no

penetrations through glass, laminated panel, structural

elements or framework shall be permitted unless shown on the

Drawings or agreed with the Employer’s Representative.

All openings for trucking, conduits, pipes and ducts passing

through party walls shall be made good, fire stopped and

sealed with fire rated protection appropriate to match the wall

rating.

PART 14 - SAMPLES, PROTOTYPES AND BENCHMARKS

14.01 SAMPLES

The Contractor shall provide 2 sets of samples of each

proposed finish material and proprietary item for review by the

Employer’s Representative at least two (2) weeks prior to the

latest order date for the said material or item. In addition,

acceptable limits to color deviation from two samples of each

finish shall be agreed with the Employer’s Representative prior

to manufacture. One sample of each material is to be retained

by the Contractor on site (after approval) and the other by the

Employer’s Representative.

For each change of color batch a new sample shall be

prepared and reviewed as before. Where there is a natural

variation in the material, the Contractor shall submit a range of

samples (minimum 3no.) that approximate the natural material.

All flat surface finishes or materials (such as painted or stone

surfaces) shall be provided at a minimum 300mm x 300mm

size, and all linear items no less than 300mm in length.

14.02 PROTOTYPES / BENCHMARKS

The scope and arrangements of the prototypes shall be as

shown below, made by the specified materials, except where

noted as such. All elements should faithfully reflect the

volumetric intent of the Employers Drawings.



67

1m long all floor-to-floor finish thresholds (when applicable);

1m long typical wall skirting detail (when applicable);

All ceiling-to-ceiling junction details (when applicable);

A 1.2m wide wall tiles finish and 2 rows of floor tiles to show

the wall to floor joints (when applicable);

10sq.m modification of existing general false ceiling with the

installation of new specified light fittings (when applicable);

Other prototypes on request (when applicable);

The prototypes shall be fully examined in terms of details for

suitability and accessibility by the Employer’s Representative,

Designer and Client, and will be subject to changes, which will

then be incorporated into the Contractor Shop Drawings.

Upon approval of the prototype, the Contractor shall clear it

away or, if completed to a fully finished standard, store it on

site as a benchmark, as instructed by the Employer’s

Representative.

Any benchmarks will be studied by the Employer’s

Representative for design accuracy, quality of finish, ease of

use and accessibility (if applicable) and if approved, the

fabrication will establish acceptable standards for the

remainder of these Works.

PART 15 - PROTECTION, CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE

15.01 PROTECTION

The Contractor shall take all precautions to protect finishes

and surfaces and shall replace at his own expense any finish

or surface which is damaged or defaced and shall hand over

all of the works on completion in a clean condition, with

protection removed (as agreed by the Employer’s

Representative). It should be noted that the replacement of

damaged or defaced work, where required, might be extended

at the Employer’s Representative’s discretion to include the

whole of the room or area affected.

The Contractor shall protect all surfaces with plywood and

maintain this protection throughout the duration of the fitting

out works then remove before hand-over to the Employer.



68

It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure proper

adhesion between all finishes and the structure and he shall

replace at his own cost any loose or defective works,

notwithstanding any claim by the Contractor that he has

followed the Employer’s Representative’s instruction and

specifications regarding the preparation of the surface.

The Contractor is to protect all walls and floor finishes after

completion, if possible by locking up the area. Traffic over the

floor shall be limited to essential traffic only.

No protective finish is to be laid or applied which will in any

way inhibit fixing of later finishes.

Protection shall include periodic cleaning where required to

prevent dirt, grit etc. from becoming ingrained thereto.

15.02 CLEANING

The contractor must keep the site clean, tidy and free of

rubbish at all times and remove from site all rubbish in sealed

containers as it accumulates. In addition, he shall ensure that

all debris, materials and plant are removed on completion. No

storage of materials and debris will be permitted the public

areas of the building unless otherwise permitted by the

Landlord.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all

elements to be used from the existing building in the new

works shall be properly and thoroughly cleaned before re-

installation.

Upon completion, the Contractor is to clean and remove all

marks and dirt from finished surfaces, and ensure that all

fittings, doors, etc., are in proper working order and to the

entire satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.

In particular stone, shall be cleaned by spraying clean water

onto the stone surface and stains, mortar and other adherents

removed from it with a cleaning chisel, nylon brush, etc. No

acid of any kind shall be used for cleaning stonework surfaces.

If the use of acid is inevitable and agreed with Employer’s

Representative, the Contractor shall protect adjacent

metalwork with proper means to resist oxidation and wash

stone surfaces with ample water to keep the surfaces

completely free of residual acid. After washing, all stone shall

be let to dry and then wiped with a cloth.



69

The Contractor shall state the frequency and method of all

cleaning required maintaining performance of all finishes in the

Maintenance Guidelines. The Contractor shall inform the

Employer’s Representative the maximum time during which

the performance can be maintained together with the

frequency and method of cleaning required to achieve this.

15.03 WASTAGE

The Employer has allowed reasonable wastage when ordering

of each type of material based on the measurement as

provided by the Contractor. The Contractor will be fully

responsible for any delay or extra costs so caused by

inadequate amount of materials delivered to the site due to

any errors in measurement so provided by the Contractor

and/or the actual wastage of material during construction

higher than the allowance for the reasonable wastage by the

Employer, provided always that the Employer will only be

responsible for the cost for the actual material including

reasonable wastage for the completion of the works. The

Contractor will be also responsible for the unloading of the

material so delivered to the Site and providing proper storage

of the materials to the satisfaction of the Employer. If there are

any damages to the material during the handing and the

construction of the works, the contractor will be required to

reimburse the Employer for all extra costs for ordering of

additional amount of material and also will be responsible for

all the delay so caused to the Contract.

15.04 MAINTENENCE GUIDELINES

The Contractor shall provide maintenance guidelines, to be

submitted as draft documents to the Employer’s

Representative and Designer prior to the project completion

and as final documents within 1 month of receiving approval of

the draft guidelines. The guidelines shall include full details of:

Record drawings of construction;

All details of manufactured items to enable re-supply and

replacement;

Cleaning procedures;

Maintenance procedures;



70

All other maintenance requirements deemed necessary by the

Contractor for the proper performance of the Works throughout

the period of warranty.

PART 16 - TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF

MATERIALS

16.01 GENERAL

The Contractor shall ensure the correct and safe handling of

all elements paying particular attention to the protection of

finished materials and surfaces. During transportation and

storage, all containers shall have their contents clearly

identified outside of the packing for quick reference at their

destination. The Contractor shall ensure adequate insurance

protection for their Works, valid up until project completion.

16.02 STORAGE

The Contractor shall provide appropriate storage of all

elements of the works and shall not store materials or

components at the site unless prior agreement is received

from the Employer’s Representative.

END OF SECTION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.2 AAC UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

General and Supplementary Condition “General

Requirements” Specifications Sections, apply to this

Section.

B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual

are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is

directly applicable to them.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS



71

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be

applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific

edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective

date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project.

C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply

with all applicable requirements and standards.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single Source Responsibility for Autoclaved Aerated

Concrete Masonry Units (AAC): Provide exposed masonry

units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within

the ranges accepted for these characteristics, produced by

one only manufacturer.

B. Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain

dry and in pre-mixed joint mortar, suitable for AAC fixing,

from one manufacturer authorized by the blocks instructions.

C. Field Constructed Mock Ups: Prior to installation of unit

masonry, erect sample wall panels to further verify

selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of

materials and execution. Build mock ups to comply with the

following requirements, using materials indicated for final

unit of Work:

1. Locate mock ups on Site in locations indicated or, if not

indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Build mock ups for the following types of masonry in

sizes of approximately 1.50m long by 1.50m high by full

thickness, including face and backup withes as well as

accessories.

a. Each type of exposed unit masonry construction.

b. Typical exterior face brick wall.

c. Typical interior unit masonry wall.



72

3. Retain and maintain mock ups during construction in

undisturbed condition as standard for judging

completed unit masonry construction.

a. When directed, demolish and remove mock ups from the

Project Site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Material certificates for the following signed by

manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each

material complies with requirements.

a. Each different masonry product required for mortar and

unit block of AAC including name of manufacturer, brand,

type, and weight slips at time of delivery.

b. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars, if

necessary.

2. Samples for verification purposes of the following:

a. Full size units for each different exposed masonry unit

required showing full range of dimensions to be

expected in completed construction.

b. Suitable masonry mortar samples for each AAC unit

blocks. Label samples to indicate type and amount of

colorant used.

c. Accessories embedded in the masonry, with special

attention to molding fixings.

B. Record Documents:

1. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication,

bending, and placement of AAC unit masonry

reinforcing bars.

2. Hot weather construction procedures evidencing

compliance with requirements specified in referenced

unit masonry standard.



73

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials to Project in undamaged

condition.

B.Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover,

and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or

damage due to moisture, temperature changes,

contaminants, corrosion, and other causes.

C. Store dry pre-mixed materials off the ground, under cover,

and in dry location.

D. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent

corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced

standards and local requirements, and conform to codes

and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with referenced AAC unit masonry standard and

other requirements specified in this Section applicable to

each material indicated.

2.02 BRICK UNITS

A. Comply with the following requirements applicable to each

form of brick required:

1. Provide AAC with the dimensions and the following

technical specifications:

Designation Description

Product description solid – mineral – monolithic, calcium

silicate insulation-Hydrate, lime, sand,

cement, water, air entraining agents

(porosity > 95%-by- volume)

Dimensions 440 x 215 mm, d = 100 / 140 / 215 mm

610 x 215 mm, d = 100 / 140 mm



74

Designation Description

Dimensional accuracy ± 2 mm

Density approx. 425 kg/m3

Calculation value for

thermal conductivity

λ = 0.10 W/mK

Heat expansion

coefficient

10-5

/K

Permeability Open to vapour diffusion, water vapour

diffusion resistance coefficient μ = 3

Fire classification Non-combustible – fire classification A1 –

DIN EN 13501-1

Compressive

resistance

Average ≥ 2.9 kPa

Water absorption During short-term immersion according to

DIN EN 1609 WP = 2.0 kg/m2

During long-term immersion according to

DIN EN 12087 WLP = 3.0 kg/m2

Absorption moisture ≤ 6%-by-volume (at 23 °C and 80 %

relative humidity)

Other properties Biological and microbiologically

unobjectionable, inhibiting effect against

mould and micro-organisms,

"environmentally compatible construction

product “according to Construction and

Environmental Institute (Institut Bauen und

Umwelt e. V.) (IBU e.V.) EPD-XEL-

2009212-D, fully recyclable and Naturplus

Quality Number 0404-0812-0881

2.03

A. Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to

each form of concrete masonry unit required.



75

1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows:

a. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,

headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Size: Provide AAC masonry units complying with

requirements indicated below for size that are

manufactured to specified face dimensions within

tolerances specified in the for AAC masonry units.

3. Weight Classification: Lightweight

density

approx.

size Block weight

425 Kg/m3

440 × 215mm, thickness

100mm

4.1 Kg

425 Kg/m3

440 × 215 mm, thickness

140mm

5.8 Kg

425 Kg/m3


215mm

8.9 Kg

425 Kg/m3 610 × 215 mm, thickness

100mm

5.7 Kg

425 Kg/m3


140mm

8.0 Kg

450-480 Kg/m3


50mm

2.3 Kg

450-480 Kg/m3


75mm

3.5 Kg

450-480 Kg/m3


100mm

4.6 Kg

450-480 Kg/m3


140mm

6.5 Kg

450-480 Kg/m3


215mm

10.0 Kg



76

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Composition

B. Joint mortar dry pre-mixed must be specially designed for

use with aerated concrete blocks.

1. Dry bulk density: 1.425 +/- 75 kg/m3

2. Compressive strength: ≥ 10.0 N/mm2

3. Initial shear strength ≥ 0.3 N/mm2

4. Chloride content < 0.1 % m/m

5. Reaction to fire: Class A1

6. Water absorption < 0.35 kg/m2.min 0.5

7. Water vapour permeability 5 / 20

8. Thermal conductivity λ = 0.52 W/mK

9. Bond strength ≥ 0.30 N/mm2

10. Workable life: ≥ 4 hours

11. Correction time: ≥ 15 minutes

2.05 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of

referenced unit masonry standard and this article.

2.06 JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of

referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed

from galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required

by referenced unit masonry standard for application

indicated.

B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed

continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight



77

lengths of not less than 3m, with prefabricated corner and

tee units.

2.07 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL

A. Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles

that comply with requirements for metal and size of

referenced unit masonry standard and of this article.

B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Cast iron or

malleable iron inserts with suitable type and size.

B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots, with filler strips, of slot

size indicated, fabricated in sheet metal.

C. Anchor Bolts: Steel; hot dip galvanized; of diameter and

length indicated and in the following configurations:

1. Headed bolts.

2. Non-headed bolts, straight.

3. Non-headed bolts, bent in manner indicated.

2.09 POSTINSTALLED ANCHORS

A. Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain,

without failure, load imposed within factors of safety

indicated, conducted by a qualified independent testing

laboratory.

1. Type: Chemical anchors.

2. Type: Expansion anchors.

3. Type: Undercut anchors.

4. Corrosion Protection: Carbon steel components zinc

plated.



78

5. Corrosion Protection: Stainless steel components, alloy

304 or 316 for bolts and nuts; alloy 304 or 316 for

anchor.

6. For cast-in-place and post-installed anchors in concrete:

Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4

times loads imposed by masonry.

7. For post-installed anchors in grouted AAC masonry

units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal

to 6 times loads imposed by masonry.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Expansion and Control Joint Fillers:

1. Pre-molded Expansion Joint Filler: Closed cell

polyethylene foam material with a density of ±2psf, and

compatible with most sealants.

2. Construction Joint Filler: Closed cell expanded

neoprene foam material with a density of 15 to 35psf,

flame resistant, and compatible with most sealants

3. Pre-molded Control Joint Strip: Solid rubber strips with

a Shore A Durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to

fit standard sash blocks and maintain lateral stability of

masonry wall.

B. Weep Holes: Provide one of the following at Contractor's

option:

1. Aluminum Weep Hole/Vent: One piece L shaped units

made to fit in a vertical mortar joint from sheet

aluminum and consisting of a vertical channel with

louvers stamped in web and a flat horizontal; pre-

painted prior to installation, in color to match that of

masonry or mortar as selected by Architect.

2. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One piece flexible extrusion

manufactured from ultraviolet resistant polypropylene

co polymer, designed to weep moisture in masonry



79

cavity to exterior, sized to fill head joints with outside

face held back 1/8 inch from exterior face of masonry.

C. Cavity Drainage Material: To prevent mortar from blocking

cavity weep holes, provide one of the following:

1. 25-mm thick, reticulated, nonabsorbent mesh, made

from polyethylene strands and shaped to maintain

drainage at weep holes without being clogged by

mortar droppings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other

specific conditions, and other conditions affecting

performance of AAC unit masonry.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by

Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance

of unit masonry.

B. Examine rough in and built in construction to verify actual

locations of piping connections prior to installation.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable local

requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes


B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

published recommendations.

C. Comply with referenced AAC unit masonry standard and

other requirements indicated applicable to each type of

installation included in Project.

D. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other

masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build



80

single withe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry

units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.

E. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to

accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of

the Specifications.

F. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before

completion of masonry. Use adequate tools for this AAC

masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry

to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

G. Cut AAC masonry units with saws to provide clean, sharp,

unchipped edges, as instructed by the AAC blocks

manufacturer. Cut units as required to provide continuous

pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full size units

without cutting where possible.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Comply with construction tolerances of referenced AAC unit

masonry standard.

3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface

bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate

locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and

offsets. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners,

jambs, and where possible at other locations.

B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction

tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated

with other construction.

3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay AAC units with full appropriate mortar coverage on bed

and head joints. Furrowing of joints will not be permitted.

B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be

covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated.

C. The mortar has to be mixed for 4 minutes with the quantity

of water state don the bag. This is to ensure that water can

mix with all the cement particles. After mixing for 4 minutes



81

a creamy mass should have been created with no dry

mortar in the mix.

D. It remains workable within the bucket for approx. 4 hours.

E. It will reach its initial bond strength within 7 to 10 minutes

and full design bond strength within 28days.

3.06 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE

MASONRY

A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to

bond withes together.

B. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in

horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between withes.

C. Use either of the structural bonding systems specified

above.

D. Use structural bonding system indicated on Drawings.

E. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each

course at corners, unless otherwise shown.

F. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion

or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of

bonding specified for structural bonding between withes and

space as follows:

1. Provide individual metal ties.

2. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement

using prefabricated "T" units.

3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL

MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry

abuts or faces structural members to comply with the

following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 cm in width

between masonry and structural member, unless

otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or

other rigid materials.



82

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible

anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to

structure.

3.08 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS

A. Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where

indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses.

Do not form a continuous span through movement joints

unless provisions are made to prevent in plane restraint of

wall or partition movement.

B. Joint Spacing: If location of control joints and expansion

joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to

exceed 10 m on center and horizontal joints not to exceed

story height.

1. Locate control joints in face brick at all points of

discontinuity of back up construction, vertical and

horizontal.

3.09 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where it is necessary.

B. Provide masonry lintels where necessary. Provide precast

or formed in place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels

before handling and installation. Temporarily support

formed in place lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 20 cm at each jamb, unless

otherwise indicated.

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace AAC masonry units that are loose,

chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units

do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match

adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to

eliminate evidence of replacement.



83

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,

clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden

paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from

contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid

strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or

waterproof masking tape.

3. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of

cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing

thoroughly with clear water.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a

manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is

without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion.

END OF SECTION - AAC Unit Masonry

3.1.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

“General Requirements” Specifications Sections, apply to this

Section.

Specifications throughout all Divisions of the technical

Specifications are directly applicable to this Section, and this

section is directly applicable to them.




edition date.





84




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully

producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this

Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce

required units without causing delay in the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal

fabrications specified in this section by same firm that

fabricated them.

C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in

accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code

Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel", and

D1.2 "Structural Welding Code Aluminum."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS

qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if

pertinent, has undergone recertification.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Product data and installation instructions for each

prefabricated item of miscellaneous metal fabrications

and accessories.

2. Samples representative of materials and finished

products as may be requested by Owner.

B. Record Documents:

1. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of

each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans,

elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications

and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory

items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts

specified for installation under other sections.

Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to

comply with certain design loadings, include structural



85

computations, material properties, and other information

needed for structural analysis that has been signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer who was

responsible for their preparation.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other

construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate

field measurements before fabrication; show recorded

measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication

schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication

of products without field measurements. Coordinate

construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions

correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and

fitting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced

standards and local requirements, and conform to codes and

ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 FERROUS METALS

A. For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of

the Work, provide materials selected for their surface

flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes.

Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness,

and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those

permitted by reference standards for stretcher leveled sheet.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A786.

D. Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A569 or ASTM A36.

E. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A510.



86

F. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as

follows:

1. Cold Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, grade as

indicated below:

2. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required for

design loading.

For exterior installations and where indicated, provide

tubing with hot dip galvanized coating per ASTM A53.

G. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type

(method of manufacture) as follows:

1. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A366.

H. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Commercial Quality; ASTM A526,

G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated.

I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; finish and type as follows:

1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where

indicated.

J. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.

K. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, grade 32510.

L. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the

same type material and finish as supported rails, unless


M. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized

ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A47, or cast

steel, ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as

required, hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153.

N. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance

with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.

2.03 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Stock: ASTM A276, Type 316.

B. Plate: ASTM A167, Type 316.



87

2.04 ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B221, alloys 6063-T6:

B. Aluminum Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632, alloys

6061-T6:

C. Aluminum Sheet for Expanded Aluminum Grating: ASTM

B209, alloy 5052 H32.

2.05 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory packaged,

non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended

by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type

specified in this section.

1. "B-6 Construction Grout"; W. R. Bonsal Co.

2. "Diamond Crete Grout"; Concrete Service Materials Co.

3. "Euco N S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.

4. "Masterflow 928 and 713"; Master Builders.

5. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc.

6. "Sonogrout 14"; Sonneborn Building Products.

7. "Stoncrete NM1"; Stonhard, Inc.

8. "Five Star Grout"; U. S. Grout Corp.

9. "Vibropruf #11"; Lambert Corp.

B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory prepackaged, non-

shrink, non-staining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement

formulation for mixing with water at Project Site to create

pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Use

for interior applications only.

1. "Bonsal Anchor Cement"; W. R. Bonsal Co.



88

2. "Por Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division.

C. Non-shrink Metallic Grout: Premixed, factory packaged,

ferrous aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107 2,

specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty

loading applications of type specified in this section.

1. "Metox RM"; Chem Masters Corp.

2. "Hi Mod Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.

3. "Embeco 885 and 636"; Master Builders.

4. "Ferrolith G Redi Mix and G NC"; Sonneborn Building

Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.

2.06 FASTENERS

A. Provide zinc coated fasteners for exterior use or where built

into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and

class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307,

Grade A.

C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF B561.

D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF S92.

E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF S111.

F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF W92.

G. Drilled In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors

complying with FS FF S325, Group VIII (anchors,

expansion, [non-drilling]), Type I (internally threaded tubular

expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS

FF B575, Grade 5.

H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble wing type, FS FF B588, type, class,

and style as required.

I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF W84.



89

2.07 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or

fabricator's standard, fast curing, lead free, universal

modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to

normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish

paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a

sound foundation for field applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure complying with performance

requirements of FS TT P645.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for

re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film

containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and

complying with DOD P 21035 or SSPC Paint 20.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying

with SSPC Paint 12 except containing no asbestos fibers.

2.08 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness,

and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to

comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to

dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using

proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of

materials indicated or specified for various components of

each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate

angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from 100 degrees F

(55.5 degrees C) maximum change (range) in ambient

temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of

installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up

of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base

design calculations on actual surface temperatures of

metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat

loss.

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove

burrs.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch,

unless otherwise indicated. Form bent metal corners to



90

smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.

G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS

recommendations and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion

and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base

metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and

surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness

shows after finishing and contour of welded surface

matches those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and

smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use

exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated,

Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate

joints where least conspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with

supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring

devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

J. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use

connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated

installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as

indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar

items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner

to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may

accumulate.

2.09 ROUGH HARDWARE



91

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates,

anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel

and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting

woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to

concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock

rough hardware items are specified in Division 06 sections.

B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.

Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which

bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish

steel washers.

2.10 STEEL LADDERS

A. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions,

spacing, and anchorages as indicated. Unless otherwise

indicated, fabricate ladders with component parts specified

herein. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3.

B.Side rails: Continuous steel flat bars, 1/2 inch x 2 1/2 inches,

with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart.

C. Bar Rungs: Round steel bars, 3/4 inch diameter, spaced 12

inches on center.

D. Bar Rungs: Square steel bars, 3/4 inch, spaced 12 inches

on center.

E. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind

smooth on outer rail faces.

F. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate

points spaced not more than 5' 0" on center by means of

welded or bolted steel brackets.

1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads

indicated and to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of

the wall surface by not less than 7 inches.

2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return

rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds

are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend

above the top rung, goose neck the extended rails back

to the structure to provide secure ladder access.

G. Provide non slip surface on top of each rung, either by

coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy

resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung

which is filled with aluminum oxide grout.



92

2.11 SHIP'S LADDERS

A. Provide ship's ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open

type construction with structural steel channel or steel plate

stringers, pipe handrails, and open steel grating treads,

unless otherwise indicated. Provide all necessary brackets

and fittings for installation.

B. Galvanize all ladders, including, brackets and fasteners.

2.12 ABRASIVE NOSINGS

A. Provide abrasive nosings on stair treads where indicated

fabricated with an aluminum base and an aluminum oxide

or silicon carbide abrasive filler.

1. Provide configuration of nosings as indicated and

appropriate to the stair construction.

2. Size nosings to extend full width of concrete-filled steel

pan treads and approximately 3 inches short of each

end of concrete stair treads.

3. Provide color of filler as selected by Owner from

manufacturer's standards; 8 choices minimum.

B. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

"Supergrit Safety Nosings" by Wooster Products Inc., or

equal product of one of the following:

1. Amstep Products

2. American Safety Tread Co.

3. Armstrong Products Inc.

4. Safe-T-Metal Co. Inc.

2.13 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items

bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free

from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing

area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as

required. Galvanize after fabrication.



93

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications

indicated or which are not parts of structural steel

framework, as required to complete work.

B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and

required to receive adjacent other construction retained by

framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel

shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using

mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to

receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting

into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if

units must be installed after concrete is placed.

Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24

inches on center and provide minimum anchor units in

the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide x 1/4 inch x 8

inches long.

2.15 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Produce metal bar gratings of description indicated per

NAAMM marking system that complies with the following:

1. Metal Bar Grating Standard "Standard Specifications

for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating Treads"

published in ANSI/NAAMM A202.1 "Metal Bar Grating

Manual."

2. Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Standard: "Guide

Specifications for Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating"

published in NAAMM "Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating

Manual."

B. To establish standards of manufacturer, specification is

based upon products of Reliance Steel Products, Inc.

Subject to compliance with requirements, other

manufacturers offering metal bar gratings that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.

2. Barnett/Bates Corp.



94

3. Blaw Knox Grating Div., Blaw Knox Corp.

4. IKG Industries

5. Klemp Corp.

6. Ohio Gratings, Inc.

7. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc.

8. Trueweld, Inc.

C. Galvanized Steel Bar Grating: Provide Reliance Steel

Products Company hot dipped galvanized steel "Type

3/4R4 Electro Pressure Welded" grating with 1-1/2 inch x ¼

inch bearing bars spaced at 1 inch centers and ½ inch x

3/16 inch rectangular cross bars spaced at 4 inch centers.

Slot bearing bars for rectangular cross bars prior to electro

pressure welding. Provide banding bars of same size as

bearing bars.

D. Prime Painted Steel Bar Grating: Provide Reliance Steel

Products Company "Type 1R4 Electro Pressure Welded"

grating with 1-1/2 inch x ¼ inch bearing bars spaced 1-1/4

inch centers and ½ inch x 3/16 inch rectangular cross bars

spaced at 4 inch centers. Provide one shop coat Tnemec

10 99G (green) modified alkyd rust inhibitive primer as

specified after fabrication.

2.16 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS

A. Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with

requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details,

finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe,

post-spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that

required to support structural loads.

B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt welding

or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option,

unless otherwise indicated.

1. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of

intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end

is joined and weld all around.

C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:



95

1. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings.

2. By radius bends of radius indicated.

3. By mitering at elbow bends.

4. By bending.

5. By any method indicated above, applicable to change

of direction involved.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs

to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive

configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of

pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,

cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.

E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails,


F. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick steel

plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings, except

where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is

1/4 inch or less.

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall

brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and

anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of

railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and

other anchorage devices for connecting railings and

handrails to concrete or masonry work.

H. For exterior steel railings and handrails formed from steel

pipe with galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets,

fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

I. For interior steel railings and handrails formed from steel

pipe with galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets,

fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

J. For interior steel railings formed from steel pipe with black

finish, provide non-galvanized ferrous metal fittings,

brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors

embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.



96

2.17 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing,

apply zinc coating by the hot dip process compliance with

the following requirements:

1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

2. ASTM A123 for galvanizing both fabricated and

unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated

rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and

strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous

metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements

indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications

and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal

fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC SP6 "Commercial

Blast Cleaning."

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC SP3 "Power Tool

Cleaning:

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal

fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be

embedded in concrete, sprayed on fireproofing, or masonry,

unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of

SSPC PA1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop

painting.

1. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds,

and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings,

diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts,

sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having

integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or



97

masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to

the Project Site.

B. Center nosings on tread widths with noses flush with riser

faces and tread surfaces.

C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface

elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.

D. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails

as follows:

Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not

support handrails temporarily by any means not

satisfying structural performance requirements.

Mount handrails only on gypsum board assemblies

reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of

concealed anchor plates has been clearly marked for

benefit of Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state

and local requirements, referenced standards and conform

to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Fastening to In Place Construction: Provide anchorage

devices and fasteners where necessary for securing

miscellaneous metal fabrications to in place construction;

include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry

inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws,

and other connectors as required.

D. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling,

and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal

fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level,

plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from

established lines and levels.



98

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items

that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar

construction.

F. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline

joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed

joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size

limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of

exterior units which have been hot dip galvanized after

fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field

connections.

G. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of

manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality

of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work,

and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and

develop strength and corrosion resistance of base

metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and

surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness

shows after finishing and contour of welded surface

matches those adjacent.

H. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum

that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry,

wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous

paint or zinc chromate primer.

3.03 FABRICATION

A. Provide miscellaneous metal work fabricated by processes

and techniques which will result in the appropriate

workmanship class as scheduled.

1. Class 1 Workmanship: Sandblast exposed surfaces

smooth with pits, mill marks, nicks, and scratches filled

and ground smooth so that no defects are visible from

a distance of 6' after painting.



99

Conceal welds where possible. Where exposed, grind

welds to small radius with uniform size cove. Welds

shall be undetectable after painting.

Use only flat head countersunk bolts in exposed

locations.

Fit all joints to hairline finish.

Distortions visible to the eye will be cause for rejection.

2. Items required to have Class 1 Workmanship include:

Stair railings, handrails and guardrails in public and

"high finish level" areas, interior and exterior.

Steel framed stairs in public and "high finish level"

areas, interior and exterior.

3. Class 2 Workmanship: Grind exposed surfaces to

remove surface irregularities. Moderate imperfections

not visible at 20 feet may remain. Mill marks may

remain.

Grind welds to small radius with uniform sized core and

smooth transition between joined pieces.

Use only flat or oval head, countersunk bolts where

exposed to view.

Straightness: Minor distortions will be permitted.

Joints: Provide maximum gap of 1/16 inches.

4. Items required to have Class 2 Workmanship include:

Stair railings, handrails, and guardrails in "back of

house" areas, interior and exterior.

Steel ladders.

Steel framed stairs in "back of house" areas, interior

and exterior.



100

Steel bollards.

Exposed door supports, guides, and bracing.

Lavatory countertop supports.

Garage overhead clearance bars.

5. Class 3 Workmanship: No improvement from mill finish

required except preparation for priming and galvanizing.

6. Items required to have Class 3 Workmanship include

all concealed items and those items exposed to view

only in "service" areas such as mechanical equipment

rooms, and other areas accessible only to building

maintenance staff.

3.04 SETTING LOOSE PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond

reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to

surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other

adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been

positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with

the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use metallic non-shrink grout in concealed locations

where not exposed to moisture; use nonmetallic non-

shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates

to ensure that no voids remain.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND

HANDRAILS

A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching

alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing

indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings.

Plumb posts in each direction.



101

B. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings.

Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from

inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate

brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing

required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets

and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:

1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed

anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.

2. Use type of bracket with pre drilled hole for exposed

bolt anchorage.

3. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled

in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or

exposed lag bolt, as applicable.

4. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having

square heads.

5. For wood stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood

backing between studs. Coordinate with stud

installations for accurate location of backing members.

6. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten

brackets directly to steel framing or concealed anchors

using self-tapping screws of size and type required to

support structural loads.

3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint

exposed areas with same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC PA 1 requirements for touch

up of field painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film

thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections

and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to

comply with ASTM A780.



102

END OF SECTION - METAL FABRICATIONS

3.1.4 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.





A. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply



A. Provide doors, panels, and frames complying with the

project drawings.

B. Provide custom steel doors and frames manufactured by a

single firm specializing in the production of this type of work,

unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect and Owner.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with

BS 476 that are listed and labeled by a testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units

exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide

manufacturer’s certification that doors conform to all

standard construction requirements of tested and

labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.



103

2. Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures,

provide doors that have a temperature rise rating of

232 degrees C maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Product data for each type of door and frame specified,

including details of construction, materials, dimensions,

hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound

ratings, profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit drawings for fabrication and installation of

custom steel doors and frames. Include details of each

frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions

at openings, details of construction, location and

installation requirements of finish hardware and

reinforcements, and details of joints and connections.

a. Coordinate submittals with other doors, frames, and

hardware and use the same “opening number

identification” as given on the Contract Drawings and the

Door Schedule.

Submittals not using the numbering identification shown

on Contract

Drawings and Schedules will be rejected.

2. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies

required being fire- rated and that exceed limitations of

labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer’s certification

that each door and frame assembly has been

constructed to conform to design, materials and

construction equivalent to requirements for labeled

construction.

C. Record Documents:

1. Provide record approved submittals and warranties.



104


A. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor

damages may be repaired provided refinished items are

equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the

Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items as

directed.

B. Store doors and frames at the building Site under cover.

Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid

the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could

create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors

become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide gap

spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




2.02 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: free of scale, pitting or surface

defects; pickled and oiled.

B. Metallic-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheets: with zinc or

zinc-iron-alloy coating.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: austenitic stainless steel, Type 316.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 16-gage

sheet metal. Galvanize after fabrication units to be built into

exterior walls.

E.Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units,

except hot-dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls.

F. Shop-Applied Paint: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, air-

drying or baking, suitable as base for specified finish paints

on steel surfaces.

G. Intumescent Seals, intumescent fire and smoke seals.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL



105

A. Fabricate metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and

free from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to

required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and

assemble units in the manufacturer’s plant. Clearly identify

work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before

shipment, to assure proper assembly at the Project Site.

Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and

make smooth, flush, and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal

manufacturing defects is not acceptable.

1. Interior Doors: Minimum 18-gage face sheets.

2. Exterior Doors: Minimum 16-gage face sheets.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval

heads for exposed screws and bolts.

C. Prepare doors and frames to receive finish hardware,

including cutouts, reinforcing, mortising, drilling, and tapping

in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and

templates provided by hardware supplier.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied

hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish

hardware may be done at Project Site.

D. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel doors and

frames, including galvanized surfaces, but excluding

stainless steel surfaces.

1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt,

and other foreign materials before application of paint.

2. Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using

cold phosphate solution (SSPC-PT2), hot phosphate

solution (SSPC-PT4), or basic zinc chromate-vinyl

butyryl solution (SSPC-PT3).

3. Apply shop coat of prime paint within time limits

recommended by pretreatment manufacturer. Apply a

smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform

dry film thickness of not less than 21 microns.

E. Provide stops and moldings around solid, glazed, and

louvered panels where indicated.



106

1. Form fixed stops and moldings integral with frame,


2. Provide removable stops and moldings where indicated

or required, formed of not less than 20-gage steel

sheets matching steel of frames. Secure with

countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced

uniformly not more than 30cm on center. Form corners

with butted hairline joints.

3. Coordinate width of rabbet between fixed and

removable stops with type of glass or panel and type of

installation indicated.

2.04 DOORS

A. Provide flush design doors, seamless construction.

1. Unless otherwise required for acoustical or thermal

doors, provide filler of fiberboard, mineral-wool board,

or other insulating material solidly packed full door

height to fill voids between inner core reinforcing

members.

2. Reinforce doors with rigid tubular frame where stiles

and rails are less than 20cm wide. Form tubular frame

with 16-gage steel, welded to outer sheets.

3. Provide internal core constructed of galvanized,

stretcher-leveled steel sheets not less than 18-gage,

vertically reinforced with galvanized sheet steel

sections not less than 22-gage, spaced 6 inches on

center, extending full height of door and spot welded to

both face sheets at not more than 12cm on center.

a. Continuous truss-form reinforcement of 28-gage

galvanized steel may be provided in lieu of spaced steel

sections. Spot weld truss-form reinforcement 7cm on

center vertically and horizontally over entire core surface

on both sides.

4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with galvanized,

18-gage, horizontal steel channels, welded

continuously to core faces. For exterior stainless steel



107

doors, close top and bottom edges to provide weather

seal.

B. Painted Exterior Doors: Fabricate exterior doors of two

outer, galvanized, stretcher-leveled steel sheets not less

than 16-gage. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces

without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile

edges, except around glazed or louvered panel inserts.

Provide weep-hole openings in the bottom of doors to

permit escape of entrapped moisture.

1. Reinforce inside of doors with vertical galvanized sheet

steel sections not less than 22-gage. Space vertical

reinforcing 15 cm on center and extend full door height.

Spot weld at not more than 12 cm on center to both

face sheets.

a. Continuous truss-form inner core of 28-gage galvanized

sheet steel reinforcing may be provided as inner

reinforcement, in lieu of above. Spot weld truss-form

reinforcement 7 cm on center vertically and horizontally

over entire surface of both sides.

2. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with 16-gage

horizontal galvanized sheet channels welded

continuously to outer sheets. Close top and bottom

edges to provide flush, waterproof weather seal, as

integral part of door construction or by addition of

inverted steel channels.

C. Painted Interior Doors: Fabricate interior doors of two (2)

outer, cold-rolled, stretcher-leveled steel sheets not less

than 18-gage. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces,

without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile

edges, except around glazed or louvered panel inserts.

1. Reinforce inside of doors with vertical, hot-rolled, not

less than 22-gage steel sections. Space vertical

reinforcing 15cm on center and extend full door height.

Spot weld at not more than 12cm on center to both

face sheets.

a. Continuous truss-form inner core of 28-gage sheet metal

reinforcing may be provided as inner reinforcement in

lieu of above. Spot weld truss-form reinforcement 7cm



108

on center vertically and horizontally over entire surface

of both sides.

2. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with 18-gage,

horizontal steel channels, welded continuously to outer

sheets.

D. Stainless Steel Doors: Fabricate from two (2) outer

stainless steel sheets not less than 18-gage, permanently

bonded with contact adhesive to rigid internal steel core.

Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible

joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges, except

around glazed or louvered panel inserts. Provide #4 polish

on exposed surfaces with vertical grain direction unless

shown otherwise.

1. Provide Type 316 stainless steel face sheets and

internal components.

E. Fire Rated Doors: Ratings as indicated on Door Schedule,

when tested in accordance with BS 476, labeled by LECM,

or other agency acceptable to the authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.05 FRAMES

A. Fabricate frames of full-welded unit construction, with

corners mitered, reinforced, continuously welded full depth

and width of frame. Knock-down type frames are not

acceptable.

1. Form frames of stainless steel sheets with #4 polish for

openings indicated to receive stainless steel doors.

B. Provide closed or tubular mullions and transom bars where

indicated. Fasten mullions and transom bars at crossings

and to jambs by butt welding. Reinforce joints between

frame members with concealed clip angles or sleeves of

same metal and thickness as frame.

1. Provide false head member to receive lower ceiling

where frames extend to finish ceilings of different

heights.

C. Head Reinforcing: Where installed in masonry, leave

vertical mullions in frames open at top for grouting.



109

D. Jamb Anchors: Furnish jamb anchors as required to secure

frames to adjacent construction, formed of not less than 18-

gage galvanized steel.

1. Masonry Construction: Adjustable, flat, corrugated, or

perforated, t-shaped to suit frame size, with leg not less

than 5 cm wide by 25 cm long. Furnish at least two (2)

anchors per jamb up to 2.30m in height; Four (4)

anchors up to an 2.40m in jamb height; one (1)

additional anchor for each 0.60m or fraction thereof

over 2.40m in height.

E. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and

mullion that extends to floor, formed of not less than 14-

gage galvanized steel sheet, as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two

holes to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs

and mullions.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type with

extension clips, allowing not less than 5 cm height

adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor

surface.

F. Head Anchors: Provide two anchors at head of frames

exceeding 1.00 m wide for frames mounted in steel stud

walls.

G. Structural Reinforcing Members: Provide as part of frame

assembly, where indicated at mullions, transoms, or other

locations that are to be built into frame.

H. Head Reinforcing: For frames over 1.20 m wide in masonry

wall openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle

stiffener, not less than 12-gage for full width of opening,

welded to back of frame at head.

I. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across

bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

J. Rubber Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped doors,

drill stop in strike jamb to receive three (3) silencers on

single-door frames add drill head jamb stop to receive four

(4) silencers on double-door frames. Install plastic plugs to

keep holes clear during construction.



110

K. Plaster Guards: Provide 26-gage steel plaster guards or

dust cover boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish

hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might

obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of

openings.

2.06 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with

“Solvent Cleaning”; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other

contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill

scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.

B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer

specified below immediately after surface preparation and

pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to

provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.02

mm.

C. Galvanized Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with

non-petroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other

contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating

suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean

welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and

apply galvanizing repair paint (High-zinc dust content paint

for re-galvanizing welds in steel).

D. Galvanized Steel Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish:

Apply shop primer specified below immediately after

surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat

of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness

of not less than 0.02mm.

E. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-

curing, corrosion- inhibiting, lead and chromate-free,

universal primer; compatible with substrate and field-applied

finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound

foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged

exposure.

2.07 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AISI conform to the system

established by the American Iron and Steel Institute for

designating finishes for stainless steel sheet.



111

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Bright, Directional

Polish, AISI No. 4 finish on all stainless steel items.

1. On doors, align direction of polish marks to be vertical.

2. On frames, align direction of polish marks to be vertical

on both jambs and head.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


requirements, and referenced standards, and conform to

codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.


published manufacturer’s data, and as herein specified.

1. Setting Masonry Anchorage Devices: Provide masonry

anchorage devices where required for securing frames

to in-place concrete or masonry construction.

a. Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in

accordance with details on final Shop Drawings and

anchorage device manufacturer’s instructions. Leave

drilled holes rough, not reamed, and free from dust and

debris.

2. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated

fasteners instead of masonry anchorage devices and

machine screws, if so indicated on final Shop Drawings.

D.Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed,

aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are

set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary

braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and

undamaged.

1. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set

frames and secure in place with machine screws and

masonry anchorage devices.

2. Place frames at fire-rated openings in accordance with

BS 476.



112

3. Make field splices in frames as detailed on final Shop

Drawings, welded and finished to match factory work.

4. Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have

been properly set and secured.

E. Install doors after adjacent work is completed and dry. Do

not install doors until closers or stops and holders can be

installed simultaneously for protection of doors.

F. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in BS

476.

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware

items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete

and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including doors or frames that are warped,

bowed or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand

smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and

apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

1. Repair installed dented and damaged units to new

condition by filling with automotive body putty.

2. Fill exposed countersunk anchor screws in countersunk

screw holes with automotive body putty after units are

installed in place.

3. Grind puttied areas smooth, true and even with

surrounding surfaces. Repaint puttied areas with one

additional coat of the specified primer before

proceeding with field painting.

END OF SECTION - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES



113

3.1.5 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.







edition date.






A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:

1. WDMA Quality Standard: I.S.1A "Architectural Wood

Flush Doors", of Window and Door Manufacturers

Association (WDMA).

2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork

Quality Standards"; including Section 1300

"Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork

Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction,

finish and other requirements exceeding those of

WDMA quality standard.

3. WDMA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with

WDMA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark

certifying compliance with applicable requirements of

WDMA I.S. 1A Series.



114

4. For manufacturers not participating in WDMA Hallmark

Program, a certification of compliance may be

substituted for marking of individual doors.

B. Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of

door, including details of core and edge construction,

trim for openings and louvers, and factory-finishing

Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit Shop Drawings indicating location and size of

each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of

construction, location and extent of hardware blocking,

fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other

pertinent data.

2. Coordinate submittals with other doors, frames, and

hardware and use the same "opening number

identification" as given on the Drawings and the Door

Schedule.

3. Submittals not using the numbering identification

system shown on Drawings and Schedules will be

rejected.

4. For factory-pre-machined doors, indicate dimensions

and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts

adjacent to visual panels and louver openings.

C. Samples:

1. Submit samples, for the following:

a. Factory-Finished Doors: Each type of factory finish

required.

b. Metal Louvers: Blade and frame in 6" lengths, for each

material and finish required.



115

c. Metal Frames for visual panels: Metal light frames in 6"

lengths; for each material, type and finish required.

D. Record Documents:

1. Provide record approved shop drawings, samples, and

warranties.


A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to

prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with

requirements of referenced standards and

recommendations of WDMA pamphlet "How to Store,

Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well

as with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which

correlate with designation system used on Shop Drawings

for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary,

removable or concealed markings.


A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions

for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized

and will be maintained in storage and installation areas

during remainder of construction period to comply with the

following requirements applicable to Project's geographical

location:

1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section

100-S-3 "Moisture Content".

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of,

other rights the Owner may have under the Contract

Documents.

B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in

door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer,

Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace

defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that



116

show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or

do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality

standards.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors

where Contractor's Work contributed to rejection or to

voiding of manufacturer's warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


standards, federal, state and local requirements, and

conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.02 FLUSH SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS -

PARTICLEBOARD CORE

A. Core Construction: Mat formed wood particleboard core,

complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.

1. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire

unit abrasive planed before veneering.

B. Rails:

1. Top Rail: 5 inch one to three ply closed grain, solid

hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber.

2. Bottom Rail: Hardwood or Structural Composite

Lumber. Provide 5 inch deep rail where concealed door

seal or kick plate is scheduled.

3. Provide 5 inch fire retardant treated, UL approved

hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber top rails at

fire-rated doors.


hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber bottom rail

at fire-rated doors where concealed door seal or kick

plate is scheduled.



117

C. Blocking:

1. Provide lock block reinforcement where mortised

hardware is scheduled.

2. Provide 5 inch hardwood or Structural Composite

Lumber at intermediate- height where exit devices are

scheduled.


hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber blocking at

intermediate height at fire-rated doors.

2.03 FLUSH SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS - STAVED

CORE

A. Core: 5-ply bonded low-density wood blocks, random-

lengths, kiln-dried.

1. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire

unit abrasive planed before veneering.

2.06 FIRE RATED FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. Core: Incombustible mineral.

1. Provide fire retardant treated, UL approved 5 inch deep

solid hard wood or Structural Composite Lumber top

rail.

2. Provide fire retardant treated, UL approved lock block

reinforcement where mortised hardware is scheduled.

2.07 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS, GENERAL

A. AWI grade: Custom

B. Bond: type II water resistant.

C. Plastic Laminate Face Panels: High pressure decorative

laminates complying with NEMA LD3, Grade HGS, 0.048

inches (1.2mm) thick.



118

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect

from laminate manufacturer’s full range of colors.

E. Stiles: 1 1/6 inch to 1 1/2 inch wide, one or two ply closed

grain, solid hardwood; paint edge to match laminate faces.

Provide fire retardant treated, UL approved, one or two ply

hardwood stiles at fire-rated doors.

F. Rails:

1. Top Rail: 5 inch one to three ply closed grain, solid

hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber.

2. Bottom Rail: Hardwood or Structural Composite

Lumber. Provide 5 inch deep rail where concealed door

seal or kick plate is scheduled.


hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber top rails at

fire-rated doors.


hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber bottom rail

at fire-rated doors where concealed door seal or kick

plate is scheduled.

G. Blocking:

1. Provide lock block reinforcement where mortised

hardware is scheduled.

2. Provide 5 inch hardwood or Structural Composite

Lumber at intermediate- height where exit devices are

scheduled.


hardwood or Structural Composite Lumber blocking at

intermediate height at fire-rated doors

H. Low Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives

and composite wood products that do not contain urea

formaldehyde.



119

2.08 FLUSH SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS, PLASTIC

LAMINATE FACED

A. Construction: Five plies. Mat formed wood particleboard

core, complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.

1. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, with entire

unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are

applied.

2.09 FIRE RATED FLUSH WOOD DOORS, PLASTIC

LAMINATE FACED

A. Construction: Incombustible non-asbestos mineral core.

1. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core.

2. Treatment: Components shall be salt free.

2.10 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers: Size, type and profile shown and fabricated

from the following: Color Anodized Aluminum: Extruded

aluminum with AA-C22A32, Class II finish.

1. Color: Match Architect's samples.

B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors:

Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 18-gage cold-

rolled steel, factory-primed, and approved for use in door of

fire-rating indicated.

C. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors:

Manufacturer's standard fire-rated wood-veneer beads

matching veneer species of door faces.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying

with following requirements:

1. In sizes indicated for Project Site fitting.



120

2. Factory pre-fit and pre-machine doors to fit frame

opening sizes indicated with the following uniform

clearances and bevels:

a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for

pre-fitting. Comply with final hardware schedules

and door frame Shop Drawings and with hardware

templates.

b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in

metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment

before proceeding with factory pre-machining.

B. Metal Astragals: Pre-machine astragals and formed steel

edges for hardware where required for pairs of fire rated

doors.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply

with applicable requirements of referenced standards for

kind(s) of doors required.

1. Visual openings: Trim openings with moldings of

material and profile indicated.

2. Louvers: Factory-installed louvers in prepared

openings.

D. Exterior Doors: Treat exterior doors at factory with water

repellent after manufacturing has been completed.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard metal flashing at top

of outswinging units.

E. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are

identical in materials and construction to units tested in door

and frame assemblies per ASTM E152 and which are

labeled and listed for ratings indicated by testing and

inspection agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

1. Provide UL approved 5 inches deep top rail

reinforcement suitable to hold surface mounted closers

with 1-½ inches x No. 12 fully threaded wood screws

without the use of through-bolted fasteners.



121

2. At hinge stile, provide additional UL approved

hardwood or high-density material to provide a

minimum 5000 pound screw withdrawal resistance and

minimum 300,000 slam cycles without failure of mortise

hinges.

3. At lock stile, provide additional UL approved "Lock

Block" blocking to provide solid anchorage for

installation of locksets.

4. At mid-rail, provide 5 inches deep continuous blocking

at doors indicated to have exit devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements

for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and

have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION




B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply

with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI

standard and as indicated.

1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated

frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No.

80.

C. Job Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform

clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles

and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or



122

permitted with fire rated doors. Machine doors for hardware.

Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

1. Fitting Clearances for Non Rated Doors: Provide 1/8

inch at jambs and heads; 1/16 inch per leaf at meeting

stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8 inch from bottom of

door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where

threshold is shown or scheduled, provide ¼ inch

clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.

2. Fitting Clearances for Fire Rated Doors: Complying

with NFPA 80.

3. Bevel non rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and

hinge edges.

4. Bevel fire rated doors 1/8inch in 2 inches at lock edge;

trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling

agency.

D. Pre-fit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each

edge.

E. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if

fitting or machining is required at the Project Site.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION

A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors which do not swing or

operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during

installation.

C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to

ensure that wood doors will be without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION - FLUSH WOOD DOORS



123

3.1.6 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

PART 1 – GENERAL




Section.





The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable

to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date.

All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date

of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project.

All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with

all applicable requirements and standards.


Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has

completed exterior aluminum window systems similar in

material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project

and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of

successful in-service performance.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in

manufacturing aluminum window systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-

service performance.

Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames and windows

through one (1) source from a single manufacturer with the

capacity and resources to provide products of consistent

quality in appearance and physical properties.



124

1.04 PRODUCT OPTIONS

Drawings indicate dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and

profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to

sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction size.

Other manufacturers’ products complying with requirements

may be considered.

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by

Architect, except with Architect’s approval. If modifications are

proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect

for review.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

Product Data:

Product data for each type of frame specified, including details

of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation,

label compliance, profiles, and finishes.

Samples:

Furnish representative samples of aluminum finish proposed

for this work for acceptance before any material is shop

assembled, finished, or delivered.

Shop Drawings:

Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of

prefabricated aluminum window work. Include details of each

frame type, conditions at openings, details of construction,

location, and installation requirements of finish hardware and

reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show

anchorage and accessory items. Provide a schedule of frames

using same reference numbers for details and openings as

those on Drawings.

Coordinate submittals with other doors, frames and hardware

and use the same “opening number identification” as given on

the Drawings and the Door Schedule.

Submittals not using the numbering identification system

shown on Drawings and Schedules will be rejected.

1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS



125

Provide record approved product data, shop drawings,

samples, and warranties.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

Deliver aluminium frames wrapped in protective material or

crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.

Inspect aluminium frame work upon delivery for damage.

Minor damages may be repaired provided the repaired items

are equivalent in all respects to new work; otherwise remove

and replace damaged work as directed.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to

establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions

and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.

1.09 WARRANTY

Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty for

materials and workmanship.

Aluminium Window Warranty Period: 2 year.

Standard Insulating Glass Warranty Period: 5 years.

1.10 SECTION INCLUDES

Aluminium windows

Thermal break aluminum windows; fill and debridge

Thermal break aluminium windows; thermal strut.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.02 WINDOW TYPES

Fixed Frame

Miter-cut assembly, using pin, crimp or self-locating corner

cleats



126

Drainage of infiltration and condensation water must be

achieved via oblong slots on the bottom fixed part, with

deflector and membrane

Drip mould sections to shelter external leaves in high exposed

areas for outward opening

Opening Frame

Flush opening sash: Basic opening frame

Opening frame will be made of: Same depth as fixed frame

Miter-cut assembly, using pin, crimp or self-locating corner

cleats

Drip mould section can be fixed:

Outside on fixed frame to shelter from water

Inside on bottom fixed frame to collect condensation water in

colder areas

Weatherproofing

Double weather stripping with a multi-purpose EPDM gasket,

which molds to the shape of the frame corners with no need

for cuts and joints; thanks to its specific dual hardness

technology; on clip on section.

Infill: Takes infill from 3 to 33mm

Glazing beads: 2 design of glazing beads

Square: Assembled at 90º angle

Curved: Miter cut assembly

Mullions:

Mullions can be used as intermediate transom for sash and as

transom or mullion for fixed lights.

Mullions and transoms can be joined together with quarter-turn

junction blocks, or using screw sockets.

In order to accommodate higher wind loads, reinforced

mullions are available in different sizes, according to the

manufacturer instructions.

Locking Hardware and Pull Handles

Locks come with built-in, fool and tamper proof lever system.



127

Inward and outward opening frames have an integrated

casement stay and ventilation.

Bottom hung frames are fitted with a friction stay.

Tilt and turn fitting comes with a safety friction stay and anti-

unhinging angle bearing.

PERFORMANCES MAX

Water, Air and Wind Resistance Test

European Standards

2.03 MATERIALS

Aluminium profiles are extruded from aluminium alloy

6060 T66 or 6063 T6 to BS1474.

Screws and components are stainless steel or other

corrosion resistant material.

Glazing gaskets and other weather seals are EPDM.

Fixing brackets are rust proofed steel or aluminium as

the installation requires. Do not use welded aluminium for

structural fixings.

2.04 FINISHES

High Performance Organic Coating: AA C12C42R1x

(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical

Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate fluoride

phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below).

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's

instructions.

Fluoropolymer Two (2) Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's

standard two (2) coat thermo cured system, composed of

specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color

topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene

resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.



128

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been

properly prepared and deviations from manufacturer's

recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of

installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

B. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the

manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate

under the project conditions.

1. Verify that openings are dimensionally correct and

within allowable tolerances and substrates are plumb,

level, and clean.

2. Verify that anchoring surface is in accordance with

approved shop drawings.

C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer's

recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions and recommendations.

Adjust for proper operation after installation.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a certified testing laboratory to conduct on-site tests

for air infiltration and water infiltration in accordance with

published standards.

B. Repair or replace window units not meeting specified

performance requirements; re-test an equal quantity of

windows.



129

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning:

1. Clean sealants, caulking, and other materials from

surfaces, including adjacent work.

2. Clean window frames, casings, and glass using

materials and methods recommended by the window

and glass manufacturer that do not cause defacement

of work.

3. Clean using methods which comply with AAMA 609.

4. Clean glass using methods which comply with GANA

01-0300.

B. Protect installed products until completion of project.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before

Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION - ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

3.1.7 FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.




1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or

door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and

folding doors, except special types of unique hardware

specified in the same Sections as the doors and door

frames on which they are installed.



130

1. Provide cylinders for operation of lock mechanisms

furnished as part of the Work of other Sections such as

entrance doors, rolling doors and grilles, etc.

a. Provide cylinders keyed to building system and

with finish to match adjacent surfaces.




edition date.






A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has

completed door hardware installation similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and

whose Work has resulted in construction with a record of

successful in-service performance.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door

hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the

Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in- service

performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,

type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that

employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant

(AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor,

at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for

consultation.

C. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An

experienced door hardware supplier who has completed

projects with electrified door hardware similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose

Work has resulted in construction with a record of

successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable

to manufacturer of primary materials.



131

1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified

door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on

testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer’s

standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated

for this Project.

D. Fire Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire rated

openings that comply with NFPA Standard No. 80 and

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only

items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to

products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other

testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors

indicated in compliance with requirements of fire rated door

and door frame labels.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door

hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise

indicated.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Include installation details, material descriptions, and

dimensions of individual components, profiles, and

finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the

following:

a. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal,

and control systems. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

Include the following:

1) System schematic.

2) Point-to-point wiring diagram.

3) Riser diagram.

4) Elevation of each door.



132

2. Details of interface between electrified door hardware

and fire alarm, access control, security, and building

control system.

3. Door Hardware Schedule:

a. Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,

detailing fabrication and assembly of door

hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedules

with doors, frames, and related Work to ensure

proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of

door hardware.

b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and

vertical format in DHI’s “Sequence and Format for

the hardware schedule.

c. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware

Schedule into door hardware sets indicating

complete designations of every item required for

each door opening.

d. Use same identifying “set numbers” given in each

Section. Coordinate submittal with doors and

frames submittals and use same “opening number”

identification as given on Drawings and in the Door

Schedule.

e. Submittals not using numbering identification

system shown on Drawings and Schedules will be

rejected.

f. Content: include the following information:

1) Type, style, function, size, and finish of each

hardware item.

2) Name and manufacturer of each item.

3) Fastenings and other pertinent information.



133

4) Location of each hardware set, cross referenced

to indications on Drawings both on floor plans

and in door and frame schedule.

5) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and

codes contained in schedule.

6) Mounting locations for hardware.

7) Door and frame sizes and materials.

8) Keying information.

9) Description of each electrified door hardware

function, including location, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building

control systems.

g. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at

earliest possible date particularly where

acceptance of hardware schedule must precede

fabrication of other Work that is critical in the

Project construction schedule. Include with

schedule the product data, samples, Shop

Drawings of other Work affected by door hardware,

and other information essential to the coordinated

review of schedule.

4. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision

of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions

for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index

each key set to unique door designations.

5. Templates for doors, frames, and other specified items

to be factory prepared for the installation of door

hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other Work to

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating

and installing door hardware to comply with indicated

requirements.

C. Samples:

1. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in

finish indicated and tagged with full description for



134

coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to

submission of final hardware schedule.


1. Provide record approved product data, shop drawings,

samples, and warranties.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work of this Section with Work of other

sections that interface with hardware.

B. Furnish templates for doors, frames, and other Work

specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door

hardware to the appropriate trades. Check Shop Drawings

of other Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made

for locating and installing door hardware to comply with

indicated requirements.

1.07 HARDWARE ALLOWANCE

A. Selection and Ordering: Furnish door hardware as selected

by Architect and in such quantities as provided for under

Division 01 and other general provisions of the Contract.

B. Door hardware supplier's responsibilities shall be as follows:

1. Submittals: Submit through Contractor required product

data, final hardware schedule, separate keying

schedule, and samples as specified in this Section,


2. Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor promptly of

estimated times and dates that will be required to

process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver

hardware, and to perform other Work associated with

furnishing door hardware for purposes of including this

data in construction schedule. Comply with this

schedule.

3. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as

required to coordinate hardware with other Work in

respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish



135

Contractor with templates and deliver hardware to

proper locations.

4. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and

inventory door hardware specified in this Section.

5. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in

Contract Documents in effect at time of door hardware

selection, furnish types, finishes, and quantities of door

hardware, including fasteners, and Owner's

maintenance tools required to comply with specified

requirements and as needed to install and maintain

hardware. Furnish or replace any items of door

hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items

at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed

receipts from Contractor for all delivered materials.

C. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows:

1. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for door

hardware in same manner as submittals for other Work.

2. Construction Schedule: Cooperate with door hardware

supplier in establishing scheduled dates for submittals

and delivery of templates and door hardware.

Incorporate in construction schedule the times and

dates related to furnishing hardware by door hardware

supplier.

3. Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with other

Work. Furnish hardware supplier or manufacturer with

Shop Drawings of other Work where required or

requested. Verify completeness and suitability of

hardware with supplier.

4. Product Handling: Provide secure lock up for hardware

delivered to the Site. Inventory hardware jointly with

representative of hardware supplier and issue signed

receipts for all delivered materials.



136

1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification

related to final hardware schedule, and include basic

installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As

hardware supplier from various manufacturers receives

material, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked

with appropriate hardware set number to match set

numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two (2) or more

identical sets may be packed in same container.

1. Levers, handles and pulls shall be provided with cloth

or cotton covered paper coverings, of sufficient size to

completely cover the items, secured to remain in place.

2. Keys: Tag and mark to identify lock, which they will

pass.

C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of

hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is

satisfied that count is correct.

D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly

to place of installation (shop or Project Site).

E. Provide secure lock up for door hardware delivered to the

Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and

installation of hardware items that are not immediately

replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be

delayed by hardware losses both before and after

installation.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set

of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as

needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,

and removal and replacement of door hardware.



137

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


standards, federal, state and local requirements, and

conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of base metal,

fabricated by forming method indicated, using

manufacturer’s standard alloy, composition, temper, and

hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater

than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA

A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer’s

standard materials or forming methods if different from

specified standard.

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply

with published templates generally prepared for machine,

wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to

commercially recognized industry standards for application

intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished

heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise

indicated.

2.03 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS

A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed

entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide

only template produced units.

B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat head screws complying with

the following requirements:

1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into

drilled and tapped holes.

2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.

3. For fire rated wood doors install #12 x 1 1/4 inch,

threaded to the head steel wood screws.



138

4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or

pivots.

C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge

pins as follows:

1. Out Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins.

2. Out Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable

pins.

3. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.

4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match

leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated.

D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but

not less than three (3) hinges per door leaf for doors 90

inches or less in height and one (1) additional hinge for

each 30 inches of additional height.

1. Fire Rated Doors: Not less than three (3) hinges per

door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height with

same rule for additional hinges.

E. Continuous Hinges:

1. Hinge to be manufactured of 6063-T6- aluminum alloy

with anodized finishes (painted finishes available on

entire hinge or gear cap only).

2. Door and frame leaves to be machined, anodized and

assembled as a matched pair. Door and frame leaves

to be anodized after all machining and drilling

processes are complete.

3. All hinge profiles shall be manufactured to template

screw locations, with standard duty and heavy duty

hole patterns identical as to number and placement of

holes. All hinge profiles to be manufactured to template

bearing locations, with standard duty bearing

configurations of 5-1/8 inch spacing with a minimum of

sixteen (16) bearings; and heavy duty at 2-9/16 inch

spacing with a minimum of thirty-two (32) bearings.



139

4. Hinge leaves to be extruded at a uniform 1/8 inch

thickness from pivot point to outside edge of hinge leaf.

Uncut hinges shall be non-handed and shall be

paintless assembly of three (3) interlocking extrusions

applied to the full height of the door and frame without

mortising.

5. Vertical door loads shall be carried on chemically

lubricated thermoplastic thrust bearings. The door and

frame leaves shall be continuously geared together for

the entire hinge length and this relationship secured

with a full length cover channel so that the hinge will

operate through a full 180 degrees.

6. All rotating areas of the gear cap and geared leaves

shall have a permanent lubrication which is factory

applied along the full length of the hinge, and the

lubricant shall last the life of the hinge with no

additional maintenance required. Fasteners supplied

shall be 410 stainless steel, bright hardened and plated.

2.04 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Master key and grand master key to the existing "Best"

system. No substitution.

B. Furnish six (6) master keys and three (3) change keys per

key set. All keys and final cores are to be provided direct to

Owner by this supplier. Do not permit best change key

access by anyone other than Owner's personnel.

2.05 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike

for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to

protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless


1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3 pieces, antifriction

latch bolts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Provide extra-long strike lips for locks used on frames

with applied wood casing trim.



140

3. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into

head frames, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide dust proof strikes for foot bolts, except where

special threshold construction provides non recessed

strike for bolt.

5. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by

manufacturer of the latch and lock units.

6. Provide standard (open) strike plates for interior doors

of residential units where wood door frames are used.

B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8 inch minimum throw of latch on

pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of

bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.

1. Provide 1/2 inch minimum throw of latch for other bored

and preassembled types of locks and 3/4 inch

minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1

inch minimum throw for all dead bolts.

C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2 inch diameter rods of

brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12 inch long

rod for doors up to 7 feet 0 inches in height. Provide longer

rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7 feet 0 inches in

height.

D. Rabbeted Doors: Where rabbeted door stiles are indicated,

provide special rabbeted front on lock and latch units and

bolts.

2.06 PROGRAMMABLE / ELECTRIFIED LOCKING

DEVICES

A. Programmable Locking Device:

1. Lock shall be heavy-duty cylindrical type, with a 2-¾

inches backset supplied with a ½ inch throw latch bolt

as standard. Chassis shall accommodate standard 161

cylindrical lock prep for 1-¾ inch doors as standard,

with 1-3/8 inches to 2-¾ inch thick doors in 1/8 inch

increments available. Locksets shall be provided from

the factory with the appropriate handing.



141

2. Outside and inside levers shall operate independently

of each other. Lock shall use patented, clutch

mechanism to deter vandalism and maximize durability.

Disablement of secured levers shall not permit latch

bolt retraction from secure side while allowing

emergency egress.

3. The lock will be furnished with the Classroom and

Storeroom function which is: The outside lever is

normally locked. The inside lever is always free. The

unit may be momentarily unlocked with an approved

Normal access credential. The unit may be maintained

unlocked by using a Toggle access credential.

4. Emergency mechanical key override utilizes a 1-¼ inch

mortise cylinder with standard straight cam.

5. Outside escutcheon shall contain an integrated 6-

button keypad.

6. Visual red and green LED indicators shall indicate

activation, operational system status, system error

conditions and low power conditions.

7. Device as manufactured by Best Access Systems. No

substitution.

B. Electrified Locking Device: A security platform that

combines mechanical hardware with the ability to monitor

door openings with Owner’s existing access control panel

and software.

1. Complete monitoring of door from the lockset.

2. Panel interface board connects to third party access

control panel.

3. Available in proximity or magnetic stripe.

4. Simplified request to exit component contained in the

inside trim.

5. Industry standard HID Prox coordinates with Owner’s

existing credential.



142

6. UL tested for use on fire doors up to and including 3

hours. ANSI Grade 1.

2.07 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices shall be touchpad type, fabricated of bronze,

brass, stainless steel, or aluminum, and plated to the

standard architectural finishes to match the balance of door

hardware.

B. All exit devices shall incorporate a fluid damper, which

decelerates the touchpad on its return stroke and eliminates

noise associated with exit device operation. Touchpad shall

extend a minimum of one half of the door width. All latch

bolts to be dead latching type, with a self-lubrication coating

to reduce wear. Mechanism case and end-cap will be

0.140-gauge attachment to door. Touchpad shall match exit

device finish, and shall be stainless steel for US26, US26D,

US28, US32, and US32D finishes. Only compression

springs will be used in devices, latches, and outside trims or

controls.

C. Exit devices shall be UL listed panic exit hardware. All exit

devices for fire rated openings shall be UL labeled fire exit

hardware.

D. Lever trim for exit devices shall be vandal-resistant type,

which will travel to a 90-degree down position when more

than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily

be re-set.

E. All exit devices shall be of one manufacturer. No deviation

will be considered.

F. All trim shall be thru-bolted to the lock stile case. Lever

designs to match locksets.

G. Surface vertical rod devices shall be UL labeled for fire door

applications without the use of bottom rod assemblies.

Where bottom rods are required for security applications,

the devices shall be UL labeled for fire door applications

with rod and latch guards by the device manufacturer.

2.08 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES



143

A. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are

indicated for doors required to be accessible to the

physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying

with ADA and ANSI A-117.1 provisions for door opening

force.

1. At interior doors, adjust closers for door opening force

not to exceed 5 foot- pounds of force. If a door has a

closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be

adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees,

the time required to move the door to a position of 12

degrees from the latch is five (5) seconds minimum.

2. At exterior doors, adjust closers for door opening force

not to exceed 8.5 foot-pounds of force.

3. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide

closer unit one (1) size larger than recommended for

use with standard arms.

B. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion

action with a high strength cast iron cylinder. All closers

shall be of one (1) manufacturer. All closers shall utilize a

stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees

F to -30 degrees F without seasonal adjustment of closer

speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated

doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid

that complies with standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C.

C. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full

range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force

for the physically handicapped. Spring power adjustment

allows for quick and accurate power adjustment and visually

shows closer power size settings by way of dial adjustment

gauge located on closer spring tube. Hydraulic regulation

shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall

have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed

and back check. Door closers with pressure relief valves

are not acceptable.

D. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and

forearms for parallel arm closers) and where specified shall

have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe.

E. All surface closers shall be certified to exceed ten million full

load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory.



144

All closers (overhead, surface and concealed shall be of

one (1) manufacturer and carry manufacturer’s ten (10)

year warranty (electric closers to have two (2) year

warranty).

F. Overhead concealed closers shall have spring power

adjustable for 50 percent increase in closing power and fully

mortised door tracks.

G. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on

plans. Doors swinging into exit corridors shall provide for

corridor clear width as required by code. Where possible,

mount closers on inside of rooms.

H. Provide brackets, mounting plates, and fastener types for

closers as required for proper installation with door and

frame conditions. Closers shall be attached to wood doors

with sex bolts.

I. Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed 100 hours

salt spray testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory

used by BHMA for ANSI certification.

J. Combination Door Closers and Holder: Provide units

designed to hold door in open position under normal usage

and to release and close door automatically under fire

conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder

mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors,

provided with normally closed switching contacts.

K. Magnetic Door Holders to be heavy duty wall or floor

mounted with metal housing and complete mounting

hardware. Provide 24V holding coils unless otherwise

scheduled.

L. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finished metal flush floor plates

for floor closers except where thresholds are indicated and

cover plate is specified to be an integral part of threshold.

Finish floor plate to match hardware sets, unless otherwise

indicated.

M. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates where

no thresholds are indicated and floor closers are located in

an area of resilient flooring, stone flooring, or terrazzo.

Recess plates to receive an insert of the floor finish material

of the normal thickness as indicated. Provide extended

spindle on closer as may be necessary to accommodate

thickness of floor finish.



145

1. When floor finish includes metal divider or expansion

strips, match exposed ring of recessed floor plate on

closer with metal of floor strips.

2.09 PUSH / PULL UNITS

A. Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special

concealed fastener system for installation, through bolted

for matched pairs but not for single units.

2.10 DOOR TRIM UNITS

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed

fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine

screws or self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in

standard lengths or to match height of protection plates.

C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less

than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch

less than door width on pull side by height indicated.

1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18-gage).

2.11 HARDWARE FOR INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard hardware for interior

sliding doors when not furnished as part of complete door

package.

B. Operating Hardware for Bypassing Doors: Provide

manufacturer's complete set consisting of extruded

aluminum overhead track, adjustable hangers (carriages),

bumpers, and floor guides designed to accommodate the

number, size, thickness, and weight of door leaves

indicated. Provide flush pulls for each door leaf.

C. Operating Hardware for Pocket Doors: Provide

manufacturer's complete set consisting of extruded

aluminum or galvanized steel overhead track, adjustable

hangers (carriages), galvanized steel split jambs and split

studs, wood nailers for head track, jambs and studs,

galvanized steel brackets for assembly and attachment to

floor and wall framing, bumpers, and nylon floor guides



146

designed to accommodate the number (single and bi-

parting), size, thickness, and weight of door leaves

indicated. Provide flush pull and edge pull for each door leaf.

2.12 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS

A. Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and

smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where

indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for

exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where

resilient or flexible seal strip is

2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and

texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push pull units if

no latch or lock sets).

B. Provide finishes that match those established by

ANSI/BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's

sample.

C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or

coating, composition, hardness, and other qualities

complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case

less than specified by referenced standards for the

applicable units of hardware.

D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware

finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as

otherwise indicated. The suffix "NL" is used with standard

finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."

E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to

indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA

A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination

with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain

manufacturers for their products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



147

3.01 INSTALLATION






C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following

applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or

required to comply with governing regulations and except

as otherwise directed by Architect.

1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and

Hardware Institute.

2. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for

Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and

Hardware Institute.

3. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware

Locations for Wood Flush Doors"; applicable for flush

wood doors 1-3/8 and1-3/4 inches thick by 6 feet 8

inches and 7 feet 0 inches high.

D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where

cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into

surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another

way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or

application of surface protection with finishing Work

specified in the Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface

mounted items until finishes have been completed on the

substrates involved.

E. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust

and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for

proper installation and operation.

F. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for

anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in

accordance with industry standards.

G. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl rubber

or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with



148

requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint

Sealers."

H. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations to the extent installation

requirements are not otherwise indicated.

1. Where adhesive applied items are indicated, abrade or

otherwise prepare the substrate for complete adhesion

to ensure the items will not delaminate.

I. Install manufacturer supplied, temporary keyed construction

cores for all exterior doors, suite entry doors, and doors

where electrified hardware is scheduled. For all other doors,

install Owner-provided, temporary non-keyed plastic

construction cores unless keyed construction cores are

specifically called for.

3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and

each door to ensure proper operation or function of every

unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely

and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

1. Where door hardware is installed more than one (1)

month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or

area, return to the installation during the week prior to

acceptance or occupancy and make final check and

adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area.

Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper

function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door

control devices to compensate for final operation of

heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and

maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.

END OF SECTION - FINISH HARDWARE



149

3.1.8 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.










all applicable local requirements, and conform to codes and

ordinances of the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that

produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the

referenced glazing standard.

Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal

use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to

causes other than glass breakage and practices for

maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to

manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling, cracking,

and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from

normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process

and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and

cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions.

Defects include edge separation, delamination materially

obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding

those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard.



150

Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal

under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage

and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating

glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,

moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper

practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply

with the manufacturer's directions.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published

recommendations of glass product manufacturers and

organizations below, except where more stringent

requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for

glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in

referenced standards.

B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and

testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II

materials.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

safety glass permanently marked with certification label

of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other

certification agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating

glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at

least one component lite of units with appropriate

certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated

below:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).

D. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who

has completed glazing similar in material, design, and

extent to that indicated for Project with a record of

successful in service performance.

E. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from

one source for each product indicated in the project.

F. Single Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories:

Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each

product and installation method indicated.



151

G. Field Constructed Mockups: Prior to glazing, erect mockups

for each glass product indicated below to verify selections

made under sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and quality of materials and execution.

Build mockups to comply with the following requirements,

using materials indicated for final unit of Work:

1. Glass Products: Erect mockups with the following kinds

of glass to match glazing systems required for Project,

including typical lite size, framing systems, and glazing

methods:

a. Heat strengthened coated glass.

b. Fully tempered glass.

c. Spandrel glass.

d. Laminated glass.

e. Coated insulating glass.

2. Place mockups at the Project Site in location and of

size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and

times when mockups will be erected.

4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start

of final unit of Work.

5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects

and workmanship.

6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in

undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

completed unit of Work.

a. Accepted mockups in undisturbed condition at time

of Substantial Completion may become part of

completed unit of Work.



152

b. Perform tests under normal environmental

conditions during installation.

7. Schedule sufficient time to test and analyze results to

prevent delay in the Work.

8. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion

tests and get sealant manufacturer's written

recommendations for corrective measures, including

using special primers.

9. Testing is not required when glazing sealant

manufacturer can submit required preparation data that

is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous

testing of current sealant products for adhesion to and

compatibility with submitted glazing materials.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing

material and fabricated glass product required,

including installation and maintenance instructions.

B. Samples:

1. Submit, for verification purposes, 12 inch square

samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear

single pane units, and 12 inch long samples of each

color required (except black) for each type of sealant or

gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket

sample between two strips of material representative of

adjoining framing system in color.

C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective

manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials

furnished for Project comply with requirements.

1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing

materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels

designating type and thickness of glass, provided

labels represent a quality control program involving a



153

recognized certification agency or independent testing

laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement

from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing

materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion

with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to

material performance, including recommendations for

primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain

adhesion.

E. Record Documents:

1. Provide record approved product data, samples,

reports, and certificates.


Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's

directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and

glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes,

direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to

substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating

glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and

sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.

1.07 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and

installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind

loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without

failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the

following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and

installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain

watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials;

and other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are

for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing

Project loads and in service conditions. Provide glass lites

for the various size openings in the thicknesses and

strengths (annealed or heat treated) to meet or exceed the

following criteria:



154

1. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior

walls is 6.0.

2. Tinted and heat absorbing glass thicknesses for each

tint indicated are the same throughout Project.


Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when

ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the

limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost,

condensation, or other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform


2.02 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS

Glass Systems and/or Glazing shall be in accordance to the

materials codes and glass types below (please refer to

Drawings and Drawings Materials List for complementary

information):

GLASS TYPES

Glass Type "1":

Clear float glass conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,

Quality q3; 6mm thick.

Glass Type "2":

Clear float glass conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,

Quality q3, which has been fully tempered by manufacturer's

standard process (after cutting to final size), to achieve a flexural

strength of 4 times normal glass strength, in accordance with ASTM

C 1048, Condition A; 6mm thick.



155

Glass Type "3":

Clear float glass conforming to ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1,

Quality q3, 10mm thick, with polished edges.

Glass Type "4":

Bronze tinted float glass conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class

2, Quality q3; 6mm thick unless otherwise indicated with a visible

light transmittance of 55 percent, Reflectance of 6 percent, and a

shading coefficient of 0.73.

Glass Type "5":

Bronze tinted float glass conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class

2, Quality q3, which has been fully tempered by manufacturer's

standard process (after cutting to final size), to achieve a flexural

strength of 4 times normal glass strength, in accordance with ASTM

C 1048, Condition A; 6mm thick with a visible light transmittance of

55 percent, Reflectance of 6 percent, and a shading coefficient of

0.73.

Glass Type "6":

Laminated glass conforming to ASTM C1172, 9/16 inch nominal

overall thickness, consisting of an outboard light of 6mm thick clear

float glass laminated with a polyvinyl butyral interlayer to an inboard

light of 1/4 inch thick clear float glass.

Glass Type "7":

Laminated glass conforming to ASTM C1172, consisting of 2

sheets of clear float glass, 3mm thick, complying with ASTM C

1036, Type I, Class 2, laminated with a polyvinyl butyral interlayer

by manufacturer's standard heat-plus-pressure process with dirt, air

pockets, and foreign substances excluded.

Glass Type "8":

Insulating glass, 25mm overall thickness, double glass with 12mm

air space; exterior light 6mm thick coated bronze tinted tempered

float glass; interior light 6mm thick clear float glass, LOF "Eclipse

Clear (2)" glazed with the coating on the Number 2 surface as

viewed from the exterior with a visible light transmittance of 36

percent, Reflectance of 42 percent, and a shading coefficient of

0.55.



156

Glass Type "9":



float glass; interior light 6mm thick clear tempered float glass, LOF

"Eclipse Clear (2)" glazed with the coating on the Number 2 surface

as viewed from the exterior with a visible light transmittance of 36

percent, Reflectance of 42 percent, and a shading coefficient of

0.55.

Glass Type "10":



float glass; interior light 8mm thick clear laminated glass, similar to

LOF "Eclipse Bronze (2)" glazed with the coating on the Number 2

surface as viewed from the exterior with a visible light transmittance

of 21 percent, Reflectance of 19 percent, and a shading coefficient

of 0.41.

Glass Type "11":

Spandrel Glass: 6mm thick coated bronze tinted float glass, fully

tempered by manufacturer's standard process (after cutting to final

size), to achieve a flexural strength of 4 times normal glass

strength, glazed with the coating on the Number 2 surface as

viewed from the exterior, and with 25mm bonded "Black" fiberglass

insulation.

Glass Type “12”:


air space; exterior light 6mm thick tinted coated tempered float

glass; interior laminated clear float glass, 66.2, glazed with the

coating on the Number 2 surface as viewed from the exterior with a

visible light transmittance of 76 percent, Reflectance of 42 percent,

and a shading coefficient of 0.58.










157

















air space; exterior light 12mm thick tempered float glass; interior

laminated clear float glass, 6 + 1.5 PVB + 6mm thick, with a visible

light transmittance of 71 percent, Reflectance (external light) of 11

percent, and a shading coefficient of 0.49.

Bullet Resistant Glass:

Laminated, clear float glass, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, minimum

of 30 mm thickness, conforming to UL Test No. 752, Fifth Edition,

"Standard for Bullet Resisting Equipment" for resistance to medium

power small arms. Appearance and performance data equivalent to

Globe Amerada Glass Company "BR 136" bullet resisting glass.

2.03 CERAMIC COATED SPANDREL GLASS PRODUCTS

(WHEN APPLICABLE)

Ceramic Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition B

(spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated), Type I

(transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing

select), and complying with requirements specified.

Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those

passing fallout resistant test for spandrel glass specified in

ASTM C1048.



158

2.04 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Lock Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape

indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units

and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C542, black.

B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets

of material indicated below, complying with standards

referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of

profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene, ASTM C864.

2. EPDM, ASTM C864.

3. Silicone, ASTM C1115.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C1115.

5. Any material indicated above.

C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed cell,

integral skinned gaskets of material indicated below,

complying with ASTM C A509, Type II, black, and of

profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene.

2. EPDM.

3. Silicone.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.

5. Any material indicated above.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with

referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of

glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing

application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility

with surfaces contacted in installation.

Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by

sealant or gasket manufacturer.



159

Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A Durometer

hardness of 85 plus or minus 5.

Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a

Shore A Durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer

to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit

glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.06 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING

PRODUCTS

Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to

glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying

with recommendations of product manufacturer and

referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system

performance requirements.

2.07 DIMENSIONS AND GLASS TYPE FOR DOUBLE

GLAZING

Glass area below 3.5m2 (with maximum dimensions of 2.44 x

1.45m) – Exterior glass tempered 6mm thick;

Glass area from 4.5m2 to 6m

2 – Interior glass laminated 66.2;

Glass area from 2m2 to 4.5m

2 – Interior glass laminated 55.2;

Glass area less than 2m2 – Interior glass laminated 44.2;

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance

with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including

those for size, squareness, offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system.

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.



160

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing

members.

B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions


C. Clean glazing channels and other framing members

receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove

coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.02 INSTALLATION






C. Glazing – General:

1. Comply with combined recommendations of

manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other

glazing materials, except where more stringent

requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

2. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and

face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,

with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by

Project conditions during installation.

3. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and

installation as follows:

a. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent

damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with

metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units

within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a

pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on

bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at

top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by

manufacturer's label.



161

b. Remove damaged glass from Project Site and

legally dispose of off Site. Damaged glass is

glass with edge damage or other imperfections

that, when installed, weaken glass and impair

performance and appearance.

4. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for

adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction

sealant substrate testing.

5. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized

and located to comply with referenced glazing standard,

unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set

blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for

heel bead.

6. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass

manufacturers for installing glass lites.

7. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united

inches (length plus height) as follows:

a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly

opposite each other. Install correct size and

spacing to preserve required face clearances,

except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used

that have demonstrated ability to maintain required

face clearances and comply with system

performance requirements.

b. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass

and use thickness equal to sealant width. With

glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final

compressed thickness of tape.

8. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of

referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise

required by glass manufacturer.

9. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw,

bow, and similar characteristics.



162

D. Tape Glazing:

1. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed

by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude

slightly above sightline of stops.

2. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous

length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

3. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by

applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.

Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints

by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

4. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with

adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal

joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by

tape manufacturer.

5. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before

each lite is installed.

E. Gasket Glazing (Dry):

1. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths

recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.

2. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints

located at corners to compress gaskets producing a

weathertight seal without developing bending stresses

in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended

by gasket manufacturer.

3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing

stops.

F. Sealant Glazing (Wet):

1. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and

glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to

prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep

systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place

and in position to control depth of installed sealant



163

relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant

performance.

2. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids

and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to

glass and channel surfaces.

3. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a

substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized

gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate

dirt and moisture pockets.

G. Lock Strip Gasket Glazing:

1. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's

printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet

seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.

H. Mirror Glazing:

1. Install mirrors to comply with printed directions of mirror

manufacturer, and with referenced FGMA standard and

NAMM document. Mount mirrors in place to avoid

distorting reflected images and provide space for air

circulation between back of mirror and face of mounting

surface.

2. Mastic Spot Installation System: Install mirrors with

mastic as follows:

a. Identify and examine surfaces over which mirror is

to be mounted. Comply with manufacturer's printed

installation directions for preparation of mounting

surfaces including coating surfaces with mastic

manufacturer's special bond coating where

applicable.

b. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where

approved by manufacturers of mirror and backing

material.

c. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic

manufacturer's printed directions for coverage and

to allow air circulation between back of mirror and

face of mounting surface.



164

d. After mastic is applied, align mirror and press into

place while maintaining a minimum air space of

3/16 inch between back of mirror and mounting

surface.

e. For wall mounted mirrors install permanent means

of support at bottom and top edges with bottom

support designed to withstand mirror weight and

top support to prevent mirror from coming away

from wall along top edges.

3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after

installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held

away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.

Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances

resulting from construction operations including weld splatter.

If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come

into contact with glass, remove them immediately as

recommended by glass manufacturer.

Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete

and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during

construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of

dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as


Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked,

abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes,

accidents and vandalism, during construction period.

Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more

than four (4) days prior to date scheduled for inspections that

establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as


END OF SECTION - GLASS AND GLAZING



165

3.1.9 WOOD, PLYWOOD, BLOCKBOARDS, LAMINATE &

COMPOSITE SURFACES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.





Wood, plywood and blockboards for various applications

Wood veneers for various applications

Wood strip grilles

Plastic high-pressure laminate sheeting

Compact grade laminate panels

Solid core acrylic composite surfaces

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD, PLYWOOD, BLOCKBOARDS

A. All wood products shall be certified by FSC (Forest

Stewardship Council), which promote the responsible

management of the world's forests, protecting the

endangered trees species, or other certified

programs/organizations, which have the same purpose.

B. The Contractor shall only use plywood and block board

(and any other timber panel products) originating from

temperate or certified sources. Evidence of certification

shall be provided for review as required.

C. Plywood is to comply with B.S. 6566: “Plywood”. The

bonding adhesive for plywood shall be type “M.R.”

(Moisture resistant and moderately weather resistant) as



166

defined in B.S. 1203: “Specification for synthetic resin

adhesives for plywood.

D. Plywood for clear or natural finish shall be faced with

“Grade 1 veneer” and plywood for painted finish shall be

faced with “Grade 2 veneer”.

E. Block board to be B.S. 3444: “Specification for block board

and laminboard” with Grade 1 veneer or with Grade 2

veneer as appropriate for the specified finish and bonded

with type MR adhesive obtained from an approved

manufacturer.

2.02 WOOD VENEERS

A. All wood veneers, shall be certified by FSC (Forest

Stewardship Council) which promote the responsible



programs/organizations, which have the same purpose.

B. Shall be in accordance with each selected product by the

Architect (please refer to the Architecture project “Drawings

materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and Drawings, and the

tables below for complementary information).

2.03 WOOD STRIP GRILLES

A. All wood strip grilles shall be certified by FSC (Forest

Stewardship Council) which promote the responsible



programs/organizations which have the same purpose.

B. Shall be in accordance with each selected product by the


materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and Drawings, and the

tables below for complementary information).

2.04 PLASTIC HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE SHEETING

A. Plastic high pressure laminate

B. Technical Data



167

Physical Properties of General Purpose Laminates (Physical

Properties tested in accordance to BS EN 438:1995)

Wear Resistance - 600

Boiling Water Resistance - 8.2 (mass) 8.4 (thickness)

Dry Heat Resistance – Rating 5

Dimensional Stability at Elevated Temperature - 0.19 (length)

0.74 (thickness)

Dimensional Stability at Ambient Temperature - 0.07 (length)

0.36 (thickness)

Impact Resistance - 2.8 newtons

Crack Resistance- Rating 5

Scratch Resistance – 4.0 newtons

Stain Resistance - (Reagent 1+2) 5; (Reagent 3+4) 5

Light Fastness – Wool standard 7

Cigarette Resistance – Rating 4

Steam Resistance - Rating 5

C. Surfacing material are resistant to scratch and impacts

under normal use conditions.

D. Shall be in accordance with each selected product by the


materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and Drawings.

2.05 COMPACT GRADE LAMINATE PANELS

A. Compact grade laminate panels, shall be Formica, ref.

“Compact Grade Laminate”, or equivalent, manufactured

with a solid core built up from several layers of resin-

impregnated quality kraft papers. The decorative paper

impregnated with melamine resin shall be consolidated over

the quality kraft paper at high temperature and pressure to

form a homogeneous laminate, which thickness can be

available from 2.5mm up to 25mm. The result of this

manufacture system shall be a very strong, damage

resistant and structural stability laminate sheet.

B. This material shall be easy to clean, and therefore, ideal

also for wet and high humidity areas.



168

C. It shall be manufactured in accordance with ISO 9001

criteria and meet or exceed the performance requirements

of NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)

Standards, LD3-1995 and European National Standards EN

438:1991 and International Standards ISO 4586 for high

pressure decorative laminates and Compact grade laminate.

It shall also fulfil the requirement of environmental

management system specified as ISO 14001:1996.

D. Shall be of sufficient size and adequate for the purpose for

which it is required.

E. The number of joints to be minimum, and where abutted,

their position to be prior agreed with the Employer’s

Representative. Adjacent sheets to match exactly.

F. The finished surface shall be clear and free from rust, oil,

and grease or adhesive.

G. All adhesives shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

H. Product Technical Information

Compact Structural Laminate Grade: >2.0 to 25.0 mm thick,

two-sided decorative panel with black core; recommended

for horizontal and vertical interior application.

I. Physical Properties

PROPERTY TEST

METHOD

SPECIFICATION

LIMIT

TYPICAL

VALUE

Density BS

2782/620A

1.35 1.4 g/cm3

Wear

resistance

EN 438-2/10 350 minimum 500

revolutions

Boiling water

resistance

EN 438-2/12 2.0 maximum

2.0 maximum

0.39%mass

1.99%

thickness

Dry heat

resistance

EN 438-2/16 4 minimum Rating 5



169

Dimensional

stability at

elevated

temperature

EN 438-2/17 0.23 maximum

0.54 maximum

Machine

direction

0.18%

Cross-

machine

direction

0.15%

Dimensional

stability at

ambient

temperature

EN 438-2/18 0.16 maximum

0.22 maximum

Machine

direction

0.11%

Cross-

machine

direction

0.11%

Impact

resistance

EN 438-2/21 >180 > 350 cm

Scratch

resistance

EN 438-2/25 2

4

Rating 3

Stain

resistance

EN 438-2/26 5 minimum

4 minimum

(Reagents

1+2) 5

(Reagents

3+4) 5

Lightfastness EN 438-2/27 4 to 5 4 to 5

Cigarette

resistance


Steam

resistance


Crazing

resistance


Flexural

modulus

EN ISO 178 9000 minimum 11000 MPa



170

Flexural

strength

EN ISO 178 80 minimum 159 MPa

Tensile

strength

EN ISO 527-

2

60 minimum 44 MPa

J. The GREENGUARD Certification Program SM is an

industry-independent, third party testing program for low

emitting interior building materials, furnishings, and finish

systems. All GREENGUARD Certified Products have been

tested for their chemical emissions performance. In 2005,

GEI announced the GREENGUARD Children & Schools

SM standard, which evaluates the sensitive nature of school

populations combined with the unique building

characteristics found in schools, and presents the most

rigorous product emissions criteria to date. To date, more

than 170 manufacturers across various industries offer

GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified® Products.

These laminates shall be GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality

Certified® by the GREENGUARD.

K. Shall be in accordance with each selected product by the


materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and Drawings).

2.06 SOLID CORE

A. The Contractor shall use a proprietary stain, heat-and

chemical-resistant solid core acrylic composite product as

described. All sheeting to be of sufficient size and adequate

for the purpose for which it is required and the number of

joints to be minimum, and where abutted, the joints to be

polished to hide the joint-line. Adjacent sheets to match

exactly. The finished surface shall be clear and free from

rust, oil, and grease or adhesive. All adhesives shall be

applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.

B. All solid core acrylic composite material shall be warranted

for a minimum of 8 years and any defect or deterioration

found within the warranty period shall be made good or the

sheeting fully replaced at the expense of the Contractor.



171

C. Shall be in accordance with each selected product by the


materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and Drawings).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and framing

and opening dimensions are as indicated on the Drawings.

If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the



3.03 WORKMANSHIP

Protection measures shall be taken to void any damage to

works / materials other than those included in this contract.

All materials required for execution of the works shall be

protected from damage and shall be delivered in their original

unopened packages. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall

be removed from the premises.

3.04 PROTECTION

Protect work from damage and deterioration until date of


Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before


END OF SECTION - WOOD, PLYWOOD, BLOCKBOARDS,

LAMINATE & COMPOSITE SURFACES



172

3.1.10 WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD PANELS -

DRYWALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.





Gypsum board and joint treatment products.

Water resistant gypsum board and joint treatment products.

Mold and Mildew resistant gypsum board products.

Gypsum shaft liner.

Abuse resistant gypsum board.

Mold resistant gypsum board.

Sound dampening area separation walls.

Gypsum soffit board.

Gypsum sheathing board.

Accessories for the installation and trimming of gypsum board

partitions.

1.03 SCOPE

Supply and installation of metal framework (metal framing

channels, studs etc.) for the fixing of gypsum board panels

with 50mm infill of sound attenuation fire blankets in between

the panels as specified

Supply and installation of additional supporting element inside

the dry wall system for affixing of equipment where required.

1.04 STANDARDS



173

ASTM C 36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

ASTM C 79 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Sheathing

Board.

ASTM C 442 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing

Board, Gypsum Coreboard and Gypsum Shaftliner Board.

ASTM C 475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and

Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.

ASTM C 514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the

Application of Gypsum Board.

ASTM C 588 - Specification for Gypsum Base for Veneer

Plasters.

ASTM C 630 - Standard Specification for Water-Resistant

Gypsum Backing Board.

ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber

Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and

Manufactured Housing.

ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel

Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel

Products.

ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and

Finishing of Gypsum Board

ASTM C 931 - Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum

Soffit Board.

ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for

the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster

Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in.

(2.84 mm) in Thickness.

ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing

Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products

or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for

Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.

ASTM C 1280 - Standard Specification for Application of

Gypsum Sheathing.

ASTM C 1395 - Specification for Gypsum Ceiling Board.

ASTM C 1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.



174

ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to

Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an

Environmental Chamber.

ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of

Building Partitions and Elements.

ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Construction and Materials.

ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.


Measurement of Impact Sound Transmission through Floor-

Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine.

ASTM E 989 - Classification for Determination of Impact

Insulation Class (IIC).

CAN/ULC-S101 - Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests

of Building Construction and Materials.

GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish;

Gypsum Association.

GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum

Association.

GA-231 - Assessing Water damage to Gypsum Board;

Gypsum Association.

GA-238 - Guidelines for the Prevention of Mold Growth on

Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association.

GA-253 - Recommended Specifications for the Application of

Gypsum Sheathing; Gypsum Association.

GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum

Association.

GA-801 - Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Product;

Gypsum Association.

ITS (Dir) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing

Services; current edition.

UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials.

UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc.



175

ULC (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters'

Laboratories of Canada.

Local Rules and Regulations; Current Editions.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in fire-endurance rated assemblies

by an independent testing agency acceptable to the

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in STC/IIC-rated

assemblies by an independent testing agency.

1. Test Method: ASTM E 90/E 492 and classified

according to ASTM E 413/E 989.

2. STC Ratings: As indicated on the drawings;

designations listed are from Gypsum Association GA-

600, Fire Resistance Design Manual.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,

including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and

recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate locations, fabrication details, reinforcement,

metal framing details, connection details, dimensions,

and relationship to adjacent materials.

2. Indicate special details associated with fireproofing,

acoustic seals, or curved sheet installations.



176

C. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the

requirements of Credit will be met:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2: For products

being recycled, documentation of total weight of project

waste diverted from landfill.

2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For

products having recycled content, documentation

including percentages by weight of post-consumer and

pre-consumer recycled content.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each product

having recycled content.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to

laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, including

printed statement of VOC content.

4. Product Data for Credit IAQ 4.6 (Schools): For products

used in school construction, including certification

meeting CHPS Low-Emitting Material criteria Section

01350.

5. Product Data for Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2:

Submit data, including location and distance from

Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction,

harvest or recovery for main raw material.

a. Include statement indicating cost for each regional

material and the fraction by weight that is considered

regional.

D. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's recommendations for

cleaning each type of product specified.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed

specified requirements.

1.07 QUALITY INSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer: Company specializing in

performing Work of this section with minimum three years.



177

B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up of the area indicated on the

Drawings for evaluation of surface preparation techniques

and application workmanship.

1. Locate finish areas designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship

and finish is approved by Architect.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce

acceptable work.


Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and

ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for

optimum results. Do not install products under environmental

conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

Do not install interior products until installation areas are

enclosed and conditioned.

Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture

damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver and store gypsum board in accordance with GA-801.

Ship materials with a weather tight cover and in

manufacturer's original packages showing manufacturer's

name and product brand name.

Remove plastic shipping bags upon receipt and storage.

Failure to remove may increase the likelihood of mold growth.

Store materials inside and protected from damage by weather

and direct sunlight. Stack flat; protect ends, edges, and faces

of gypsum boards from damage. Protect steel studs and metal

accessories from moisture.



178

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will

minimize joints in each area that correspond with the support

system indicated.

Jobsite Waste Recycle: In compliance with LEED

requirements.

Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with

recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content

plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a

minimum 50 percent by weight.

2.02 GYPSUM PANELS

Gypsum panels shall be light-weight, conform to BS 1230: Part

1: 1985 and of maximum length, tapered edges. Gypsum

boards are to be identified by grey face to decorative side and

shall conform to BS 476 Part 4 from an accredited laboratory

recognized by HOKLAS

2.03 METAL STUDS

Metal studs and channels to be non-load bearing lipped wall

studs rolled formed from 0.55mm coated steel, punch outs

25mm diameter @ 600mm centers provided for installation of

services. All partition stud and track proprietary system shall

be manufactured from materials that conform to the following

specification and standards.

2.04 PARTITION FRAMING

Drywall steel stud wall shall be installed as per the

manufacturer’s installation instructions.

The track sections shall be fixed to the primary structure as

per manufacturer’s instructions.

Fixing shall not be more than 100mm from either end.

Studs shall be placed at 400mm centers maximum.( for Max

drywall height of 4450mm).



179

Studs shall be placed at 300mm centers maximum.( for Max

drywall height of 4750mm).

Studs shall have as standard factory pre – punctured 25mm

diameter bell-mouthed service holes spaced at 600mm

centers up to 2400mm.

There shall be 2 strengthening groove running along each

other for the entire length of the stud.

The studs shall have Mountain Knurling along the fixing face of

each leg to enable screw point to be positively driven into the

steel .The Knurling also allows air to pass between the face of

the studs and building board, keeping the wall cavity dryer.

All areas that are suspending any weight shall have studs

boxed together (with acoustic studs, boxed with Floor track

sections) for the entire span of the partition and there shall be

a row of nogging equally spaced along wall height that acts as

an additional support.

In event of the absence of box studs sections, studs spacing

shall adequately be reduced from 610mm centers box studs to

305mm center single studs.

2.05 METAL SPECIFICATION

Steel Grade: G2Z275

Yield Strength: FY: 300 MPa (Minimum)

Coating Grade: Z275 - 275 g/m2 Zinc

Corrosion Test: ASTM B 117 - 85 Salt Spray Test

2.06 FIRE BLANKETS

Infill sound attenuation fire blankets to be semi-rigid spun

mineral fiber mat (min. 50mm thick x60kg/m3); cut neatly

between studs to ensure no gaps and/or crushing of the

insulation, use approved fixing methods and samples to be

submitted to the Employer for approval.

2.07 CAULKING AND JOINTS

Caulking and jointing materials to be Fire and acoustic sealant

/ jointing system.



180

2.08 SYSTEMS AND NOMINAL THICKNESS

Systems and nominal thickness shall be in accordance to the

materials codes below (please refer to Drawings and Drawings

Materials List for complementary information):

2.09 PERFORMANCE

Fire Resistance - Not required.

Sound Isolation - Not required.

Test Certificate

The Contractor shall furnish the Employer upon request test

certification for published fire, sound and structural data

covering systems designed and constructed according to its

published specifications.

The Contractor will be required to submit a written guarantee

in an approved form against excessive wear, faulty

workmanship and material for five (5) years after Practical

Completion and also obtain a manufacturer’s warranty for 10

(10) years after Practical Completion for faulty material .

Allowable deflection – N/A

Allowable head deflection

+ 20mm: Bottom and Deflection Head track should be

fastened to structural elements 50mm in from each end of the

track and at max. 600mm centers with suitable masonry

fastened (e.g. Power actuated shot, nylon and anchor or

expanding anchor). Position studs vertically with open sides

facing the same direction, engaging the top and bottom track.

Studs to be cut 20mm short at top track to allow for slab

deflection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION







181

3.02 PREPARATION





3.03 WORKMANSHIP

The whole dry wall system shall be installed in accordance

with the specifications of the manufacturer.







Steel runners shall be fixed at floor and ceiling to structural

elements with suitable fasteners; all steel studs to be erected

vertically with maximum spacing of 610mm c/c.

Gypsum panels shall be applied with all edges positioned over

steel studs; maximum practical lengths to be used to minimize

end joints; joints to be staggered on opposite sides of partition.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Application: Apply and maintain conditions during

installation in accordance with GA-216 and GA-238 and as

follows:

Keep gypsum board dry throughout application.

Do not use gypsum board that has visible mold growth.

Apply gypsum board on walls with a minimum 1/4 inch

(6.4 mm) gap between the gypsum board and the floor.

Do not apply gypsum board over other building materials

where conditions exist that are favorable to mold growth.

Maintain a sound weather-tight building envelope including,

such elements as the roof, sealants, windows, etc.



182

Immediate and appropriate remediation measures must be

taken as soon as water leaks or condensation sources are

identified.

Provide routine cleaning and maintenance operations to

prevent saturation of the gypsum board.

If gypsum board is damaged by water, assess the need for

replacement in accordance with GA-231.

B. Install accordance with GA 216 and the following:

Metal Framing: ASTM C 754.

Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1280 and GA-253.

Fire Resistant Construction: GA 600.

Gypsum Board and Joint Treatment: ASTM C 840 and GA-

214.

Gypsum panel manufacturer's published recommendations.

3.05 FINISHING

A. Finishing: Tape, fill, sand and finish joints in accordance

with ASTM C 840 and GA-214.

B. Provide a level 4 Finish all in accordance to Level 4 as

stated in the Australian / New Zealand Standard AS/NZS

2589.1:1997, Gypsum Linings in Residential & light

Commercial construction – Application & finishing ;Part 1:

Gypsum Plasterboard, clause Finishing of gypsum

plasterboard.

Finishing of gypsum plasterboard

Flush Finishing; flush finishing shall be carried out as follows:

The abutting edges and ends of gypsum plasterboard,

fastener indentations, internal and external corners and minor

surface damage shall be treated with joint cement to give

surfaces suitable for decoration.

Both recessed and butt joints shall be reinforced with a

suitable reinforcing tape. Cements for tape application and

flush finishing may be a drying or setting type. When applied,

the cements shall be of compatible chemical composition with

the previous coat. The use of any additives to modify any of

the properties of cements or compounds shall not be permitted;



183

those additives may adversely affect the properties of the

cement or compound.

Drying type cements shall not be applied when the interior

temperature is less than 10 Degrees Celsius. Setting type

cements must be used with caution in hot & dry conditions as

the cement may dry out before setting has taken place.

Adequate ventilation shall be provided to ensure drying,

setting or curing of the cement.

Gypsum plasterboard shall be kept free of any dirt, oil or other

foreign matter, which could cause a lack of bonding. All dents

or gouges shall be filled to a smooth finish in the plane of the

surface of the board.

Taping and finishing shall be carried out using appropriate

hand tools such as board knives and trowels with true edges,

or mechanical tools designed for this work and the joint

treatment cement being used.

Tape shall be properly bedded into the joint cement and

excess cement shall be removed. Refer to the manufacturer

standards for joint details.

A second coat shall be applied with tools of sufficient width to

extend beyond the joint center as manufacturer’s stated

standard. The cement shall be smoothed down to an even

surface. After drying or setting, the treated surface shall be

sanded or scraped to eliminate any high spots or excessive

cement.

A third coat shall be applied with tools, which permit the

feathering of joint treatment edges. After drying, this final coat

shall be lightly sanded to leave a smooth even surface

covering the joint. Caution shall be taken during sanding not to

raise the nap of the linerboard. Fastener heads shall be

covered with successive coats each applied in different

direction.

Care shall be taken to ensure that all tools and containers are

kept clean and free from foreign materials and set plaster.

Only water suitable for drinking shall be used for mixing

powder compounds or for thinning premixed materials.

Cements shall not be allowed to freeze.



184

Drying cements shall be allowed to dry thoroughly between

successive coats or before sanding. Setting type cements can

receive additional coats after the caulking.

Caulk all perimeter gaps with Fire Sealant.

3.06 SKIRTING

Screw fix skirting to bottom tracks or adhere to the

plasterboard as required.

3.07 INTERNAL CORNERS

Reinforce internal corners using Paper Tape 50mm width and

jointing compound. When thoroughly dry, lightly sand.

3.08 EXPANSION JOINTS

In long partition, install Joint (P/N P35) at maximum centers of

9.0m. Fixing and jointing as per ‘External corners’ application.

3.09 PROTECTION





END OF SECTION - WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD

PANELS - DRYWALLS



185

3.1.11 WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD PANELS - CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.





Gypsum board and joint treatment products.

Water resistant gypsum board and joint treatment products.

Mold and Mildew resistant gypsum board products.

Gypsum shaft liner.

Abuse resistant gypsum board.

Mold resistant gypsum board.

Sound dampening area separation walls.

Gypsum soffit board.

Gypsum sheathing board.

Accessories for the installation and trimming of gypsum board

ceilings.

1.03 SCOPE

Suspended Ceiling which consist 12mm thick screw fixed onto

ceiling system (top cross rail @ 1200mm* ctrs max., furring

channel @ 600 mm* ctrs max., suspension clip and angle

bracket) suspended by 5mm hanger rods. Boards surface to

be flushed finished all fixed in accordance to manufacturer’s

instruction and recommendation.

1.04 STANDARDS

ASTM C 36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.



186

ASTM C 79 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Sheathing

Board.

ASTM C 442 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing

Board, Gypsum Coreboard and Gypsum Shaftliner Board.

ASTM C 475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and

Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.

ASTM C 514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the

Application of Gypsum Board.

ASTM C 588 - Specification for Gypsum Base for Veneer

Plasters.

ASTM C 630 - Standard Specification for Water-Resistant

Gypsum Backing Board.

ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber

Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and

Manufactured Housing.

ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel

Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel

Products.

ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and

Finishing of Gypsum Board

ASTM C 931 - Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum

Soffit Board.

ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for

the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster

Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in.

(2.84 mm) in Thickness.

ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing

Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products

or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for

Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.

ASTM C 1280 - Standard Specification for Application of

Gypsum Sheathing.

ASTM C 1395 - Specification for Gypsum Ceiling Board.

ASTM C 1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.



187

ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to

Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an

Environmental Chamber.


Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of

Building Partitions and Elements.

ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Construction and Materials.

ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.


Measurement of Impact Sound Transmission through Floor-

Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine.

ASTM E 989 - Classification for Determination of Impact

Insulation Class (IIC).

CAN/ULC-S101 - Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests

of Building Construction and Materials.

GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish;

Gypsum Association.

GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum

Association.

GA-231 - Assessing Water damage to Gypsum Board;

Gypsum Association.

GA-238 - Guidelines for the Prevention of Mold Growth on

Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association.

GA-253 - Recommended Specifications for the Application of

Gypsum Sheathing; Gypsum Association.

GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum

Association.

GA-801 - Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Product;

Gypsum Association.

ITS (Dir) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing

Services; current edition.

UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials.

UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc.



188

ULC (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters'

Laboratories of Canada.

Local Rules and Regulations; Current Editions.


A. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in fire-endurance rated assemblies

by an independent testing agency acceptable to the

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in STC/IIC-rated

assemblies by an independent testing agency.

1. Test Method: ASTM E 90/E 492 and classified

according to ASTM E 413/E 989.

2. STC Ratings: As indicated on the drawings;

designations listed are from Gypsum Association GA-

600, Fire Resistance Design Manual.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,

including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and

recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate locations, fabrication details, reinforcement,

metal framing details, connection details, dimensions,

and relationship to adjacent materials.

2. Indicate special details associated with fireproofing,

acoustic seals, or curved sheet installations.



189

C. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the

requirements of Credit will be met:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2: For products

being recycled, documentation of total weight of project

waste diverted from landfill.

2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For

products having recycled content, documentation

including percentages by weight of post-consumer and

pre-consumer recycled content.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each product

having recycled content.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to

laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, including

printed statement of VOC content.

4. Product Data for Credit IAQ 4.6 (Schools): For products

used in school construction, including certification

meeting CHPS Low-Emitting Material criteria Section

01350.

5. Product Data for Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2:

Submit data, including location and distance from

Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction,

harvest or recovery for main raw material.

5.1. Include statement indicating cost for each

regional material and the fraction by weight

that is considered regional.

D. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's recommendations for

cleaning each type of product specified.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed

specified requirements.

1.07 QUALITY INSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer: Company specializing in

performing Work of this section with minimum three years.



190

B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up of the area indicated on the

Drawings for evaluation of surface preparation techniques

and application workmanship.

1. Locate finish areas designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship

and finish is approved by Architect.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce

acceptable work.


Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and

ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for

optimum results. Do not install products under environmental

conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

Do not install interior products until installation areas are

enclosed and conditioned.

Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture

damaged, and those that are mold damaged.


Deliver and store gypsum board in accordance with GA-801.

Ship materials with a weathertight cover and in manufacturer's

original packages showing manufacturer's name and product

brand name.

Remove plastic shipping bags upon receipt and storage.

Failure to remove may increase the likelihood of mold growth.

Store materials inside and protected from damage by weather

and direct sunlight. Stack flat; protect ends, edges, and faces

of gypsum boards from damage. Protect steel studs and metal

accessories from moisture.



191

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will

minimize joints in each area that correspond with the support

system indicated.

Jobsite Waste Recycle: In compliance with LEED

requirements.

Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with

recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content

plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a

minimum 50 percent by weight.

2.02 GYPSUM PANELS AND SUSPENSION CEILING

FIXING SYSTEM

Suspended Concealed Ceiling, a lightweight, non- combustible,

economical system consisting of Wet Area 12mm thick screw

fixed to ceiling system and finished, providing a smooth and

continuous surface. The ceiling is suspended from concrete

soffit or roof structure, or may be fixed directly to the underside

of timber or steel framing members.

2.03 PLASTERBOARD

Wet Area 12mm thick

2.04 FRAMING

Top Cross Rail

Furring Channel

Joiner/ Locking clip

Suspension Bracket

Suspension Rod

Suspension Clip

Fastener: 25mm Type ‘S’ Needle Point Screws



192

2.05 FASTENER

25mm Type ‘S’ Needle Point Screws

2.06 JOINT TYPE

Paper Tape 50mm width

2.07 SYSTEMS AND NOMINAL SIZES

Systems and nominal sizes shall be in accordance to the

materials codes below (please refer to Drawings and Drawings

Materials List for complementary information):

2.08 PERFORMANCE

Mass - 13.6 kg/m2

Fire Resistance - Not required.

Acoustic Rating - Not required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION





3.02 PREPARATION





3.03 WORKMANSHIP

The whole dry wall system shall be installed in accordance

with the specifications of the manufacturer.



193







Steel runners shall be fixed at floor and ceiling to structural

elements with suitable fasteners; all steel studs to be erected

vertically with maximum spacing of 610mm c/c.

Gypsum panels shall be applied with all edges positioned over

steel studs; maximum practical lengths to be used to minimize

end joints; joints to be staggered on opposite sides of partition.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Application: Apply and maintain conditions during

installation in accordance with GA-216 and GA-238 and as

follows:

Keep gypsum board dry throughout application.

Do not use gypsum board that has visible mold growth.

Apply gypsum board on walls with a minimum 1/4 inch (6.4

mm) gap between the gypsum board and the floor.

Do not apply gypsum board over other building materials

where conditions exist that are favorable to mold growth.

Maintain a sound weather-tight building envelope including,

such elements as the roof, sealants, windows, etc.

Immediate and appropriate remediation measures must be

taken as soon as water leaks or condensation sources are

identified.

Provide routine cleaning and maintenance operations to

prevent saturation of the gypsum board.

If gypsum board is damaged by water, assess the need for

replacement in accordance with GA-231.

B. Install accordance with GA 216 and the following:

Metal Framing: ASTM C 754.

Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1280 and GA-253.

Fire Resistant Construction: GA 600.

Gypsum Board and Joint Treatment: ASTM C 840 and GA-

214.



194

Gypsum panel manufacturer's published recommendations.

3.05 FINISHING

A. Finishing: Tape, fill, sand and finish joints in accordance

with ASTM C 840 and GA-214.

B. Provide a level 4 Finish all in accordance to Level 4 as

stated in the Australian / New Zealand Standard AS/NZS

2589.1:1997, Gypsum Linings in Residential & light

Commercial construction – Application & finishing ;Part 1:

Gypsum Plasterboard, clause Finishing of gypsum

plasterboard.

Finishing of gypsum plasterboard

Flush Finishing; flush finishing shall be carried out as follows:

The abutting edges and ends of gypsum plasterboard,

fastener indentations, internal and external corners and minor

surface damage shall be treated with joint cement to give

surfaces suitable for decoration.

Both recessed and butt joints shall be reinforced with a

suitable reinforcing tape. Cements for tape application and

flush finishing may be a drying or setting type. When applied,

the cements shall be of compatible chemical composition with

the previous coat. The use of any additives to modify any of

the properties of cements or compounds shall not be permitted;

those additives may adversely affect the properties of the

cement or compound.

Drying type cements shall not be applied when the interior

temperature is less than 10 Degrees Celsius. Setting type

cements must be used with caution in hot & dry conditions as

the cement may dry out before setting has taken place.

Adequate ventilation shall be provided to ensure drying,

setting or curing of the cement.

Gypsum plasterboard shall be kept free of any dirt, oil or other

foreign matter, which could cause a lack of bonding. All dents

or gouges shall be filled to a smooth finish in the plane of the

surface of the board.

Taping and finishing shall be carried out using appropriate

hand tools such as board knives and trowels with true edges,



195

or mechanical tools designed for this work and the joint

treatment cement being used.

Tape shall be properly bedded into the joint cement and

excess cement shall be removed. Refer to the manufacturer

standards for joint details.

A second coat shall be applied with tools of sufficient width to

extend beyond the joint center as manufacturer’s stated

standard. The cement shall be smoothed down to an even

surface. After drying or setting, the treated surface shall be

sanded or scraped to eliminate any high spots or excessive

cement.

A third coat shall be applied with tools, which permit the

feathering of joint treatment edges. After drying, this final coat

shall be lightly sanded to leave a smooth even surface

covering the joint. Caution shall be taken during sanding not to

raise the nap of the linerboard. Fastener heads shall be

covered with successive coats each applied in different

direction.

Care shall be taken to ensure that all tools and containers are

kept clean and free from foreign materials and set plaster.

Only water suitable for drinking shall be used for mixing

powder compounds or for thinning premixed materials.

Cements shall not be allowed to freeze.

Drying cements shall be allowed to dry thoroughly between

successive coats or before sanding. Setting type cements can

receive additional coats after the material has set and before it

dries completely.

3.06 CAULKING

Caulk all perimeter gaps Fire Sealant.

3.07 EXPANSION JOINTS

In long partition, install Control Joint at maximum centers of

9.0m. Fixing and jointing as per ‘External corners’ application.



196

3.08 PROTECTION





3.09 SAFETY AND FIRST AID

Although there are no health hazards known in the normal use

and application of plasterboard, the following precautions

should be observed:

Avoid creating dust when handling plasterboard or mixing

plaster products.

Reduced sanding by passing a wet sponge over the edge of

the finished joints after trowelling.

If dry sanding is necessary and dust is created, provide

adequate ventilation, wear eye protection and a disposable

respiratory mask conforming to Australian/New Zealand

Standard AS/NZS 1716:1994 Respiratory Protective Devices

Keep all construction materials and tools out of reach of

children

If plaster compound or dust comes into contact with eyes -

wash eyes thoroughly with water

If plaster compound or dust comes into contact with skin -

wash skin thoroughly with soap and water

If plaster dust is inhaled - move to a fresh air environment

If plastering compound or dust is ingested - drink plenty of

water

END OF SECTION - WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD

PANELS - CEILINGS



197

3.1.12 CERAMIC TILES

PART 1 – GENERAL




Section.











1.03 QUALITY ASSURACE

Single Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade,

finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single

source with resources to provide products of consistent quality

in appearance and physical properties without delaying

progress of the Work.

Single Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting

Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one

manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component

and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who

has successfully completed tile installations similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for Project.



198

1.04 SUBMITALS

Samples:

Submit samples for initial selection purposes of each tile type

and grout in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of

actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors,

textures, and patterns available for each type of finish

indicated.

Where finish involves normal color and texture variations,

include sample sets composed of two or more units showing

full range of variations expected.

Include similar samples of material for joints and accessories

involving color selection.

Submit samples for verification purposes of each type, class,

and color/ pattern of tile required, not less than 18 inches

square on plywood or hardboard backing, and grouted as

required. Architect's review will be for color, pattern and

texture only.

Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive

responsibility of the Contractor. Prepare and submit new

samples, if requested, until appearance is acceptable to the

Architect.

Product Data:

Submit manufacturer's product data and

installation/maintenance instructions for all manufactured

products and materials.

Shop Drawings:

Submit plans of all areas to receive tile Work showing location

of expansion and control joints, layout of tile units, and other

conditions affecting the Work.

Include details showing setting methods, expansion joint

constructions, and relationships to adjacent substrates.

Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by

measuring, record measurements on shop Drawings, and

coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with

Architect.



199

Provide manufacturer's Master Grade Certificate bearing TCA

Certification mark and stating type, grade and location of

material for all tile specified to be "Standard Grade".

Record Documents:

Provide record approved shop drawings, samples, and

warranties.

1.05 MOCK-UP INSTALATION

Prior to beginning tile installation, arrange for a meeting, on-

site, with the Architect to review proposed tile layout in each

area scheduled to receive tile.

Arrange for a "mock-up" installation of tile at certain areas as

directed to establish acceptable appearance standards.

In general, mock-up areas will be limited to approximately 40

square feet each and will be located at intersections of floor

and wall, at corners of rooms.


Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers

with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply

with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile

packages.

Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water,

freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.

Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed

surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or

edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating

does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from

bonding surfaces before setting tile.


Maintain environmental conditions and protect Work during

and after installation to comply with referenced standards and

manufacturer's printed recommendations.

Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile

Work from carbon dioxide buildup.



200

Maintain temperatures at 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or

more in tiled areas during installation and for seven (7) days

after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by

referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that

match products installed as described below, packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly

describing contents.

Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to

3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color,

pattern, and size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform


2.02 MANUFACTURERS

The notes and schedules on the Drawings establish

manufacturer and model/design of tile products required for

the Project. Provide the products listed unless Architect

approves products of other manufacturer specifically for this

Project.

2.03 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1

"American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile"

for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated.

Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements


ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with

ANSI standard referenced with products and materials

indicated for setting and grouting.



201

A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's

standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other

products requiring selection of colors, surface textures,

patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide

specific products or materials complying with the

following requirements:

Match Architect's sample.

Match color, texture, and pattern indicated by reference to

manufacturer's standard designations for these

characteristics.

Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's

full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for

products of type indicated.

Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within

the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in

factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken

from one package show the same range in colors as those

taken from other packages and match approved samples.

Mounting: Where factory mounted tile is required, provide

back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with

manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated.

For glazed wall tile, provide "Standard Grade" units,

complying with ANSI A137.1. Provide units, trim and

special shapes as indicated and required.

Accessories for Glazed Wall Tile: Provide vitreous china

accessories of type and size indicated and in color and

finish to match adjoining glazed wall tile.

2.04 MORTAR SETTING BED MATERIALS

Provide Portland cement mortar as specified in the ANSI A

108 Series, Materials, and Installation Specifications with a

Portland Cement mortar/sand mix in 1:6 proportion.

For "Thin Set/Dry Set" mortar bed setting, provide factory

sanded Portland Cement mix with manufacturer's standard

acrylic latex additive conforming to ANSI A 118.4.

For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with

requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other

requirements in ANSI A118.4.



202

2.05 ADHESIVE SETTING MATERIALS

For wall tile adhesive, provide factory mixed organic adhesive

complying with ANSI A136.1, Type I, with manufacturer's

certification of conformance.

2.06 JOINT GROUT

For mosaic tile and glazed tile grout, provide manufactured

joint grout conforming to ANSI A118.6.

For epoxy grout, provide two-component epoxy grout

conforming to ANSI 118.3.

2.07 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of

referenced standards and manufacturers including those for

accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content;

type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing

containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to

produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum

performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of installed tile.

Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and

free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.

Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames,

electrical and mechanical units of Work, and similar items

located in or behind tile has been completed before installing

tile.

Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions




203

Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges

selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been

blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units

taken from one package show the same range in colors as

those taken from other packages and match approved

samples. If not factory blended, either returns to manufacturer

or blend tiles at the Project Site before installing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable local

requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and


All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s


Before starting the installation operations of any surface, we

recommend you make sure that the ceramic batch is adequate

and sufficient in terms of quantity, tone and calibration. If in

case of large environments joints must be positioned at regular

intervals, in small environments a small gap between the tiles

and perimeter walls is sufficient: the skirting board will cover

the gap and provide the finishing effect. Avoid walking on the

floor for at least 2/3 days after the installation. If walking on the

floor is necessary, lay wooden planks on the surface. Please

notice that if the tiles are installed with the traditional

procedure and no additives are added to the mortar, at least

one month has to elapse before the floor can be subjected to

stress and operating loads.

Extend tile Work into recesses and under or behind equipment

and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions

except as otherwise shown. Terminate Work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or

joint alignments.

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and

drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind

cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping,

fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or

covers overlap tile. Carefully lay out tile in an endeavor to

center the tiles to space them evenly, and to avoid cutting

them. If cutting is necessary, cutting shall be done by saw cut

or drilling only, no tile cutters or snipped edges allowed; all cut



204

ends shall be rubbed smooth and even. Unless otherwise

shown, lay out tile so that no tile less than 1/2 size occurs. For

height stated in feet and inches, maintain full courses to

produce nearest attainable heights without cutting tile. Align

joints in wall tile vertically and horizontally. No staggering of

joints will be permitted. All cutting and drilling shall be done

without marring surfaces and shall be done neatly to fit closely

around pipes, fixtures, and fittings so that cover plates will

overlap cuts.

Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints

when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same

size. Lay out tile Work and center tile fields in both directions

in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile

cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.

Confirm locations of joints in substrate will align with planned

expansion joints in tile Work. Adjust layout of tile if necessary

to align expansion joints with substrate conditions.

Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant

filled joints, including control, Contraction, and isolation joints,

where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar

beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.

Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete

substrates.

Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following

installation standards:

3.03 GROUT

Wall Joints (less than 1/8 inches wide): Unsanded Grout.

Floor and Wall Joints (1/8 inch to 5/8 inch wide): Sanded Grout.

Floor Joints in Showers, and all Quarry Tile Joints (1/16 inch to

3/8 inch wide): Epoxy Grout.

3.04 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

At all floor tile installations, provide expansion joints at

perimeter of area to be tiled, at all penetrations in tile Work,

and 12 feet 0 inches on center both ways as recommended in

the TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" unless closer

spacing is indicated or required by Project conditions. Install



205

removable strips of the same depth as the finished tile system

including setting bed. Remove strips after grouting and curing

operations.

Install joints in accordance with TCA Method EJ711.


Initial Cleaning:

It is normally performed once before using the floor and it is

obligatorily after the installation. Its purpose is to eliminate any

trace of lime, cement or resin residues contained in the grouts

used for the joints. During this phase all the typologies

products must be washed using a solution of hydrochloric acid

(2/3 water, 1/3 acid). To prevent the acid-based product used

for the initial cleaning from corroding the cement-based joint

filler, we recommend you wet the floor prior to cleaning so that

the joints are impregnated and thus protected from the

corrosive action of the acid. If the initial cleaning is carried out

after the floor has been used, before applying the acid product

it is advisable to first remove any greasy or similar substances

using suitable cleaning products. After cleaning, the floor must

be rinsed thoroughly and the residual water collected.

Routine Cleaning:

For everyday cleaning, simply wash the floor with water and

normal cleaning products suitable for ceramic surfaces.

Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when

permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions,

but no sooner than fourteen (14) calendar days after

installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous

plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with

clean water before and after cleaning.

When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective material

to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile Work with kraft

paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent

staining, damage, and wear.

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven (7)

calendar days after grouting is completed.

Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral

cleaner from tile surfaces.



206

END OF SECTION - CERAMIC TILES

3.1.13 STONEWARE TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual

are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is

directly applicable to them.








1.03 QUALITY ASSURACE

Single Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade,

finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single

source with resources to provide products of consistent quality

in appearance and physical properties without delaying


Single Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting

Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one

manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component

and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who

has successfully completed tile installations similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for Project.



207

1.04 SUBMITALS

A. Samples:

Submit samples for initial selection purposes of each tile

type and grout in form of manufacturer's color charts

consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full

range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each

type of finish indicated.

Where finish involves normal color and texture variations,

include sample sets composed of two or more units showing

full range of variations expected.

Include similar samples of material for joints and

accessories involving color selection.

Submit samples for verification purposes of each type, class,

and color/ pattern of tile required, not less than 18 inch

square on plywood or hardboard backing, and grouted as

required. Architect's review will be for color, pattern and

texture only.

Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive

responsibility of the Contractor.

Prepare and submit new samples, if requested, until

appearance is acceptable to the Architect.

B. Product Data:

Submit manufacturer's product data and

installation/maintenance instructions for all manufactured

products and materials.

C. Shop Drawings:

Submit plans of all areas to receive tile Work showing

location of expansion and control joints, layout of tile units,

and other conditions affecting the Work.

Include details showing setting methods, expansion joint

constructions, and relationships to adjacent substrates.

Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by

measuring, record measurements on shop Drawings, and

coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with

Architect.

Provide manufacturer's Master Grade Certificate bearing

TCA Certification mark and stating type, grade and location

of material for all tile specified to be "Standard



208

Grade".


Provide record approved shop drawings, samples, and

warranties.

E. Warranty:

Provide guarantee on waterproofing membrane stating that

the waterproofing membrane will not leak, cause

delamination of tile installation, or otherwise fail to perform

as protective waterproofing for a period of five (5) years from

the Date of Substantial Completion.


Load-Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on

walkway surfaces, provide installations rated for the following

load-bearing performance level based on testing assemblies

according to ASTM C 627 that are representative of those

indicated for this Project.

Extra Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 14

Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 12

Moderate: Passes cycles 1 through 10

Light: Passes cycles 1 through 6

Residential: Passes cycles 1 through 3

1.06 MOCK-UP INSTALATION

Prior to beginning tile installation, arrange for a meeting, on-

site, with the Architect to review proposed tile layout in each

area scheduled to receive tile.

Arrange for a "mock-up" installation of tile at certain areas as

directed to establish acceptable appearance standards.

In general, mock-up areas will be limited to approximately 40

square feet each and will be located at intersections of floor

and wall, at corners of rooms.




209

Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers

with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply

with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile

packages.

Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water,

freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.

Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed

surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or

edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating

does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from

bonding surfaces before setting tile.


Maintain environmental conditions and protect Work during

and after installation to comply with referenced standards and

manufacturer's printed recommendations.

Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile

Work from carbon dioxide buildup.

Maintain temperatures at 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or

more in tiled areas during installation and for seven (7) days

after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by

referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.


Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that

match products installed as described below, packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly

describing contents.

Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to

3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color,

pattern, and size.



210

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




2.02 MANUFACTURERS


manufacturer and model/design of tile products required for

the Project. Provide the products listed unless Architect

approves products of other manufacturer specifically for this

Project.

2.03 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Stoneware tiles are full-bodied porcelain stoneware, dry-

pressed, highly compact, weather and chemical agent

resistant and with low porosity.

For installation methods consult detailed information from each

brand before starting the works.

A. Properties and process features:

Full-body porcelain stoneware slabs, made using systems of

patented multi-loading with computerized control, calibrated,

rectified.

The slabs consist of single, compact, frost proof, impervious

mass that resists chemical attacks, achieved through dry-

pressing of high-quality bodies made up of natural raw

materials (kaolin minerals, feldspars and inert materials),

atomized, and mixed in the press. The slabs are made

mechanically resistant through a sintering process at very

high temperatures.

Tiles must be rectified with straightens edges perfectly

squared.

B. Dimensions according to the drawings.

C. Materials supplied rectified and squared at caliber 7

(monocaliber).

D. Technical Features:



211

1. Shall be in accordance with each selected product by

the Architect (please refer to the Architecture project

“Drawings materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and

Drawings, and the table in this “Technical

Specifications”, section 09 30 02, item 2.03, G, for

complementary information).

2. If there is no mention of a specific product/brand, the

general technical features for the stoneware tiles shall

be as below:

a. Water Absorption (ISO 10545.3) - 0,02 % - 0,04 %

b. Sizes (ISO 10545.2)

c. Length and width - ± 0.1%

d. Thickness - ± 5%

e. Edge straightness - ± 0.1%

f. Orthogonality - ± 0.1%

g. Flatness - ± 0.2%

h. Modulus Of Rupture (R) (ISO 10545.4) - 50 N/mm2

i. Resistance to deep abrasion (ISO 10545.6) -

135mm3

j. Coefficient of linear thermal expansion (ISO

10545.8) – 6,2MK-1

k. Resistance to thermal shock (ISO 10545.9) –

Resistant

l. Resistance to frost (ISO 10545.12) - Frostproof

m. Resistance to chemicals (ISO 10545.13) –

Conforms

n. Stain resistance (ISO 10545.14) – Conforms



212

o. Color resistance to light (DIN 51094) – No change

regarding brightness and color of samples

p. Fire proof (Decision 96/603 CE) - Class A1

E. If with Hydrotect technology, the tiles must have the

following capabilities:

1. Air purification mechanism;

2. Self-cleaning photo catalyst layer also with activated

oxygen;

3. Antibacterial, anti-mold, anti-dirt and anti-odor.

F. Anti-slip resistance:

1. Anti-slip resistance rating is required according to the

non-slip level in particular conditions, such as:

a. R9 suitable for dry conditions;

b. R10 suitable for wet conditions;

c. R11 suitable for internal and external commercial

pedestrian areas that are specifically designed for

wet bare foot conditions;

d. R12 suitable for ramp conditions;

e. R13 is the resistance recommended for public wet

areas such as showers and changing rooms.

2. At locations indicated, provide tile manufacturer's

abrasive grit surfaced tile for slip-resistant finish.

G. Colors, Textures, and Patterns:

1. Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated

for tile, grout and other products requiring selection of

colors, surface textures, patterns, and other

appearance characteristics, provide specific products

or materials complying with the following requirements:



213

a. Match color, texture, and pattern indicated by

reference to manufacturer's standard designations

for these characteristics.

2. Shall be in accordance with each selected product by

the Architect (please refer to the Architecture project

“Drawings materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and

Drawings, and the table below for complementary

information)

H. Factory Blending:

For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected

during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package

accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show

the same range in colors as those taken from other

packages and match approved samples.

I. Trim and Special Shapes:

1. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and

finish of adjoining flat tile.

2. Rounded external corners, and trim shapes at head,

jamb, and sills of opening, of same material and finish

as tile, and as follows:

a. Base: At tiled walls, integral cove base;, field tile

and surface bullnose to form a base of height

indicated.

b. External Corners: Surface bullnose shapes.

c. Internal Corners: Field butted square, except use

square corner- combination angle and stretcher

type cap.

3. At locations indicated, provide tile manufacturer's

abrasive grit surfaced tile for slip-resistant finish.

2.04 WATERPROOFING

Please refer to the Architecture project “Technical

Specifications”, section General Requirements, Part 3 -

Waterproofing, for detailed Information. The installer shall



214

certify the compatibility of all wet trades with the tiles, together

with the manufacturer, prior to its installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of installed tile.

Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and

free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.

Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames,

electrical and mechanical units of Work, and similar items

located in or behind tile has been completed before installing

tile.

Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions


Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges

selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been

blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units

taken from one package show the same range in colors as

those taken from other packages and match approved

samples. If not factory blended, either returns to manufacturer

or blend tiles at the Project Site before installing.

3.02 INSTALLATION




All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s


Before starting the installation operations of any surface, we

recommend you make sure that the stoneware batch is

adequate and sufficient in terms of quantity, tone and

calibration. If in case of large environments joints must be

positioned at regular intervals, in small environments a small

gap between the tiles and perimeter walls is sufficient: the



215

skirting board will cover the gap and provide the finishing

effect. Avoid walking on the floor for at least 2/3 days after the

installation. If walking on the floor is necessary, lay wooden

planks on the surface. Please notice that if the tiles are

installed with the traditional procedure and no additives are

added to the mortar, at least one month has to elapse before

the floor can be subjected to stress and operating loads.

Extend tile Work into recesses and under or behind equipment

and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions

except as otherwise shown. Terminate Work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or

joint alignments.

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and

drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind

cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping,

fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or

covers overlap tile.

Carefully lay out tile in an endeavor to center the tiles to space

them evenly, and to avoid cutting them. If cutting is necessary,

cutting shall be done by saw cut or drilling only, no tile cutters

or snipped edges allowed; all cut ends shall be rubbed smooth

and even. Unless otherwise shown, lay out tile so that no tile

less than 1/2 size occurs. For height stated in feet and inches,

maintain full courses to produce nearest attainable heights

without cutting tile. Align joints in wall tile vertically and

horizontally. No staggering of joints will be permitted. All

cutting and drilling shall be done without marring surfaces and

shall be done neatly to fit closely around pipes, fixtures, and

fittings so that cover plates will overlap cuts.

Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints

when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same

size. Lay out tile Work and center tile fields in both directions

in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile

cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.

Confirm locations of joints in substrate will align with planned

expansion joints in tile Work. Adjust layout of tile if necessary

to align expansion joints with substrate conditions.

Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant

filled joints, including control, Contraction, and isolation joints,



216

where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar

beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.

Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete

substrates.

3.03 GROUT

Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following

installation standards:

Wall Joints (less than 1/8 inches wide): Unsanded Grout.

Floor and Wall Joints (1/8 inch to 5/8 inch wide): Sanded Grout.

Floor Joints in Showers, and all Quarry Tile Joints (1/16 inch to

3/8 inch wide): Epoxy Grout.

3.04 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

At all floor tile installations, provide expansion joints at

perimeter of area to be tiled, at all penetrations in tile Work,

and 12 feet 0 inches on center both ways as recommended in

the TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" unless closer

spacing is indicated or required by Project conditions. Install

removable strips of the same depth as the finished tile system

including setting bed. Remove strips after grouting and curing

operations.

Install joints in accordance with TCA Method EJ711.


Initial Cleaning:

It is normally performed once before using the floor and it is

obligatorily after the installation. Its purpose is to eliminate any

trace of lime, cement or resin residues contained in the grouts

used for the joints. During this phase all the typologies

products must be washed using a solution of hydrochloric acid

(2/3 water, 1/3 acid). To prevent the acid-based product used

for the initial cleaning from corroding the cement-based joint

filler, we recommend you wet the floor prior to cleaning so that

the joints are impregnated and thus protected from the

corrosive action of the acid. If the initial cleaning is carried out



217

after the floor has been used, before applying the acid product

it is advisable to first remove any greasy or similar substances

using suitable cleaning products. After cleaning, the floor must

be rinsed thoroughly and the residual water collected.

Routine Cleaning:

For everyday cleaning, simply wash the floor with water and

normal cleaning products suitable for ceramic surfaces.

Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when

permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions,

but no sooner than fourteen (14) calendar days after

installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous

plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface

with clean water before and after cleaning.

When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective

material to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile

Work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during

construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least

seven (7) calendar days after grouting is completed.

Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse

neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END OF SECTION - STONEWARE TILING



218

3.1.14 METALIC CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.







edition date.






A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer

who has successfully completed false ceilings similar in

material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide false ceilings that

are identical to those tested for the following fire

performance characteristics. Identify false ceiling

components with appropriate markings of applicable testing

and inspecting organization.

1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to

design for types of assemblies in which false ceilings

function as a fire protective membrane.

a. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply

with requirements indicated for rated assembly.

C. Single Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each

type of metallic ceiling unit from a single source with



219

resources to provide products of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties without delaying


D. Single Source Responsibility for Suspension System:

Obtain each type of suspension system from a single

source with resources to provide products of consistent

quality in appearance and physical properties without

delaying progress of the Work.

E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of

metallic ceiling units and suspension system components

with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is

supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire suppression system components (if any),

and partition system (if any).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings:

1. Reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and

coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounted items.

Show the following:

a. Ceiling mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets

and inlets; speakers; sprinkler heads; and special

moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other

junctures with adjoining construction.

B. Samples:

1. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of

manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual metallic

units or sections of units showing full range of colors,

textures, and patterns available for each type of unit

indicated.

2. Samples for verification purposes of each type of

exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size

indicated below and of same thickness and material

indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve

normal color and texture variations, include sample

sets showing full range of variations expected.



220

C. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's product data and

installation/maintenance instructions for all

manufactured products and materials.


1. Provide record approved samples, product data, and

coordination drawings.


A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to Project Site in original,

unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed

space where they will be protected against damage from

moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other

causes.


A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials

described below that match products installed, are

packaged with protective covering for storage, and are

identified with appropriate labels.

1. Metallic Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units

equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

2. Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of

each component equal to 2.0 percent of amount

installed.


A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior metallic ceilings

until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet Work in

space is completed and nominally dry, Work above ceilings

is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and

humidity will be continuously maintained at values near

those indicated for final occupancy.



221

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




2.02 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide

manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types,

structural classifications, and finishes indicated.

B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard

factory applied finish for type of system indicated.

C. Attachment Devices:

1. Cast-In-Place and Post-installed Anchors in Concrete:

Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from

corrosion resistant materials, with holes or loops for

attachment of hangers of type indicated and with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5

times that imposed by ceiling construction.

a. Chemical anchors.

b. Expansion anchors.

c. Undercut anchors.

D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust

inhibitive paint.

E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust

inhibitive paint.

F. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of

types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated,

manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and

penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension

system indicated. Provide trim with hemmed edges.

1. For lay in panels with reveal edge details, provide

stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth



222

and width as that formed between edge of panel and

flange at exposed suspension member.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge

moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit

penetration exactly.

3. For narrow faced suspension systems, provide

suspension system manufacturer's standard edge

moldings that match width and configuration of

exposed runners.

2.03 METALLIC UNIT MATERIALS

A. Refer to Finish Schedule on Drawings for type of acoustic

units to be provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling

system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements specified in this and other

sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling

system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and

other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other

sections.

3.02 INSTALLATION






C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members

and as follows:



223

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with

insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are

not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension

system.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within

ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interfere

with the location of hangers at spacing required to

support standard suspension system members, install

supplemental suspension members and hangers in

form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size

supplemental suspension members and hangers to

support ceiling loads within performance limits

established by referenced standards.

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire tying, either

directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other

devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate,

and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate

or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated

temperatures.

4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to

structure, including intermediate framing members, by

attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that

are secure and appropriate for structure to which

hangers are attached as well as for type of hanger

involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to

deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated

temperatures.

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal

forms; furnish cast in place hanger inserts that extend

through forms.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are squared and

securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace

dented, bent, or kinked members.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of metallic panel ceilings, including

trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning



224

and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace

ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and

repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION - METALIC CEILINGS

3.1.15 STONE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.




1.02 DESCRIPTION

The requirements for stone flooring, set in mortar on a rigid

base are covered in this section.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Section includes

1. The following interior dimension stone hand set with

anchors with cavity:

a. Floors.

B. See drawings for the paving/surface pattern.

1.04 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES

A. Floor surface true to plane within 1 in 1000 (1/8-inch in 10

feet) not cumulative.

B. Joint width deviation not greater than 10 percent of

dimension shown.



225

1.05 SUBMITTAL

A. Shop drawings, product data and samples.

B. Samples: Five individual samples of stone showing extreme

variations in color and texture.

C. Shop Drawings: Special stone shapes.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials in original sealed containers

marked with name of manufacturer and identification of

contents.

B. Store masonry materials under waterproof covers on

planking clear of ground, and protect from handling damage,

dirt stain, water and wind.

1.07 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this

specification to the extent referenced. The publications are

referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C144-04 .................. Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

C150-09 .................. Portland Cement

C241-09 .................. Abrasion Resistance of Stone

Subjected to Foot Traffic

C270-10 .................. Mortar for Unit Masonry



226

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




B. Varieties and Source: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide stone of the variety-listed below.

C. Products shall be in accordance with each selected product

by the Architect (please refer to the Architecture project

“Drawings materials list”, “Finishes Schedule” and Drawings,

and the table below for complementary information)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stone Slabs: With abrasion resistance of at least 25 as

measured by ASTM C241. Stone slabs to be uniform in

quality and texture, free from shale, excess mica, seams,

sealing and disintegration.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150.

C. Coloring Pigments: Pure mineral pigments, lime proof and

non-fading; added to grout / mortar by the manufacturer.

Job colored grout / mortar is not acceptable.

2.03 MORTAR

ASTM C270, Type S. No admixtures permitted. Type N lime is

not permitted.

2.04 GROUT FOR STONE JOINTS

A. One part Portland cement and three parts sand by volume.

Mix with enough water for flow ability.

B. 2mm width.

2.05 STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, non-staining

to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.



227

B. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or neoprene, non-

staining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point

loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors

without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.

C. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone

types, finishes, and applications indicated, as

recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning

compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or

abrasives.

D. Stone Impregnation (water and dirt repellent): Silicone basis

impregnation sealer (based on modified oligomere

alkylalkoxysiloxanes).

1. Suitable for internal/external surfaces;

2. Suitable for natural and cast stone (polish ground or

rough surfaces of marble, limestone, granite, gneiss,

porphyr, cotto, terrazzo, unglazed ceramic tiles, etc.),

bricks, sand lime bricks, concrete and mineral-based

plaster.

3. Applications:

a. For internal use: saturate the 5 sides (front + 4

sides);

b. For external use: saturate the 6 sides (front + 4

sides + back).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICABLE

A. General: Do not use stone slabs with chips, cracks,

discoloration or other visible defects.

B. Installation with Portland Cement Grout:

1. Spread and screed mortar setting bed mixture 13 mm

to 25 mm (1/2-inch to 1-inch) in thickness true to plane.



228

2. Limit setting bed to minimum amount which can be

covered with stone before initial set.

3. Apply 1 mm (1/32-inch) layer of neat cement paste over

setting bed. Set and level each stone immediately.

Tamp stone to completely contact setting bed.

4. Grout joints as soon as initial set is achieved. Place

grout in joints, strike flush and tool slightly concave.

5. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for

seven days.

C. Installation with Portland Cement Mortar:

1. Install in full bed joint. Remove excess mortar. Strike

joints flush with top surface of stone and tool slightly

concave.

2. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for

seven days.

END OF SECTION - STONE FLOORING

3.1.16 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



“General Requirements” Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Technical


Section is directly applicable to them.






229






Installer Qualifications: Engage Installer that is certified by

floor covering manufacturer as competent in the technique for

heat welding seams.

Single Source Responsibility for Resilient Sheet Flooring:

Obtain each type, color, and pattern of floor covering from a

single source with resources to provide products of consistent

quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying


Standard of Quality Sample: After approval of submittals and

prior to proceeding with the Work of this Section, at a location

determined by Owner, lay resilient sheet flooring of not less

than an entire room. Demonstrate cutting and trimming

techniques around obstructions. The Work will be reviewed by

Owner and Architect and, upon approval, will become the

standard upon which the quality of materials and workmanship

will be judged.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

Samples:

1. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of

manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual

sections of resilient sheet floor coverings showing full

range of colors and patterns available for each different

product indicated.

2. Samples for verification purposes in form of 6 inch by 9

inch sections of each different color and pattern of

resilient sheet floor covering product specified, showing

full range of variations expected in these characteristics.

Product Data:



230

1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts and descriptive

information on each product used. Include information

on installation materials substantiating that they are

recommended for use by the resilient sheet flooring

manufacturer.

2. Submit manufacturer’s installation and maintenance

instructions for all manufactured products and materials.

Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawings showing location of seams and edge

strips. Indicate location of columns, doorways,

enclosing partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations

where cutouts are required in flooring.

Record Documents:

1. Provide record approved samples, product data, and

shop drawings.


Deliver resilient sheet floor coverings and installation

accessories to the Project Site in original manufacturer's

unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of

product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping

and handling instructions.

Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the

weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 10

degrees C and 32 degrees C.

Move resilient sheet floor coverings and installation

accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48

hours in advance of installation.


Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials

matching products installed as described below, packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels

clearly describing contents.



231


Maintain a minimum temperature of 21 degrees C in spaces to

receive resilient sheet floor coverings for at least 48 hours

prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48

hours after installation. After this period, maintain a

temperature of not less than 13 degrees C.

Do not install resilient sheet floor coverings until they are at the

same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

Close spaces to traffic while installing resilient sheet floor

covering.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

Install resilient sheet floor coverings and accessories as late in

the construction schedule as practical, and after other finishing

operations, including painting, have been completed.

Do not install resilient sheet floor coverings over concrete

slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to

bond with adhesive as determined by floor covering

manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




2.02 MANUFACTURERS


manufacturer and model/design required for the Project.

Provide the products listed unless Architect approves products

of other manufacturer specifically for this Project.

2.03 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by

flooring manufacturer.



232

Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex

modified, Portland cement based formulation provided or

approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications

indicated.

Adhesives (Cements): Water resistant, stabilized type as

recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient sheet floor

covering products and substrate conditions indicated.

Seam Sealer: Formulation provided or approved by floor

covering manufacturer for products indicated.

Rod for Heat Welding Seams: Product of floor covering

manufacturer in color complying with the following requirement.

1. Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply the

following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds,

sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose

presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive.

Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by

performing bond and moisture tests recommended by

floor covering manufacturer.

2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale,

and foreign deposits of any kind.

Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to

prepare substrates indicated to receive resilient sheet floor

coverings.

Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per floor

covering manufacturer's direction to fill cracks, holes, and

depressions in substrates.

Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

sheet floor coverings immediately before installation.

Following cleaning, examine substrates to determine if there is



233

visually any evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation,

or dust.

Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring

manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply according

to manufacturer's directions.

3.02 INSTALLATION




All materials and installation methods shall be in accordance

with manufacturer’s published recommendations. Where

installation methods and, or materials are at variance with

manufacturer’s recommendations, Contractor shall bear full

responsibility for any resulting deficiencies.

Installation of resilient sheet flooring shall be accomplished as

late in the construction schedule as is practical.

Comply with resilient sheet floor covering manufacturer's

installation instructions and other requirements indicated that

are applicable to each type of floor covering installation

included in Project.

Lay out resilient sheet floor coverings in conformance with the

approved seaming diagram and to comply with the following

requirements:

1. Maintain uniformity of resilient sheet floor covering

direction.

2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place

them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no

case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in

flooring substrates.

3. Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color

shading and pattern at seams.

4 Avoid cross seams.

Scribe, cut, and fit resilient sheet floor coverings to butt tightly

to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built in furniture,



234

including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and

nosings.

Extend resilient sheet floor coverings into toe spaces, door

reveals, closets, and similar openings.

Adhere resilient sheet floor coverings to flooring substrates by

method approved by floor covering manufacturer.

1. Produce completed installation without open cracks,

voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of

adhesive spreader marks, or other surface

imperfections.

2. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions

including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing,

and adhesive open and working times.

Heat weld seams in resilient sheet floor coverings where this

seaming method is indicated. Prepare, weld, and finish seams

to produce a surface flush with adjoining sheets.

Hand roll resilient sheet floor coverings in both directions from

center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminate

trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where

access by roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in

place with flat bladed instrument.


Perform the following operations immediately after installing

resilient sheet floor coverings:

1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes

using cleaner recommended by floor covering

manufacturers.

2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.

3. Do not wash floor until after period recommended by

floor covering manufacturer.

4. Damp mop floor to remove black marks and soil.



235

5. Apply protective floor polish to resilient sheet floor

covering surfaces that are free from soil, visible

adhesive and surface blemishes.

a. Use commercially available cross linked acrylic product

acceptable to floor covering manufacturer.

b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's

maintenance service.

Where application of a surface sealer is recommended by the

flooring manufacturer, provide sealer materials, and number of

coats, as recommended or approved by the flooring

manufacturer and apply following printed instructions.

Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other

damage from construction operations and placement of

equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing

by floor covering manufacturer.

1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over

sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard

panels over floor coverings and under objects while

they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels

without moving panels.

Clean resilient sheet flooring not more than two (2) days prior

to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date

of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean floor

coverings by method recommended by manufacturer.

1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after

completing installation, prior to cleaning.

2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning and buff/burnish to a

level acceptable to Owner.

END OF SECTION - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING



236

3.1.17 CARPET

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.







edition date.






A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet

identical to that tested for the following fire performance

characteristics, per test method indicated below, by testing

and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings

of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

B. Factory Runs: Provide Carpet from one factory run and one

dye lot with colors and shades guaranteed to be uniform

throughout the entire area run for type of carpet specified.

C. Vermin and Dampproofness: Provide moth and vermin

proof carpet, compatible with installation over concrete slab

on grade floors.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:



237

1. Layout and seaming diagrams:

a. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types

of edge strips.

b. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions,

built in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are

required in carpet.

c. Show installation details at special conditions.

B. Samples:

1. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's

standard size, showing full range of color, texture, and

pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from

same material to be used for the Work. Submit the

following:

a. 30 cm square samples of each type of carpet

material required.

b. Two (2) full-size samples of each carpet tile

required.

c. 30 cm long samples of each type exposed edge

stripping and accessory item.


A. Deliver materials to Project Site in original factory

wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of

manufacturer, brand name, and lot number.

B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and

containers, inside well ventilated area protected from

weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and

humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum

temperature of 20 degrees C at least three days prior to and

during installation in area where materials are stored.


A. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as

described below, packaged with protective covering for



238

storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Deliver extra materials to Owner's storage location.

1. Broadloom Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish

quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5

percent of amount installed.

2. Carpet Tile: Before installation begins, furnish quantity

of full size tiles for each type of material equal to 10

percent of amount installed.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Carpet Warranty: Submit a written warranty

executed by carpet manufacturer and Installer agreeing to

repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements or

that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified

warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:

1. Wear: Carpet materials shall evidence no more than 10

percent loss of face fiber.

2. Edge Raveling: Carpet material shall exhibit no edge

ravel, snags, and runs under normal use.

3. Delamination: Carpet materials shall not delaminate

from primary or secondary backing.

4. Shrinkage: Carpet materials shall show no shrinkage.

B. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




B. The notes and schedules on the Drawings establish

manufacturer and model/design required for the Project.



239

Provide the products listed unless Architect approves

products of other manufacturer specifically for this Project.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. To establish standards of manufacture, operation,

performance, and appearance, drawings and specifications

are based on the specific manufacturer's products and

color/patterns shown on the Drawings. If accepted in

advance by the Architect, and provided compliance with

requirements, products of other manufacturers may also be

acceptable:

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded aluminum carpet edge, mill

finish aluminum.

B. Seaming Cement: Hot melt adhesive tape or similar product

recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and

butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to

prevent pile loss at seams.

C. Carpet Adhesive: Non-solvent based, water resistant, and

non-staining as recommended by carpet and carpet tile

manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for

installed carpet and compatible with substrate.

D. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds:

Latex modified, Portland cement based formulation

provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for

applications indicated.



240

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits

from concrete surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to

prevent dusting.

B. Patch holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish

chemically stripped, reseal concrete. Seal powdery or

porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet

manufacturer.

C. Patch holes and cracks. Sand to level. Remove wax. Seal

surface with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Replace missing pieces of existing resilient flooring or patch

to level. Cut out peaked sheet goods seams and fill with

latex underlayment.

E. Remove chemical finish on terrazzo; patch grout lines and

cracks to level with latex underlayment.

INSTALLATION




END OF SECTION - CARPET



241

4.1 Specification

4.1.1 Design Load for the Northern Extension

Superimposed dead load:

Finishes Loading

(kPa)

Ceiling & Services Loading

(kPa)

Partition

(kPa)

Ground Floor

Mezzanine Level

1st Floor

2nd

Floor

3rd

Floor

Roof Level

2.5

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

3.0

-

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

2.8

-

2.2

2.3

1.7

-

Imposed load:

Loading (kPa)

Corridors, Staircases and landing 5.0

Toilets

G/F, 1/F, 2/F

3/F

5.0

3.0

Arrival and Departure Lobby, Retail, Public area (G/F,1/F,2/F)

5.0

Offices (3/F) 3.0

Accessible Roof 2.0

Plantroom 7.5

MVAC plantroom and fuel tank 10.0

Emergency generator room and 15.0

4 Specifications and Standards for Structure Works



242

switchroom

Water tank (2m deep) 20.0

The Contractor shall ensure any of the above loading provisions will not

be exceeded; otherwise provide a full structural assessment, at the

Contractor’s expense, to justify not any part of the building is

overloaded.

4.1.2 Design Code

The local Macau standards shall be followed and supplemented by

Eurocode 2 and International Building Code.

(i) 56/96/M: 屋宇結構及橋樑結構之安全及荷載規章

(ii) 42/97/M: 混凝土標準

(iii) 24/95/M: 防火安全規章

(iv) 47/96/M: 地工技術規章

(v) 60/96/M: 鋼筋混凝土及預應力混凝土結構規章

(vi) 64/96/M: 鋼筋混凝土用熱軋筋標準

(vii) 63/96/M: 水泥標準

(viii) GB50011-2001:

中華人民共和國國家標準 –

建築抗震設計規範基礎設計指引

(ix) 29/2001/M 建築鋼結構規章

In addition, the following British Standards should be referenced:

- BS12: Specification of Portland Cement

- BS812: Testing aggregates



243

- BS882: Specification for aggregates from natural source for

concrete

- BS1881 Testing concrete

- BS4466: Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending

and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete.

- BS4483: Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of

concrete

- BS8007: Code of Practice for design of concrete structures for

retaining aqueous liquid

- BS 4: Structural steel sections. Part 1: Specification for hot

rolled sections.

- BS 427: Method for Vickers hardness test. Part 1: Testing of

metals.

- BS 729: Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles.

- BS 1449: Steel plate, sheet and strip. Part 1: Specification for

carbon and carbon manganese plate, sheet and strip.

- BS 1706: Electroplated coatings of cadmium and zinc on iron

and steel.

- BS 2989: Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated and

iron zinc alloy coated steel: wide strip, sheet/plate and slit wide

strip.

- BS 3692: ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.

- BS 4320: Metal washers for general engineering purposes.

- BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels.

- BS 4464: Spring washers for general engineering and

automobile proposes (metric series).

- BS 4570: Fusion Welding of Steel Castings.

- BS 4604:The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural

steelwork, metric series.

Part 1: General grade.

Part 2: Higher grade (parallel shank)

Part 3: Higher grade (waisted shank)

- BS 4848: Hot-rolled structural steel sections.

Part 2: Hollow sections.



244

Part 4: Equal and unequal angles.

- Approval testing of welder when welding procedures approval

is not required.

- BS 4872: Part 1: Fusion welding of steel.

- BS 4921: Sherardized coatings on iron and steel articles.

- BS 5289: Code of practice for visual inspection of fusion

welded joints.

- BS 5400: Steel, Concrete and Composite Bridges; all parts.

- BS 5950: Structural use of steelwork in building.

Part 1: Code of practice for design in simple and continuous

construction; hot rolled sections.

Part 2: Specification for materials, fabrication and erection; hot

rolled sections.

- BS 5996: Methods for ultrasonic testing and specifying quality

grades of ferritic steel plate.

- BS 6072: Method for magnetic particle flaw detection.

- BS 6780: Specification for through-thickness reduction of area

of steel plates and wide flats.

- BS EN 287-1: Qualification test of welders - Fusion welding

Part 1: Steels.

- BS EN 288-1: Specification and Approval of Welding

Procedures for Metallic Materials Part 1: General Rules for

Fusion Welding.

- BS EN 499: Welding Consumables-Covered Electrodes for

Manual Metal Arc Welding of Non Alloy and Fine Grain Steels -

Classification.

- BS EN 571-1: Penetrant Flaw Detection.

- BS EN 1011-1: Welding - Recommendations for welding of

metallic materials Part 1: General guidance for arc welding.

- BS EN 1011-2: Welding - Recommendations for Welding of

Metallic Materials -Part 2: Arc Welding of Ferritic Steels.

- BS EN 1714: Non-destructive testing of welds - Ultrasonic

testing of welded joints

- CORR 10286.



245

- BS EN 14399: Specifications on High-Strength Structural

Boltings.

- Eurocode 3 Design of steel structures

- Eurocode 4 Design of composite steel and concrete structures

- National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS)

4.2 Particular Technical Requirements

The completed structure’s deflection and other structural movements

shall comply with the requirements of the designated codes of practices

and the standards referenced therein.

4.2.1 Construction Materials: Cement

All cement shall be fresh Ordinary Portland cement shall comply with

BS12 Part 2 1991. Other types of cement shall not be permitted without

the written acceptance of the Engineer. The cement shall be produced

by a manufacturer of good repute and subject to the endorsement of

CAM Project Manager. All cement to be used on the works shall be

supplied from the same source unless alternate sources are endorsed

by CAM Project Manager.

The Contractor shall obtain a manufacturer’s certificate of test in

accordance with the appropriate standards for each consignment of

cement delivered to the site for use in the work. CAM Project Manager

may require that any cement, delivered to the site for use in the works

to be sampled and tested in accordance with BS4550. Any batch of

cement so tested which fails to comply with this specification will be

rejected.

4.2.2 Construction Materials: Aggregates

Aggregates for concrete shall be from natural sources and shall comply

with BS882 unless otherwise specified. In additional, the flakiness index

when determined by the sieve method described in BS882 shall not

exceed 35 for any sizes of aggregates. Aggregates finer than zone 4 of

BS882 shall not be used. All aggregates shall be hard, durable, free

from coatings of deleterious matter and shall be non porous. The

grading of fine and coarse aggregates shall be to BS882:1992 and such

as to produce a dense concrete of suitable workability with proportions

of cement and water to be used.



246

The CAM Project Manager may require that any aggregate to be test

for sulphate soundness in accordance with the latest edition of ASTM

Test C289 before giving endorsement to any proposed source of supply.

Notwithstanding any certificate of compliance or any prior endorsement

given by the CAM Project Manager may, at any time, require that any

aggregate deliver to the site, or else for use in the works, to be sampled

and tested before it may be used. Any aggregate so tested which fails

to comply with this specification may be rejected.

4.2.3 Construction Materials: Concrete

Structural concrete is specified in accordance with Macau Standard

60/96/M.

All concrete grade with prefix B denote designed mix. The reactive

alkali of concrete expressed as the equivalent sodium oxide per cubic

metre of concrete shall not exceed 3 kg. The concrete testing is to be

undertaken in accordance with the requirements of the Macau

Standards. The testing to be carried out include but not limited to

compressive strength, flexural strength and early age compressive

strength testing at 7 and 14 days.

The Contractor shall at his own expense provide all labour and

materials including transportation to the testing laboratory, required to

conduct concrete cube tests.

Concrete test cubes shall be made in 150mm cube steel moulds, filled

in three 50mm layers, each layer being thoroughly compacted with a

steel bar 380mm long having ramming surface of 25mm square and

weighing 1.8kg for at least 35 strokes.

The cubes shall be suitably identified and recorded at the time of mould

mix of concrete and location in the works from which the concrete has

been taken for the cubes. A tank shall be provided by the Contractor for

the purpose of curing test cubes to the satisfaction of the CAM Project

Manager.

Should the test cubes fail to achieve the minimum resistance to

crushing required for the concrete designed mix, the CAM Project

Manager may instruct the Contractors to carry out in-situ test at his own

expenses to the CAM Project Manager’s satisfaction and/or reject the

placed concrete. The Contractor shall also at his own expenses



247

increase the proportion of cement in future mixes until such tests satisfy

the concrete designed mix requirements.

Designed mixes, whose proportions shall be calculated by the

Contractor shall conform to the table below and the requirements set

out in Macau Standard 60/96/M.

Min. Works Cube

Strength at 28 days (N/mm

2)

Max Size of Aggregate

(mm)

Min Cement Content (Kg/m

3)

Max. Water

Cement Ratio

Max. Cement Content (kg/m3)

45 (B45) 20 375 0.44 530

40 (B40) 20 350 0.44 530

40 (B40) 10 400 0.44 530

35 (B35) 20 330 0.45 530

30 (B30) 20 300 0.46 530

30 (B30) 10 300 0.46 530

4.2.4 Construction Material: Reinforcement

All steel reinforcement including wire mesh to be tensile steel with fsyk

=460MPa in accordance with Macau standard 60/96/M or equivalent

and shall be cut, bent and scheduled in conformity with BS4446. The

Contractor must satisfy himself that the schedules are correct before

ordering, cutting and bending the reinforcement.

The Contractor is required to submit certificates of origin, test and mill

reports, chemical composition data and provide test lengths for testing

by a laboratory for each diameter and grade of steel from each supply

source to be delivered to the site.

Notwithstanding any manufacturer’s certificate, the CAM Project

Manager may require that any reinforcement delivered to the site be

sampled and tested. Should any test specimens fail to comply with this



248

Specification, the CAM Project Manager may require further test all at

the Contractor’s expense or reject the whole or part of this particular

consignment, which must be immediately removed from the site.

All reinforcement shall be stored at least 150mm clear of the ground or

floor, in clean conditions and in an orderly manner to the satisfaction of

the Engineer.

All reinforcement shall, at the time of concreting, be free from loose

scale, rust, oil or dirt or any other deleterious matter.

All reinforcement shall be fixed in the position shown on the drawings

by adequate use of spacers, tying wire, chairs, stools, etc. and shall be

so maintained during the concreting operation. Special attention shall

be given to all starter bars, which shall be rigidly supported by

temporary bracing near the free ends in such a way that they cannot

move when accidentally knocked or pulled.

4.2.5 Formwork and Method of construction

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, stability, supply,

fixing and alignment of all formwork and supports. Formwork shall be so

designed and constructed that concrete can be properly placed and

thoroughly compacted to the true shape, line and dimensions without

loss of cement grout or other harmful effect to the finished structure.

Formwork shall be adequately strutted, braced or tied, it shall be

capable of adjustment to the lines and dimensions of the finished

concrete and shall be sufficiently strong to withstand the pressure

resulting from placing the concrete, including the method of compaction

employed, without undue deflections or loss of alignment.

Any device for securing formwork shall not remain with the concrete. All

joints in the formwork shall be either horizontal or vertical.

The Contractor shall inform the CAM Project Manager before he

intends to remove any formwork. The time at which the formwork is

removed shall be the Contractor’s responsibility but the minimum period

before the completion of any concreting and the removal of forms shall

be as follows:

Vertical formwork to columns, walls 12 hours

Soffit formwork to slabs with props left in 4 days



249

Soffit formwork to beams with propos left in 7 days

Props to slabs 10 days

Props to beams 14 days

Props to cantilevers 28 days

The periods given above are based on the use of ordinary Portland

cement under average weather conditions. Should the Contractor

propose to reduce these striking times, he must satisfy the CAM Project

Manager that the strength of the concrete at such time and the

structural system is adequate to withstand the dead and imposed loads

applied to it. Before reducing the striking times, the CAM Project

Manager’s endorsement shall be obtained in writing.

4.2.6 Placing and Compacting of Concrete

No concrete shall be placed until the disposition of the steel

reinforcement, formwork etc. has been checked and endorsed by the

Engineer. The Contractor shall give adequate notice to the CAM Project

Manager on the day prior to concreting and when everything is ready

for concreting in order that the CAM Project Manager may conduct his

inspection.

The Contractor shall clean all areas where concrete is to be placed and

render free from standing water immediately before placing of the

concrete, except for concrete placed under water.

Concrete shall be placed in its final position as soon as possible after

mixing and in such a manner as to avoid segregation of the concrete

and displacement of the reinforcement or formwork. Placing shall be

continuous between construction joints.

All concrete shall be compacted unless otherwise specified. The

compaction shall be carried out by an experienced operator using

immersion type vibrators to the CAM Project Manager’s satisfaction.

Placing of concrete shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 600mm

deep and in sequence from one end of the form to the other.

Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of greater than 3 metres,

thrown or otherwise treated so that segregation, undesirable finish or

defective structural quality may result.



250

4.2.7 Sampling and Testing of Concrete

The costs for all concrete sampling and testing in accordance with

Norma de Betóes (Macau) are deemed to have been included in the

Contract. The Contractor shall comply with instructions issued by the

CAM Project Manager during the progress of the works with regard to

sampling and testing of the concrete. The Contractor shall be

responsible for the delivery of all test samples to an independent

laboratory and the name of the laboratory shall be submitted to the

CAM Project Manager for approval at the commencement of the

Contract.

Test cubes shall be clearly and indelibly marked for identification and

the Contractor shall furnish the laboratory with details of date of casting,

mix, workability of sample and identification of the part of the structure

represented by sample, which information shall be incorporated on the

test certificates issued by the laboratory. Keep records on site.

Slump tests shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense, in

accordance with B.S. 1881 or as directed by the Project Manager.

Non-destructive tests and/or coring tests on the site concrete shall be

carried out at contractor’s own cost if required by the Project Manager

and/or if the test cubes are found below standard.

Non-compliance of Standard of Acceptance

Should the test cubes not comply with the standard of acceptance as

specified in the Norma de Betóes (Macau) and this specification, the

Main Contractor shall undertake any one of the following steps or a

combination thereof at his own expense as the Project Manager

considers appropriate:

- Adjust the mix proportion and carry out further trial mixes until a

new proportion satisfying the requirements in the specification

is obtained and approved.

- Improve the standard of quality control before proceeding with

concreting works.

- Carry out, at the Contractor's expense, other tests as direct by

the Project Manager.

- Replace any site concrete condemned as a result of failing to

comply with the standards of acceptance specified and meet all

costs arising from such replacement. Submit for approval the



251

method statement for replacing the condemned concrete before

the replacement is carried out. In certain cases the Project

Manager may require the method statement to be prepared and

theremedial work to be supervised by a qualified Project

Manager.

During the progress of work, the Project Manager may order any other

tests in accordance with B.S.1881 or other relevant Standard where

practicable due to local conditions or other non-destructive tests such

as Schmidt hammer test. All such tests including the provision of

calibrated equipment shall be at the Contractor expense.

When Standard mix concrete is tested either in a plastic or hardened

condition by chemical analysis or other means for cement content it

shall be deemed not to comply with the specification if the cement

content is found to be below the specified figure after making due

allowance for the accuracy of the test method employed.

4.2.8 Construction Materials: Structural Steel

All structural steelwork design undertaken by the Contractor and/or his

Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall be designed strictly in accordance with

Macau Design Code 29/2001/M Regulation of Steel Structures;

Eurocode 3 Design of Steel Structures, Eurocode 4 Design Steel

Composite Structures and the latest version of British Standards (BS)

and European Norm (EN) where applicable, except where more

stringent requirements are specified herein, the Drawings, and/or

written instructions issued by CAM Project Manager.

All structural steel bars and plates, angles, channels and hot rolled

sections shall be grade S355JR to BS EN 10025-1:2004. All structural

members with plates/flange thickness greater than 35mm and less than

or equal to 50mm shall be Grade S355J0 to BS EN 10025-1:2004. All

structural members with plates/flange thickness greater than 50mm

shall be Class 1 Grade S355J2 to BS EN 10025-1:2004.

The grades of weldable steel used shall have the chemistry,

mechanical properties, ductility and notch toughness to provide the

least residual stress and maintain the integrity of the joints and

members with respect to strength and ductility.



252

The required structural steel strengths from BS EN 10025 Standard

Codes are as follows:

Thickness Minimum Yield

t < 40mm 355 N/mm2 40 < t < 100m 335 N/mm2

All steel shall be new and shall be well and cleanly rolled to the

dimensions, sections and weights specified. It shall be sound and free

from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects and shall be

finished in a workmanlike manner. Steel shall not be more heavily pitted

or rusted than Grade C of Swedish Standard 05 59 00.

All electrodes, welding rods and filler metals as follows:

Code Standard: To BS EN 1011-1 & 2 and BS EN 499 (Previously

named BS499), E51,Class B, C, R or RR for T=50mm or less, and

class B(H) for T greater than 50mm. Compatible in strength with the

parent material joined. Submerged arc and gas shielded welding shall

be as required by BS EN 499.

Bolts, screws and nuts shall comply with the British Standards and

strength grades stated in Table 2.01.1 unless other strength grades or

British Standards are stated in the Contract.

Washers for high strength friction grip bolts and nuts shall comply with

the following:

- High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and

washers for structural engineering:

(1) General grade: BS 4395: Part 1.

(2) Higher grade bolts and nuts and general grade washers: BS

4395:Part 2.

- Plain washers for other bolts, screws and nuts shall comply

with BS 4320; tapered washers for other bolts, screws and nuts

shall comply with BS 3410.

Internal bolt assembles, including cast-in holding down bolts, shall have

standard black finish. Exposed surfaces of bolts shall be clean and free

of corrosion when installed and be suitable for immediate prime painting.

For all exposed structural steelwork, bolt assemblies to be herardized in

accordance with BS 4921, Class 1



253

Welding consumables used in metal-arc welding of grades of steel

complying with BS EN 10025 shall comply with BS EN 1011. Welding

consumables used in the fusion welding of steel castings shall comply

with BS 4570. Welding consumables used in metal-arc welding of

austenitic stainless steels shall comply with BS EN 1011 Part 3.

Welding consumables and the procedures used shall be such that the

mechanical properties of the deposited weld metal shall not be less

than the respective minimum values of the parent metal being welded.

Welding consumables used with grades of steel other than those

complying with BS 10025 shall be such that the performance

requirements stated in BS 5400: Part 6, Table 1 or BS 5950: Part 2,

Table 1 as appropriate are achieved.

4.2.9 Fabrication of Steelwork

Fabrication of steelwork shall comply with BS EN 1011, BS 5400: Part 6,

Clauses 4.1 to 4.16 or BS 5950: Part 2, Sections 3 and 4 and with

relevant additional requirements specified in this Section.

Welding, heating and cutting:

- Welding shall be carried out by welders who possess a valid

welding certificate for the appropriate category of welding. A

welder shall cease to carry out welding if any of the

circumstances stated in BS 4570, Clause 21.1, BS EN 287-1 or

BS 4872: Part 1, Clause 6 as appropriate occurs.

- Presetting, prebending, skip welding, back-step techniques and

other measures shall be taken as necessary to counteract

shrinkage or distortion due to welding, gouging, thermal cutting

or heat treatment.

- Butt welds in each component part shall be completed before

the final assembly of built-up assemblies.

- Welding of austenitic stainless steel shall be carried out in

accord with BS EN 1011 Part 3

- Temporary welded attachments shall not be used unless

permitted by the Project Manager.

- Welding, heating or thermal cutting processes which give off

toxic or irritant gases shall not be used unless permitted by the

Project Manager; if permitted, precautions, including the

provision of exhaust ventilation, breathing apparatus and



254

display of warning signs, shall be taken to enable the work to

be carried out in safe conditions. Welding, heating or thermal

cutting shall not be carried out within 2 m shop coatings until

contents of shop coatings are verified as compatible with

welding or cutting procedures.

- Welding of structural steelwork shall be by an approved method.

The procedure to be followed, plant and equipment to be used

and the testing and inspection to be applied shall all be to the

satisfaction of the Project Manager and shall conform generally

with the requirements of BS EN 1011 and with the further

requirements contained in the Specification.

- All welding shall be carried out by fully trained and experienced

welders tested in accordance with BS EN 287 Part 1 or BS

4872 Part 1 appropriate to the type of welding they are to

perform.

- Size and length of welds shall not be less than those shown on

the Drawings nor shall they be substantially in excess of those

requirements without approval. The locations of welds shall not

change without approval by the Project Manager.

- All welds shall be finished full and made with the correct

number of runs, the welds being kept free from slag and other

inclusions.

- No joints or welds shall be made in any position except where

shown on drawings.

- Preheat and interpass temperatures and post-weld heat

treatment of welding sites shall be in accord with the

requirements of BS EN 1011.

Shop and site welding:

- Shop welding shall be carried out under specified welding

procedures and continuous supervision exercised.

- All welding shall, where possible, be carried out under cover in

the workshop.

- Site welding will only be permitted with the Project Manager’s

prior written approval.

Welding procedures:

- Develop welding procedures that in conjunction with overall

fabrication methods will produce members and structures

meeting quality requirements of these Specifications



255

- Obtain the Project Manager’s approval of welding procedures

before commencing work.

- Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to

the minimum practicable and local distortion is rendered

negligible in the final structure.

Assembly:

Structures shall be assembled in jigs that firmly and accurately locate

the individual members in their correct position. Prior to final welding,

members shall be tack welded in accord with BS EN 1011.

Electrodes for welding:

- Electrodes used for welding shall conform to BS EN 499 with

strength and toughness equal to the grade of steel (to BS EN

10025) to be welded, as recommended by the manufacturers.

- Electrodes that have areas of flux covering broken away or

damaged shall be discarded.

- Contractor shall ensure that electrodes are kept dry in order to

maintain the flux covering in good condition.

Fusion faces and preparation for welding:

- Fusion faces shall be free from irregularities and properly

prepared such that accuracy of the specified size of welds can

be maintained. Fusion faces and surrounding surfaces shall be

free from heavy scale and oil, paint or any substance that might

affect the quality of the weld.

- Butt welds shall be prepared by manual flame cutting and shall

be in accord with BS EN 1011, either single bevel or double

bevel full penetration butt welds with a maximum misalignment

of parts of 3mm. Use of a backing bar is optional. Flame cut

edges shall be substantially smooth and regular and shall be

left free of slag, faces shall be ground, filed or dressed to

remove irregularities and to maintain tolerances specified.

Defects in otherwise satisfactory flame cut edges shall be

limited to occasional notches and gouges not more than 5mm

deep. Correction of defects shall be to the approval of the

Project Manager.

- Thoroughly clean weld site of all slag and oxides between runs.

Fillet welds:



256

- Fillet welds shall be in accord with BS EN 1011.

- Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought into close contact and

the gap due to incorrect fit up shall not exceed 1.5mm.

- The minimum leg length of a fillet weld as deposited shall not

be less than the specified size, and the throat thickness as

deposited not less than 0.7 of the leg size where the fusion

faces are at right angles to each other.

Butt welds:

- The faces of butt welds shall be at all places proud of the

surfaces of parent metal. Where a flush surface is required, the

surplus metal may be dressed off by an approved method.

- Butt welds for thicknesses of more than 12mm shall be welded

from both sides.

- When welding from both sides the root of the initial weld shall

be gouged, chipped or otherwise removed to sound metal and

sealed with root passes before welding is started on that side.

- Butt welds made with the use of backing shall have the weld

metal thoroughly fused with it. The backing shall be fitted so

that a minimum space between it and the parts to be joined

exists. Splices in backing shall be made with full penetration

butt welds.

- Butt welds shall be terminated at the ends of a joint using

extension bars or runoff plates to ensure sound welds. Such

bars or plates shall be removed after welds have cooled.

- Ends of welds shall be ground smooth and flush with edges of

abutting parts.

Welded tubes:

- Tubular steelwork shall be continuously welded and interior of

all tubes shall be kept clean, dry and free from loose scale, etc.,

and shall be completely sealed, other than blow holes where

required for galvanizing.

- All welds shall be full penetration butt welds and, with the

exception of continuous tube-making processes, longitudinal

welds shall be made with extension plates at the starting and

finishing points of each seam.

Control of distortion and shrinkage stresses:



257

In assembling and joining parts of structure or of built-up members and

in welding reinforcing parts to members, procedure and sequence shall

be such as will minimize distortion and shrinkage.

Dimensional tolerances:

Dimensions of welded structural members shall be within the following

specified tolerances:

- Deviation from straightness of welded members where there is

no specified camber or sweep:

- 1mm x No. of metres of total length but not over 9mm.

- Deviation from straightness of welded members:

(1) +1mm x No. of metres of total length/3, or

(2) +6mm whichever is greater.

Weld profiles: Faces of fillet welds may be slightly convex, flat or slightly

concave. Except at outside corners, the convexity shall not exceed the

value 0.1S + 1mm where S is the actual size of the fillet weld in mm.

Quality of welds:

- Welds shall be uniform and of specified sizes. They shall fuse

thoroughly with the base metal and with successive layers of

weld metal, and shall be free from overlaps or abrupt edges or

grooves and from incomplete penetration, slag inclusions,

undercutting, burn troughs, voids, cracks, porosity and other

defects.

- Surfaces of welds shall be visually inspected and shall be

regular and uniform with a minimum amount of reinforcement

and reasonably free from overlap. All craters shall be filled to

the full cross-section of welds.

Corrections:

- A piece or member containing welding that is unsatisfactory or

that indicates inferior workmanship shall be rejected or

corrected by measures approved by the Project Manager.

- Defective or unsound welds or base metal shall be corrected by

removing and replacing the entire weld.

- Removal of weld metal or portions of the base metal may be

done by machining, grinding, chipping, oxygen gouging, or air

carbon-arc gouging and in such a manner that the remaining



258

weld metal or base metal is not nicked or undercut. Defective

portions of the weld shall be removed without substantial

removal of the base metal.

- Additional weld metal to compensate for deficiency in size shall

be deposited using an electrode smaller than that used for

making the original weld, and in any case not more than 4mm

in diameter. Thoroughly clean surfaces before welding.

- Improperly fitted parts shall be cut apart and rewelded as

directed.

Length of bolts: The length of HSFG bolts shall comply with BS 4604:

Part 1 or BS 4604: Part 2 as appropriate. The length of bolts complying

with BS 3692, BS 4190 and BS 4933 shall be such that the end of the

bolt will project above the nut by at least one thread, but by not more

than one nominal bolt diameter, after tightening.

Length of threads: The length of threads on bolts shall be determined in

accord with BS 3692, BS 4190, BS 4395: Part 1, BS 4395: Part 2 or BS

4933 as appropriate. If additional locknuts or other nuts are specified,

the thread length shall be increased by one nominal bolt diameter for

each additional nut.

Use of nuts: Nuts shall not be used with bolts or screws that comply

with a different standard.

Use of washers: Provide washers for HSFG bolts in accord with BS

4604: Part 1 or BS 4604: Part 2 as appropriate. Provide washers for

bolts complying with BS 3692, BS 4190 and BS 4933 under the nut or

bolt head, whichever is rotated during tightening, if parts to be

connected are to be coated with protective coatings before assembly.

Provide washers under nuts and heads of bolts in oversized and slotted

holes.

Tightening of bolts: Bolts shall be tightened in such a manner that the

contact surfaces of permanent bolted joints are drawn into close contact.

Defects in steelwork: Defective components for steelwork shall not be

used in the Permanent Works unless repair of the defects is permitted

by the Project Manager; if permitted, defective components shall be



259

repaired by methods having been reviewed without objection by the

Project Manager.

Review of fabricated steelwork by the Project Manager. Fabricated

steelwork shall not be:

- Covered with protective coatings, concrete or other materials.

- Erected, or

- Dispatched from the place of fabrication if fabricated off the site,

until the steelwork, including any repaired areas, complies with

specified test and inspection requirements and has been

reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

4.2.10 Erection of Steelwork

Temporary supports and fastenings to steelwork:

- Steelwork shall be secured in position by temporary supports

and fastenings until sufficient permanent connections are

complete to withstand loadings liable to be encountered during

erection. Temporary supports and fastenings shall be capable

of withstanding loadings that may be encountered during

erection and shall not damage the steelwork or the protective

coatings.

- Riveted and bolted connections shall be aligned using drifts

complying with BS 5400: Part 6, Paragraph 4.12 and shall be

temporarily fastened using service bolts.

Alignment of steelwork:

- Steelwork shall be erected in such a manner that the alignment

and levels of the steelwork comply with the erection tolerances

specified. Allowance shall be made for the effects of

temperature on the steelwork.

- Measures shall be taken to ensure that the steelwork will

remain stable before temporary supports and fastenings are

slackened or removed for lining, levelling, plumbing or other

purposes. The temporary supports and fastenings shall be

retightened or replaced as soon as the adjustments are

complete and at the end of each continuous period of working.

- Permanent connections shall be made as soon as a sufficient

portion of the steelwork has been lined, levelled and plumbed.

Temporary supports and fastenings shall be replaced by

permanent connections progressively and in such a manner

that the parts connected are securely restrained in the aligned

position at all times.



260

- Permanent connections for each portion of steelwork shall be

completed not more than 14 days after the portion has been

erected.

Supporting devices for steelwork: The material, size, position and cover

of packs, shims and other supporting devices for steelwork that are to

be embedded shall be as having been reviewed without objection by

the Project Manager

Erection:

- Adopt an erection procedure such that all members can be

placed and fixed in position without distortion.

- Contractor takes full responsibility for the safety and stability of

the steelwork during erection and until such time as it is finally

completed and handed over, must take all precautions

including temporary bracing necessary to ensure stability of the

partially assembled structure against wind forces, and those

stresses exerted due to erection equipment and its operation

tending to distort or deform the framework.

- Allow for the cost of temporary erection bracing required and

any professional advice required in connection with such

bracing.

- As each section of steel is erected, all members shall be lined,

levelled and plumbed before final bolting up commences. The

ties, jacks braces etc. used in lining, levelling and plumbing the

steelwork shall be left in position until all bolts have been finally

tightened.

- Mark every separate member with paint to show its mark,

position and direction. Such markings shall, where no finish

coat is subsequently applied, be in a position not visible after

completion of erection and cladding work.

4.2.11 Tolerances

Tolerances - fabrication of steelwork:

- Fabrication tolerances for steelwork shall comply with BS 5400:

Part 6, Paragraph 4.2 or BS 5950: Part 2, sub-section 7.2 as

appropriate.

- Steelwork shall be free from twists and localized deviations

from true line. The deviation from straightness of members

shall not exceed 1/1000 of the length of the member.



261

- When two or more such lengths are joined the deviation from

straightness shall not exceed 1/1000 of the completed length

unless otherwise agreed by the Project Manager.

Tolerances - erection of steelwork:

- Steelwork shall be erected to within the following tolerances

after lining, levelling, plumbing and making the permanent

connections.

- The position in plan of vertical components at the base shall be

within 10mm of the specified position along either principal

setting out axis.

- The level of the top of base plates and the level of the lower

end of vertical or raking components in a pocket base shall be

within 10mm of the specified level.

- The thickness of bedding shall be within 1/3 of the nominal

thickness or 10mm, whichever is less, of the specified nominal

thickness.

- The line of vertical or raking components other than in portal

frames shall be within 1 in 600 and within 10mm of the

specified line in every direction.

- The line of vertical or raking components in portal frames shall

be within 1 in 600 and within 10mm of the specified line in

every direction.

- The position and level of components connected with other

components shall be within 5mm of the specified position and

level relative to the other components at the point of connection.

- The position of components supported on a bearing shall be

within 5mm of the specified position relative to the bearing

along both principal axes of the bearing.

- The difference in level between adjacent sloping or horizontal

components connected by a deck slab shall be within 10mm of

the specified difference in level.

- Erect, fix, adjust and maintain all members in their intended

vertical and lateral alignment and level. Members that do not

meet the specified tolerances shall be liable to rejection. Where

no specific tolerances are specified herein, they shall comply

with applicable British Standards.

4.2.12 Touch Up

Shop coat: Touch up shop coating damaged during installation. Clean

(in accord with coating manufacturer's recommendations, but not less



262

than specified for shop preparation requirements) and coat spots or

abrasions where paint has been removed, damaged, or burned. Apply

specified primer over all such surfaces, including field bolts, washers,

and other areas not embedded in concrete to the minimum DFT

specified for shop coating. Finish as specified for shop painting.

Galvanizing and metal coat: Touch up field cuts, holes, abrasions,

welds (including welds at grounding conductor connections), with field-

applied zinc-rich cold galvanizing compound coating touch-up material

in accord with BS 5493 and manufacturer's instructions.

4.2.13 Submittals

Information required from Contractor:

Submit a method statement accompanied by drawings and calculations

checked and approved by Project Manager supplementing to this

Specification and fully describing the following:

- Fabrication and assembly procedures and sequences in

addition to those described in this Specification. Particular

attention shall be given to the means of ensuring accurate

fitting of members and the avoidance of excessive distortion

stresses in assembly.

- Lifting and control procedures.

- Quality control procedures

- Quality control and assurance especially for bolt connection

- Corrosion protection system.

Submit manufacturer's test certificates, analyses and mill sheets for all

structural steel to the Project Manager. Certificates shall state the

process of manufacture and shall include a test sheet signed by the

manufacturer giving the results of the mechanical tests applied to the

steel purchased and its chemical composition. Should the Project

Manager require structural steel to be tested, samples shall be tested at

an independent testing station for compliance with BS EN 10025.

Details of shop drawings:

- Prepare all necessary shop and erection detail drawings and

submit duplicate copies of the same to the Project Manager for

approval at least 21 days before approval is required.

- Contractor's workshop drawings shall give complete information

necessary for the fabrication of joints and component parts of



263

the structure, including the location, type size and extent of

bolts and welds. They shall clearly distinguish between:

o Plans and necessary details with setting out and

member marks.

o Different grades and qualities of steel.

o Grades of bolts.

o Types and positions of welds.

o Manual and automatic welding.

o Shop and site welds.

- Shop drawings shall show weld preparation, the welding

process, filler metal and all joints design and details.

- On all shop drawings, welding procedure sheets, etc., terms

and symbols relating to the welding shall be in accord with the

relevant British Standard.

- Methods of jointing other than those shown as typical on the

Drawings may be employed subject to the Project Manager’s

approval.

- Design and details of all joints and connections, butt and fillet

welds and the permissible working stresses to be used therein

shall comply with BS EN 1011 except as may be otherwise

specified or shown on the Contract Drawings.

- Single bolt connections will not be allowed.

- All shop details and erection drawings shall be approved in

writing by the Project Manager prior to fabrication. Contractor

shall be solely responsible for the correctness of his shop

details, notwithstanding approval by the Project Manager.

- The Project Manager’s approval shall not in any way relieve

Contractor of responsibility for any errors subsequently

discovered in the details.

Details of delivery of steelwork:

The following details of steelwork fabricated off the site shall be

submitted to the Project Manager:

- Expected and actual arrival dates.

- Name of carrier.

- Duplicate copies of bill of lading and packing list for steelwork

transported by sea.

- Duplicate copies of delivery note and a list showing the marking

and weight of each component for steelwork transported by

land.

- The details of expected arrival date and name of carrier shall

be submitted to the Project Manager at least 21 days before the



264

due date; other details shall be submitted to the Project

Manager within 3 days after delivery of the steelwork to the site.

Details of method of erecting steelwork:

- At least 6 weeks before erection of steelwork starts, the

Contractor shall submit for the Project Manager review, a fully

detailed method statement of his proposed method of erection

of steelwork including the following particulars :

o Sequence and method of erection of steelwork.

o Method of lifting and handling the components.

o Method of preventing damage to protective coatings on

steelwork during handling.

o Procedure for aligning, levelling and plumbing steelwork,

including temporary supports and method of making

beddings for column bases.

o Sequence of casting concrete bonded to the steelwork.

- During handling and erection the steelwork shall not be

distorted or damaged and the stress limits specified in the

Regulamento de Estruturas de Aco para Edifcious (建築鋼結構

規章) shall not be exceeded.

- The Contractor shall submit, as soon as possible, calculations

of setting out, temporary structures, and all erection loads and

stresses. The calculations shall be in sufficient detail to satisfy

the Project Manager as to the soundness of the erection

scheme.

- The contractor shall make all necessary revisions or corrections

to satisfaction of the Project Manager prior to his

commencement of the erection works.

- The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing scaffolding

and plant to ensure the safe erection of the structure.

- Any stanchions, beams, and steel trusses shall be carefully

erected, plumbed,set in alignment and levelled by approved

means and to the Project Manager's satisfaction prior to

grouting. Grouting shall be examined to ensure that it has been

properly and effectively carried out and any bases where the

grouting is considered to be unsatisfactory shall be brought to

the notice of the Project Manager. Nuts to holding-down bolt

assemblies are to be tightened down not less than 7 days after

grouting.

- It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the actual

position on site of holding down bolts, shear key pockets,

foundations, and other supporting members, before

commencing erection.



265

- Site connections shall be made with black bolts, except where

fitted bolts or site welding is required. All bolts in external

locations shall be galvanised unless the member is to be

encased in concrete. A minimum of two bolts shall be used in

any bolted connection. Drift pins or podgers shall not be used in

such a way as to enlarge holes or distort work. New holes or

enlargement of existing holes shall be made on Site by drilling

and not by burning.

- Quality assurance and quality plan for bolt and nuts shall be

submitted to Project Manager for approval 2 weeks before site

works commencement.

- The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the

structural steelwork during erection, and any temporary ties,

scaffolding, shoring or bracing necessary to ensure such safety

shall be of sufficient number and strength to withstand the

effects of gales and typhoons and any superimposed loads.

- All members joined by bolted connections shall be securely

bolted into position and not left loosely attached. Members

which have remained loose for purposes of alignment or

levelling shall be made secure before the end of the day's work.

- Steelwork shall be secured in position by temporary supports

and fastenings until sufficient permanent connections are

complete to withstand the loadings encountered during erection.

The temporary supports and fastenings shall be capable of

withstanding loadings which may be encountered during

erection and shall not damage the steelwork or the protective

coatings.

- Bolted connections shall be aligned using drifts complying with

BS 5400 : Part 6, Clause 4.12 and shall be temporarily

fastened using service bolts.

- Steelwork shall be erected in such a manner that the alignment

and levels of the steelwork comply with the specified tolerances,

allowances shall be made for the effects of temperature on the

steelwork.

- Measures shall be taken to ensure that the steelwork will

remain stable before temporary supports and fastenings are

slackened or removed for lining, levelling, plumbing or other

purposes. The temporary supports and fastenings shall be re-

tightened or replaced as soon as the adjustments are complete

and at the end of each continuous period of working.

- Permanent connections shall be made as soon as a sufficient

portion of the steelwork has been lined, levelled and plumbed.

Temporary supports and fastenings shall be replaced by

permanent connections progressively and in such a manner



266

that the parts connected and securely restrained in the aligned

position at all times.

- Permanent connections for each portion of steelwork shall be

completed not more than 14 days after the portion has been

erected.

- The whole of the work shall be accurately positioned to correct

level and alignment.

- The Contractor shall supply all necessary falsework and

staging, labour, tools, erection plant, drifts, service bolts, nuts

and washers and other materials necessary to carry out the

work and shall remove the same as the progress of the erection

permits.

Welder certificates:

- Certificates endorsed by an inspecting authority having been

reviewed without objection by the Project Manager shall be

submitted to the Project Manager to show that each welder has

been approved in accord with BS EN 287-1. The extent of

approval of the welder shall be appropriate to the categories of

welds that he will carry out.

- The welder certificates shall be submitted at least 4 weeks

before fabrication of the steelwork starts.

Details of welding procedures:

- The following details of the proposed welding procedures shall

be submitted to the Project Manager:

o Welding procedures in accord with BS EN 1011 Part 1,

Clause 20 for each type and size of weld.

o Documentation endorsed by an inspecting authority

approved by the Project Manager to show that the

welding procedure has complied with the procedure

trial requirements stated in the Contract in previous

tests, or that the welding procedure for steel castings

complies with the exemption criteria stated in BS 4570,

Clause 20.1.1.

- The welding procedures for permanent welds shall be

submitted to the Project Manager at the same time as welder

certificates are submitted. The welding procedures for

temporary welds shall be submitted to the Project Manager at

the same time as welder certificates are submitted.



267

Details of stud welding, flame cutting and shearing procedures:

The following details of the proposed stud welding, flame cutting and

shearing procedures for steelwork complying with BS EN 288 shall be

submitted to the Project Manager:

- Procedures for stud welding, flame cutting and shearing

processes complying with BS EN 288

- Documentation endorsed by an inspecting authority having

been reviewed without objection by the Project Manager to

show that the stud welding, flame cutting or shearing procedure

has complied with the procedure trial requirements stated in the

Contract in previous tests.

The details shall be submitted to the Project Manager at least 6 weeks

before fabrication of the steelwork starts.

Details of method of non-destructive testing: Details of the proposed

method for carrying out non-destructive testing on welds shall be

submitted to the Project Manager at least 4 weeks before the tests start.

Details of inspecting authority and testing consultant:

- The name of the proposed inspecting authority endorsing

welder certificates and records of tests for welding procedures

shall be submitted to the Project Manager. The name shall be

submitted at least 3 weeks before tests start or, if tests are not

required, at the same time as the welder certificates are

submitted.

- The name of the proposed testing consultant shall be submitted

to the Project Manager at least 3 weeks before the testing

consultant commences work.

- All tests required in the specification or as shown on drawings

shall be carried out by an independent testing consultant

employed by the Contractor and having been reviewed without

objection by the Project Manager.

- The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager test results

for all test required within 7 days of the carrying out of the test,

together with a report from the Testing Organization on the

acceptability or otherwise of the results.

Details of corrosion protection system:

The following details of the proposed paints and associated products

shall be submitted to the Project Manager:

- Name of manufacturer.



268

- Duplicate copies of the manufacturer's data sheets including

temperature, humidity and other conditions at the workshop or

on the Site under which the paint is to be applied.

- Manufacturer's product specifications, product range and

technical information.

- Surface preparation system for steelwork corrosion protection.

Samples of materials:

- A sample of blast cleaned steel plate shall be submitted to the

Project Manager for review at least 14 days before blast

cleaning starts. The sample shall be 150mm x 150mm x 6mm

and shall be enclosed in a sealed, colourless, transparent

wrapping. The grade of steel and the method of blasting shall

be representative of those that will be used in the Permanent

Works.

- Two samples of painted tin plates for each corrosion protection

system shall be submitted to the Project Manager at least 14

days before painting starts. Each plate shall be 150mm x 75mm

x 1mm and shall have smooth edges and 10mm corner radii.

The plates shall be brush cleaned and painted on one face with

the corrosion protection system in such a manner that each

coat is stepped back from the underlying coat in equal strips.

- Samples of each type of nut, bolt, washer, stud and rivet shall

be provided within 3 days after the material is delivered to the

site.

A test plan should be developed and submitted to Project Manager for

approval before commencement of test. The test plan should include

the following:

- Aim of the test including the number of specimens

- Description of the test specimen/structural model together with

the loading to be applied with particular attention to parameters

and tolerances in dimensions and materials

- during fabrication and erection that might affect the

performance.

- Possible modes of failure.

- Details of material and dimensional tests to be carried out on

the specimens.

- Testing arrangements including measures taken to ensure

adequate strength and stiffness for any supporting rig as well

as sufficient clearance to allow for deflections. This must take

into account all possible failure mechanisms.



269

- Details of loading and restraints and how the load will be

controlled, i.e. either stress or strain control

- Details of what measurements are to be taken and frequency of

measurements.

- Details of what measurements are to be taken and frequency of

measurements.

- Accuracy of measurements.

The test plan should take into account the knowledge and experience of

those carrying out the tests as well as the facilities and equipment being

used.

4.2.14 Trials

Painting trials:

- A painting trial shall be carried out for each corrosion

protection system which will be applied to areas exceeding

100m2 to demonstrate that the proposed materials and

methods of application will produce a painted surface which

complies with the specified requirements.

- Painting trials shall be carried out at the place where painting to

the Permanent Works will be carried out and using the

employees and equipment which will be used to carry out

painting to the permanent work.

- Painting trials shall be carried out on blast cleaned steel.

Results of painting trials: If the painted surface produced in a painting

trial does not comply with the specified requirements for the paintwork,

the cause of failure shall be established by Contractor and details of

proposed changes shall be submitted to the Project Manager. Proposed

changes to the paint formulation, other than an adjustment in

the amount of thinners, shall be carried out at the paint manufacturer's

works before the final painting trial and before the first batch of paint is

delivered.

Commencement of painting: Painting shall not commence until the

painted surface produced in painting trials complies with the specified

requirements for paintwork.

Changes in materials and methods of application for painting: Unless

permitted by the Project Manager, the materials and methods of



270

application used in a painting trial that complies with the specified

requirements shall not be changed.

4.2.15 Handling, Storage and Transport of Materials

Handling and transport of steelwork:

- Steelwork shall not be subject to rough handling, shock loading

or dropping from a height.

- During handling and transport of coated steelwork, the

steelwork shall be separated from wires and lashings by rubber

padding in such a manner that the coatings are not damaged or

discoloured. Free ends shall be stiffened, measures shall be

taken to prevent permanent distortion and machined surfaces

and faying surfaces shall be protected.

- Steelwork shall not be lifted from the painting bed until the last

applied coating is sufficiently dry or cured for handling.

- Rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, screws and small plates and

articles shall be packed in containers marked to identify the

contents.

Storage of steelwork:

- Steelwork shall be stored off the ground on level supports in

well-drained areas in a manner that will not result in damage or

deformation to the steelwork or coatings or in contamination of

the steelwork or coatings. Packings shall be placed between

steelwork that is stacked.

- Covered places in which steelwork is stacked shall be

ventilated.

- Different types and sizes of steelwork shall be stored

separately.

- Steelwork shall not be stored on or adjacent to concrete

surfaces that form part of the Permanent Works.

- Steelwork shall be protected from exposure to conditions that

may affect the steelwork or coatings.

- Wet paint films, steelwork surfaces that are to be primed or

overcoated and joint surfaces that are to be assembled shall be

protected from exposure to conditions that may affect the film

or surface. Undercoats that contain anatase titanium dioxide

shall be protected from exposure to direct sunlight.

- Steelwork shall be stored in an enclosed workshop and

protected from conditions which may adversely affect the

steelwork until the following times:



271

o When the second undercoat to painted steelwork has

hard dried.

o When the coating process to galvanized, electroplated

or metal-sprayed steelwork has been completed.

o When the sealer to metal sprayed and sealed

steelwork has been completely absorbed.

o When the first undercoat to metal sprayed and painted

steelwork has hard dried.

- Primed steelwork surface may be exposed outside the

enclosed workshop for the minimum period necessary to move

the steelwork from one part of the workshop to the other; the

undercoated surfaces shall be covered when the steelwork is

being moved.

- All painted steelwork shall be checked for intercoat

contamination prior to application of following coats.

4.2.16 Construction Materials: Safety Glass

All glass units shall be supplied, coated, manufactured, assembled and

warranted by a single manufacturer. The glass shall all be from a single

source and the Contractor shall submit details of how he will control the

colour consistency for each elevation prior to glass ordering.

The source of glass supply shall be subject to review without

objection by the Project Manager. The source must have a

satisfactory proven track record of glass supplied for the type, size and

thickness concerned, appropriate QNQC measures, and compliance

with the design/ manufacturing/ testing standards as specified in this

specification or the best practice in glass manufacture as reviewed

without objection by the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall ensure that no glass or glazing combination

develops stresses that may lead to damage of glass, glazing materials,

components and/or framing systems.

The Contractor shall conduct a thermal stress analysis, undertake

thermal calculations and make due allowance for any tempered glass

which may be required.

The Contractor must satisfy himself that glass toughening



272

requirements are satisfactory to loads anticipated in the Safety Glass

Barrier. The prime manufacturer of the tempered

glass shall be made aware of its intended use in the construction. Any

drilling and notching is to be done with the agreement of the prime

manufacturer of tempered glass and prior to the toughening being

carried out. All tempered glass shall be tempered on a roller hearth

furnace eliminating tong marks and shall conform to BS 6206 Class A.

All tempered glass I glass exceeding surface and edge stresses of

7500 psi (50 MPa) shall be one hundred percent off line (i.e. glass

allowed to cool to room temperature for 24 hours prior to heat soaking)

heat soak tested with a 3-hour duration at 29000, in accordance with

BS EN 14179, to convert all critical Nickel Sulphide inclusions from the

alpha to the B phase so that the glass will fracture in the test. After the

test the probability of failure in service should be less than one in 400

tonnes. The manufacturer shall, at the request of the Project Manager,

show by statistical analysis of test data that the probability of failure is

not greater than the value quoted above.

Real time temperature-time curve for heat soaking of each batch of

process glass shall be recorded and witnessed by an independent

laboratory appointed by the Contractor. The accredited laboratory for

the oven calibration and witnessing the heat soak process shall be

nominated during tender stage for review without objection by the

project manager. All heat soak test records issued by the glass

manufacturer shall be countersigned by the Independent laboratory and

the Contractor and shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review

following glass delivery to the assembly factory or site.

Any glass breakage which takes place before the end of the DLP due to

Nickel Sulphide inclusions shall be replaced at the

Contractor's cost.

The surface compressive stress of the tempered glass shall be

demonstrated by non-destructive testing to be controlled at the factory

within the range of 70 N/mm2 to 100 N/mm2•

The surface compressive stress of the heat strengthened glass shall be

demonstrated by non-destructive testing to be between 38 Nlmm2 and

48 N/mm2.



273

Four samples of project size glass with designated heat treatment and

coating shall be provided for each type of glass to demonstrate the

appearance of the final product. The samples shall also demonstrate

the quality of any repairs likely to the glass e.g. polishing of scratches.

The samples shall be to a standard reviewed without objection by the

Project Manager. The accepted trial samples shall be kept by the

Project Manager as control samples.

Repair record sheets shall be logged by the Contractor and

submitted to the Project Manager on completion of the Glass Safety

Barrier together with the coating warranty documents.

4.3 Survey of Existing dimensions and levels

Prior to commencing erection, the Contractor shall survey and report at least the following:

- Any discrepancies beyond specified tolerances to the Engineer

- Required adjustments to detailing and member lengths to

accommodate existing conditions when they are within

specified tolerances.

The Contractor shall submit structural steel shop drawings and erection drawings showing field surveyed dimensions of the Works including:

- Elevations of concrete on which structural steel is to be placed;

- Elevations of concrete on which structural steel is to be placed;

- Location and elevation of existing steel work, or steel work of

other Steel Subcontractors to which structural steel will be

connected; and

- Locations of existing works that may affect fabrication and

erection.



274

5.1 Scope of specification

5.1.1 Installations to comply with this general specification

The Electrical Installation shall comply with this Specification which

details the intrinsic properties (including materials and workmanship) of

the Installations.

5.1.2 Scope of the installations

This Specification, Equipment Schedule and Drawings detail the

performance requirements of the Installations. The Installations to be

carried out in accordance with this Specification shall include the design

where specified, installation and supply of all materials necessary to

form a complete Installations including any necessary tests,

adjustments, commissioning and maintenance as prescribed and all

other incidental sundry components together with the necessary labour

for installing such components, for the proper operation of the

Installations.

5.1.3 Statutory obligations and other requirements

Electrical system design shall be developed to comply with the requirements of the Statutory Authorities, industry recognized standards and Codes of Practice in Macau, professional guides and recommendations issued by relevant professional bodies, institutions and organizations. Authorities and Utilities Companies:

(a) Direcção dos Serviços de Solos, Obras Públicas e Transportes, (DSSOPT)

(b) Public Works Department, Macau (c) Companhia de Electricidade de Macau-CEM, S.A, Supply

Rules and relevant Electricity Supply Ordinance (d) Companhia de Telecomunicações de Macau (CTM) –

Supply Rules and Relevant Communications Supply Ordinance

Standards and Codes: (a) BSI British Standards Institution (b) ICAO/IATA International Civil Aviation Organization (c) CIBSE Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (d) IET Institution of Engineering and Technology (e) ISO International Organization for Standardization

5 Specifications and Standards for Electrical Services



275

(f) IEC International Electrotechnical Committee (g) UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (h) DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung (German Institute for

Standardization) (i) Local Code Macau Local Code of Practice (j) TIA Telecommunications Industry Association (k) RAEM Região Administrativa Especial de Macau (l) SMACNA The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association

The Installations shall conform in all respects with the following:

5.1.3.1 Statutory Obligations

All Enactments and Regulations, in particular, the Contractor’s attention is drawn to the followings:

(a) Aprova os Regulamentos de Segurança de Instalações de Utilização de Energia Eléctrica e de Instalações Colectivas de Edifícios e Entradas (Decreto-Lei N.º 740/74)

(b) Ministérios da Administração Interna, das Finanças e do Plano, do Trabalho e Segurança Social e da Agricultura, Florestas e Alimentação (Decreto-Lei n.º 90/84/M)

(c) Portugal Standard NP

(d) RSIUEE - Regulamento de Segurança de Instalações de Utilização de Energia Eléctrica (RSIUEE) (Dec. Lei 740/74 of 26.12.1974)

(e) Institituto para os Assuntos Civicos e Municipais (IACM) – Recomendations and codes of practices

(f) Manual de Procedimentos Técnicos para Conservação de Energia em Edifícios de Macau» developed by DSSOPT;

(g) Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations 2012 Edition issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services department, HKSAR (EMSD)

(h) Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency for Building Services Installation 2012 Edition Issued by EMSD

(i) BS 7671: Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Wiring Regulations – Regulations for Electrical Installations, 18th Edition. (hereinafter referred to as the IET Wiring Regulations)

(j) BS7430 : Earthing

(k) BSEN 62305: Protection against Lightning, 2006

(l) General Specification for Electrical Installation in Government Buildings of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region 2012 Edition

(m) Relevant British Standard

(n) Any other authorities having jurisdiction over the installation

The Contractor shall adopt the latest development in the technology and use hi-tech, reliable, flexible, environmental friendly and sustainable system and equipment to formulate the final design.

https://www.archsd.gov.hk/media/119117/gsee02-2012_w_corr.pdf





276

The Contractor shall at an early design stage liaise and consult with the relevant Government Departments, Authorities and Utility Undertakings such as Fire Services Department (CB), Power Utilities Company (CEM) etc. to obtain their requirements for incorporation into the design.


The Contractor shall make full reference to the technical and design

standards and adopt the same or better design approach and

installation provision wherever applicable.

The Electrical Services Installation includes the works for design review

and selection, add or modify the existing electrical services system,

to establish the new electrical services system for the Works.

The design process shall ensure the proper and correct matching of all

the components constituting these systems are working properly in

order to conform to the performance requirements for the complete

Electrical Services Installation.

5.2.1 Power Supply and Distribution System

The incoming sources for the Works shall be obtained from the existing

substation 2 at 11kV side, existing 1600kVA transformer and a new

11kV/LV transformer in extension of the existing Passenger Terminal

Building (PTB) and the existing terminal. Modification, demolition,

diversion, alteration and addition works on the existing electrical system

shall be designed and built for the Works.

The Contractor shall provide an 11kV/LV transformer unit with at least

1600kVA power capacity connected to existing HV switchboards and

provide associated electrical system. The capacity shall be based on

electrical load estimation of extension of PTB for this Works. The

electrical loadings shall be fed from the existing and new 11kV/LV

transformers.

The Contractor shall design and build a complete electrical system for

the Works based on the existing electrical system in extension of the

existing Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) and existing terminal to

ensure adequate power provision shall be provided. The electrical

system will cover the modification and addition of HV/LV transformer,

HV and LV switchboards, generator and associated electrical

distribution systems, the LV main switch room; and associated

distribution electrical rooms at Macau Airport PTB Expansion Area and



277

existing terminal; the fixed link bridge and airbridge facilities. All

excavation, diversion and reinstatement works if required shall be

deemed to be included in the cost provisions for this power supplies

arrangement.

The electrical distribution systems shall be designed with a spare

capacity of not less than 20% for future extension or expansion.

The design shall incorporate power security for critical systems and

public area lighting.

The design shall incorporate protection and discrimination scheme

in order to isolate the electrical fault and confine the impact on the

airport operation to a minimum. and the associated LV main

switchroom with LV main switchboard and associated power

quality equipment shall be provided at MEP plant area or at each

group of areas by departments or parties.

Interleaving circuit strategy for PTB Building Expansion shall be

provided for the power supply network.

The electrical distribution systems includes but not be limited to electrical distribution equipment , electrical panel boards (with type test certificate provided), wiring and cables, cable containment system, wiring and accessories, miscellaneous electrical equipment, etc.

A complete cable containment system shall be for the use by the wiring system. The wiring system shall be deemed to include electrical services items such as lighting and small power, MVAC control, FS cables, Communication cabling, etc. A complete cable containment system shall include cable support means such as cable ladder, cable trays, hangers and wall-mounted cable trays and related support accessories and fixing provisions.

The design shall incorporate the requirements of voltage dip ride-through capability for all critical equipment including ELV system equipment, including without limitation the control systems, lighting systems, mechanical systems and lifts.

Wiring for low voltage circuits shall be LSOH to BS 7211.

Wiring for control circuits shall be carried out in flexible LSOH cable to BS 7211.

The cable containment system shall include surface cable conduit system works for power & lighting and provisions of cast-in & concealed



278

conduits for the Works. Co-ordination with builder's works is required among different discipline trades.

Unless otherwise specified, the hidden conduit works and concealed conduit works for lighting and small power shall be co-ordinated with the architectural and builder requirements. Painting shall also be provided in accordance with relevant architectural scope. Conduit System for other trades such as fire services, MVAC control and COMM/ IT system, etc shall be provided and shown in relevant system scope.

Underfloor cable containment system for low voltage wiring and COMM

system wiring distribution shall also be provided for departure lounges.

5.2.2 Essential and Emergency Power System

A complete Essential and Emergency Power System for the Works

shall be provided to backup the essential services which include:

(a) Fire services installations

(b) Essential and Emergency lighting

(c) Ventilation for fire services pump room

(d) Smoke Extraction system

(e) Ventilation control system

(f) Audio Visual Advisory system

(g) Fire Shutters

(h) Smoke Curtain

(i) Building Management system

(j) Security systems

(k) Airport Operation and ELV Systems not limit to :

a. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System

b. Public Address (PA) System

c. Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) System

d. Access Control System (ACS)

e. Wireless Network (WLAN) System

f. Radio Communication System

g. Flight Information Display System (FIDS)

h. Voice and Data Cabling (VDC) System

i. Master Antenna Television (MATV) System

j. Building Management System (BMS)

k. Passenger Check-in System

l. Baggage Handling and Screening System

m. Immigration Desks

n. Port Health System/Equipment

o. Customs System/Equipment



279

(l) Fixed Link Bridge Facilities

(m) Plumbing and drainage system

5.2.3 Electrical calculations

The Contractor shall submit the electrical calculations includes but not

limited to the below in his design and build designs for the CAM Project

Manager Consent.

(a) Overall electrical load estimation of extension of PTB with all

loadings in this Works: The calculation shall include normal,

essential and emergency power distributions on transformer(s)

and generator(s);

(b) Electrical load estimation with all loadings in this Works: The

calculation shall include normal, essential and emergency

power distributions on transformer(s) and generator(s);

(c) Cable and busduct Sizing calculation;

(d) Cable containment Sizing calculation;

(e) Power system discrimination calculation;

(f) Earthing and lightning calculation;

(g) Lighting calculation;

(h) UPS sizing and battery sizing calculations; and

(i) Generator system calculations (if generator set(s) is modified

and added);

a. Generator sizing and fuel supply system calculation;

b. Air Pressure Drop Calculations of Generator system;

c. Acoustic Treatment Calculation for Generator Rooms;

d. Exhaust Back Pressure Calculation for Generator; and

e. Acoustic Calculation for Exhaust System of Generator

5.2.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) System

The UPS system shall be equipped with the following requirements

unless noted otherwise from user departments.

Critical systems and control panels shall be backed up by UPS

to ensure monitoring and control functions remain unaffected in

case of voltage dips. The UPS shall be equipped with external

maintenance bypass facility allowing the non-break power switching in

the event that UPS is required to disconnect from the electrical system

for maintenance or repair.



280

For ELV systems, dual UPS configuration (each rated at 100% load)

shall be considered and provided. External maintenance bypass

facility shall be included to allow the non-break power switching in

the event that both UPS are required to disconnect from the

electrical system for maintenance or repair. The UPS shall be

equipped with remote monitoring mechanism fully compatible and

capable of integrating with UPS monitoring system. The design

shall include associated cabling and equipment.

Each UPS system shall be equipped with adequate power capacity for

all essential power provisions to be provided for the Works.

UPS system shall be provided for Communication (IT) Rooms housing

ELV core equipment. The UPS shall provide a minimum backup time of

120 minutes at the full load for communication rooms depends on the

requirements by user departments for the Works.

5.2.5 Lighting System

A complete lighting system and intelligent lighting control system shall

be provided. Timer control shall also be included.

The lighting levels for various areas shall be designed generally

according to the recommendations of CIBSE Lighting Codes and

guidebooks. The maintenance factor shall be based on manufacturer’s

recommendation and it shall not be less than 0.8.

Unless otherwise stated from Government departments, CAM, airport operators and stakeholders, the following areas shall be illuminated to meet CIBSE Lighting Codes and the following average maintained illumination shown in the lux table below:

Location Average

Illumination

level

(Lux)

Uniformity

(Minimum

illuminance

to Average

illuminance)

Task

Uniformity

(Minimum

illuminance to

Average

illuminance)

Public areas (on floor) 200 0.4 -

General circulation

areas (on floor)

200 0.4 -



281

Seating areas (areas

nearby the seat but

not under the seat)(on

floor)

200 0.4 -

Queuing area (on

floor)

200 0.4 -

Toilet areas (on sink

and on floor)

200 (floor) &

350 (sink)

0.4 -

Passenger Queuing

Area |(floor level)

300 0.4 -

Entrance Check Point

(desk level)

400 - 0.7 for task

area

APV (inside of

building) (on wall)

100 0.4 -

APV (outside of

building) (on floor)

200 0.25 -

Office corridor (on

floor)

200 0.4 -

Normal and emergency lighting shall be provided for the areas of the

Works.

Sufficient numbers of self-contained emergency luminaires shall be

provided according to Macau Law and Regulations, BS 5266 and BS

EN 60598.

At least 50% of general lighting in the public areas shall be fed

by essential power supply from generators. At least 10% of the

essential lighting shall be incorporated with 2 hours self-contained

battery.

The lighting for public areas shall be controlled and monitored by the

BMS.



282

The lighting systems shall be considered with different circuits

feed to minimise the operational impacts in the event of power fault.

The selection of light fittings shall consider energy efficiency,

maintenance frequency and spare part availability. The selection of light

fittings shall be based on the latest technology and energy efficiency.

LED type general Iighting shall be considered where practicable.

The lighting circuitry shall be arranged with interleaving circuits such

that there is no total blackout in the event of single power supply failure.

The lighting and control system shall be designed with flexibility in the

circuit arrangement to allow for future optimization of operation

schedule to achieve energy saving.

Unless otherwise stated from Government departments, CAM, airport

operators and stakeholders, intelligent lighting control system with

scenes shall be provided for meeting rooms and function rooms. The

illumination levels of lightings can be adjusted by groups and scenes.


operators and stakeholders, motion sensors (i.e. dual sensor type with

by-pass function) shall be provided at all male/ female showing, locker

area, toilets, associate common corridors and pantry, where minimum

lighting level shall be maintained for security guard patrol purpose and

means of escape requirements.


operators and stakeholders, day light sensors shall be provided at the

zone near to window with day lighting source for automatically dimming

the lighting down to acceptable level.

5.2.6 Earthing and Lightning Protection System

Lightning protection system shall be included for all structures and

systems for the Works.

The electrical earthing system shall be designed in accordance with BS

7430.

The lightning protection system shall be designed in accordance

with BSEN62305. The Contractor may propose equivalent

International Standard for Lightning Protection Systems but



283

submission is required to obtain Project Manager Consent prior to

works.

Clean Earthing System shall be provided for communication rooms

housing Airport ELV System equipment.

5.2.7 Lift System

The Contractor shall be responsible to check the weight allowed for lift

car decoration of the existing lift systems for stone replacement work.

The overall weight of the new stone lift car floor shall be within the

weight allowed for lift car decoration. The details of the stone

replacement work are shown on Architectural section in this design brief.

The fireman lifts shall comply with all statutory regulations.

The Contractor shall closely liaise with the Client and his

representatives in connection with the existing system in order to avoid

from conflict and disruption of airport operation with building structure

and existing utility services.

5.3 Testing and Commissioning

The Contractor shall be responsible to prepare and submit a full

set of Test and Commissioning documentation (T&C) for electrical

services Systems to the Project Manager for Approval.

The T&C documents shall be submitted at least 8 weeks before

the commencement of any T&C activities. The T&C Document

shall include as minimum containing the following information with

provisions or connections serving the Works.

(a) Proposed methodology and test procedure details

(b) Requirements of testing Instruments, testing conditions and

proposed acceptance criterion for operation performance

(c) Specific items of Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) and Site

Acceptance Test (SAT)

(d) List of Electrical Services System and Equipment which shall

not limit to :

a. Transformer

b. HV Switchboard and HV Switchgear

c. LV Switchboard and LV Switchgear

d. UPS Power

e. General Lighting

f. Emergency Lighting System

g. Lightning Protection System



284

h. Earthing System

i. Emergency Generator Power

j. LV Power and ELV Cables

(e) The T&C Items shall generally include

a. Visual Inspection;

b. Functional Checklist for respective electrical services

sub-systems ;

c. Instrumentation and Protection Device Operation;

d. Cable/Conductor Continuity Test;

e. Insulation Tests;

f. Polarity Check Test;

g. Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test;

h. Earth Rod Resistance Test;

i. Circuitry function Test;

j. Charge and Battery Test;

k. System Integrated Testing ( If required) ;

l. Interface Check with Existing PTB Systems ;

m. General and Performance Checking recommended by

suppliers and;

n. Statutory Compliance Checking and Demonstration

required by the Authorities.

o. Measurement Record

Prior to energizing, all systems shall be tested to ensure:

(a) Systems are free from short circuits and grounds and any faults

shall be rectified immediately on discovery unless associated

with wiring carried out by others, in which case they shall be

recorded and submitted as directed.

(b) Systems are free from mechanical and electrical defects. All

equipment, cabling etc is electrically safe.

(c) All exposed metal works is properly bonded and earthed with

statutory requirements and that all connections and points

required to be earthed for safety and satisfactory operation

are properly earthed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

requirements

(d) All cable cores and terminations are properly made off,

secure, properly supported and correctly identified and

coloured

(e) All phases, polarities, neutral and common connections are

correctly switched as required, that power is correctly available

at all points and that voltage and frequency at all equipment are

correct and in accordance with requirements for correct working



285

(f) All supplies are properly fused, or otherwise protected to give

satisfactory discrimination and safe disconnection under fault

conditions;

(g) All protective covers are properly fitted, all warning label and

designating labels are correct and in position and the inside of

all boxes and cubicles are clean and free of cable strippings;

(h) Battery, if provided are properly ventilated, installed,

connected and fitted, and that battery chargers are working

correctly.

(i) All instruments and meters are energised with correct polarity

and working properly

(j) All essential equipment fed from battery systems continue

to function correctly and without disturbance during all supply

failure, restoration and standby sequences

(k) All interlocking and sequencing; protection for normal and

operations are in order and checked, fitted and adjusted.

(l) Any faults shall be rectified immediately on discovery unless

associated with wiring carried out by others, in which case they

shall be recorded and submitted as directed.

(m) Where short circuit ratings are specified, documentary

evidence of compliance with such requirements shall be

provided.

(n) Compliance of Performance as requirement by local electrical

code and BS 7671.



286

6.1 Specification

6.1.1 Statutory Obligations and Design Requirements

Fire Services Systems for this fit-out work contract are designed based on and shall comply with following codes:

The Contractor shall make full reference to the technical and design standards/specifications appended as annexes of this section and adopt the same or better design concept and installation provision wherever applicable.

Macau Fire Services regulation “ Regulamento de Seguranca Contra Incendios” and Decree Law 24/95/M

Direcção dos Serviços de obras Públicas e Transportes (DSSOPT) – Applicable codes and standards

Regulamento de Segurança Contra incêndios (RSCI) – Dec.Lei 24/95/M of 09.06.1995

Regulamento de Á guas e de Drenagem de Á guas Residuais de Macau (RADARM)) (Dec. Lei 46/96/M of 19.08.1996)

RSIUEE - Regulamento de Segurança de Instalações de Utilização de Energia Eléctrica (RSIUEE) (Dec. Lei 740/74 of 26.12.1974)

RSICEE - Regulamento de Segurança de Instalações Colectivas de Edificios e Entradas (Dec. Lei 740/74 of 26.12.1974)

Companhia de Electrcidade de Macau (CEM) – Supply Rules and Relevant Electricity Supply Ordinance

Serviço de Abastecimento de Á guas de Macau (SAAM) – Supply Rules and Relevant Water Supply Ordinance

Companhia de Telecomunicações de Macau (CTM) – Supply Rules and Relevant Communications Supply Ordinance

Institituto para os Assuntos Civicos e Municipais (IACM) – Recomendations and codes of practices

NFPA 72 –National Fire Alarm Code

NFPA 2001 – Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

Any other authorities having jurisdiction over the installation

The installation materials and equipment shall be supplied and installed using the best available quality materials and workmanship and shall comply with the latest requirements of the standard codes, guides and

6 Specifications and Standards for Fire Services



287

other documents issued by the authorities, institutions and organizations referred to in various sections of the Specifications, including the following:

BSI British Standard Institution

CIBSE Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

ISO Institution of Electrical Engineers

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

DIN International Standard

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

IPC International Plumbing Code

JIS Japanese International Standard

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

6.1.2 Particular Requirements

The Contractor shall make full reference to the technical and design standards and adopt the same or better design concept and installation provision wherever applicable in this fit-out contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and install testing and commissioning of all necessary Fire Service Installations in accordance with the performance requirements under this fit-out contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for design, select, add or modify the required fire service installation including the proper and correct matching of all the components constituting these systems in order to ensure that the systems conform to the performance requirements and are suitable for use as part of the Fire Service Installation. The existing Fire Alarm and Detection system for the Macau Airport Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) North Extension is of separate system and independent system from base terminal buildings systems. The Fire Alarm and Detection system under this fit-out contract for the Macau Airport Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) North Extension shall be connected to existing AFA panel systems of this building. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the new proposed Fire Services installation under this fit-out contract shall be compatible with existing Fire system the Automatic Fire alarm system of this building. The new fire alarm signals under this fit-out contract from Macau Airport Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) North Extension shall be repeated to existing Fire Services control centre for control and reporting. All the fire signals shall be repeated to existing two control points. With the F.S.



288

fit-out works involve, the required modification, reconfiguration or addition to the existing Fire Services installation, the overall system performance of the existing Fire Services installation system shall not be degraded in any form. The Fire Services Wet systems under this fit-out contract for the Macau Airport Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) North Extension, the Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of sprinkler system and F.S. systems under the required fit-out works from the existing installation. Under circumstances where upgrading or alteration of the existing systems as require, the involved work shall include but not limited to sprinkler pipeworks, F.S. pipeworks, etc if necessary. Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems – Novec 1230 [complying to NFPA] shall be employed under this fit-out contract whereas applicable for the protection of Electrical/ ELV equipment rooms and Electrical / ELVplant rooms including but not limited to battery room, Lan server room, ELV control room, ELV equipment rooms, etc.

Any works to be carried out by the Contractor under this fit-out contract shall not affect the normal operation and current accepted performance of the system. The works shall also be planned to minimize disturbance to the airport operations, night time working may be required. The Contractor shall make allowance in this regard in arranging their work tasks.


a) The Contractor shall arrange full testing and commissioning for all fire service installation to the CAM Project Manager showing that the fire service installation is in order and complies with Authority’s requirements before requesting Authority for statutory inspection and testing and the building handover. The Contractor shall carry out more and/or additional tests when required by the client if any part of the test fails.

b) The Contractor shall allow adequate time in his programme for the test and re-testing before completion of the Contract.

c) The Contractor shall liaise with all concerned parties for the timely completion of all works affecting the final fire services inspection by Authority including portable firefighting equipment, water supplies, EXIT signs, the whole Fire Service Installation, normal and essential electricity supply, control of the A/C works, fireman’s lift, all related builder’s works, etc. before the submission of relevant application forms to Authority requesting for inspection.

d) The Contractor shall carry out all tests for equipment and installation to be covered up before proceeding further any work, such as hydraulic test for sprinkler system piping before



289

the installation of false ceiling, etc. to the satisfaction of the to the CAM Project Manager. The Contractor shall be liable of all possible consequences if he fails to do so.

e) The Contractor shall submit the testing and commissioning details for the review without objection by the CAM Project Manager before implementation.

f) After having satisfied himself of the performance of the installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CAM Project Manager that the installations comply with all the statutory requirements.

g) The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities and instruments for the witnessing and checking of such tests, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for testing and satisfying himself of the adequacy of the installation beforehand.

h) The Contractor shall make complete records of the tests as carried out and when the tests have been successfully completed, he shall provide the CAM Project Manager with test records in triplicate on a form to be agreed upon.

i) All instruments shall have been recalibrated within 6 months of the start of commissioning or testing. The Calibration of all instruments shall be certified by the instruments manufacturer or an approved calibration agency.



290

7.1 Specification

7.1.1 Statutory Obligations and Design Requirements

The plumbing and drainage system for this fit-out work contract shall comply with the current rules and regulations established by the following authorities and utility companies:

Direcção dos Serviços de obras Públicas e Transportes (DSSOPT) – Applicable codes and standards

Regulamento de Segurança Contra incêndios (RSCI) – Dec.Lei 24/95/M of 09.06.1995

Regulamento de Á guas e de Drenagem de Á guas Residuais de Macau (RADARM)) (Dec. Lei 46/96/M of 19.08.1996)

RSIUEE - Regulamento de Segurança de Instalações de Utilização de Energia Eléctrica (RSIUEE) (Dec. Lei 740/74 of 26.12.1974)

RSICEE - Regulamento de Segurança de Instalações Colectivas de Edificios e Entradas (Dec. Lei 740/74 of 26.12.1974)


Serviço de Abastecimento de Á guas de Macau (SAAM) – Supply Rules and Relevant Water Supply Ordinance

Companhia de Telecomunicações de Macau (CTM) – Supply Rules and Relevant Communications Supply Ordinance


Any other authorities having jurisdiction over the installation

The installation materials and equipment shall be supplied and installed using the best available quality materials and workmanship and shall comply with the latest requirements of the standard codes, guides and other documents issued by the authorities, institutions and organizations referred to in various sections of the Specifications, including the following:




7 Specifications and Standards for Plumbing and Drainage Services



291








UL Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.


The Contractor shall make full reference to the technical and design standards and adopt the same or better design concept and installation provision wherever applicable in this fit-out contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all necessary Plumbing and Drainage Service Installation in accordance with the performance requirements in this fit-out contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for design, select, add or modify the required existing plumbing and drainage installation including the proper and correct matching of all the components constituting these systems in order to ensure that the systems conform to the performance requirements and are suitable for use as part of the Plumbing and Drainage Service Installation. The Contractor shall be responsible to design and provide water supply including but not limited to all necessary make-up storage water tanks with sufficient volume, pumping (duty and standby) facilities and control (automatic and manual) facilities to meet the user requirement on flow rate and pressure of water supply. Complete foul and storm water disposal system including all aboveground and underground pipeworks, fittings, traps and equipment in this fit-out contract.

The proposed design criteria for potable, flushing, cleansing and A/C make-up water supply are as follows:

Minimum water pressure for sanitary fixtures : 1.5 bar

Maximum water pressure for sanitary fixtures : 3.0 bar

The plumbing system under this fit-out contract for the Macau Airport Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) North Extension shall be a concealed system. All vertical pipes shall run in pipe ducts and all



292

horizontal pipe runs shall be concealed in the ceiling void, horizontal ducts or vanity cabinets. Adequate access panels shall be provided to the pipe ducts or false ceiling to enable maintenance work to be carried out. No piping shall be cast into concrete structures or block walls. The drainage system under this fit-out contract for the Macau Airport Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) North Extension shall be a concealed system. All vertical drainage pipes shall run inside pipe ducts and horizontal drainage pipes shall run inside ceiling voids, horizontal ducts or vanity cabinets. No drainage pipes shall be bedded in concrete structures or block walls. The Contractor shall be responsible to design and provide the plumbing and drainage system under this fit-out contract to connect and support the existing plumbing and drainage system on site. The Contractor shall closely liaise with the CAM Project Manager in connection with the existing plumbing and drainage system and drains on site in order to avoid from conflict with building structure and existing services installation. The Contractor shall allow all cost and time for diversion, modification, upgrading the existing plumbing and drainage system on site if considered necessary. Should there be any modification, reconfiguration or addition of plumbing and drainage installation, the overall system performance of the existing plumbing and drainage system shall not be degraded in any form. The Contractor shall submit detailed proposal including detailed calculation to the CAM Project Manager for approval. In the proposal, the Contractor shall demonstrate the design of the proposed plumbing and drainage system can cater the works under this fit-out contract. Cold and hot water supply shall be provided for the following locations/rooms:

Areas Cold Water Hot Water

Stand-alone wash hand basins at Office areas

Yes Yes

Wash hand basins at locker/changing rooms, Pantry

Yes Yes

Shower Units Yes Yes

Wash hand basins at staff toilets Plant Operations and Administration

Yes No

Wash hand basins at public Yes No



293

toilet/lavatory

Any works to be carried out by the Contractor under this fit-out contract shall not affect the normal operation and current accepted performance of the system. The works shall also be planned to minimize disturbance to the airport operations, night time working may be required. The Contractor shall make allowance in this regard in arranging their work tasks.


(a) The Contractor shall arrange full testing and commissioning for all Plumbing and Drainage Service Installation to the CAM Project Manager showing that Plumbing and Drainage Service Installation is in order and complies with Authority’s requirements before requesting Authority for statutory inspection and testing and the building handover. The Contractor shall carry out more and/or additional tests when required by the client if any part of the test fails.

(b) The Contractor shall allow adequate time in his programme for the test and re-testing before completion of the Contract.

(c) The Contractor shall liaise with all concerned parties for the timely completion of all works affecting the final Plumbing and Drainage Service Installation inspection by Authority including normal and essential electricity supply, all related builder’s works, etc. before the submission of relevant application forms to Authority requesting for inspection.

(d) The Contractor shall carry out all tests for equipment and installation to be covered up before proceeding further any work, such as hydraulic test for Plumbing and Drainage Service Installation piping before the installation of false ceiling, etc. to the satisfaction of the to the CAM Project Manager. The Contractor shall be liable of all possible consequences if he fails to do so.

(e) The Contractor shall submit the testing and commissioning details for the review without objection by the CAM Project Manager before implementation.

(f) After having satisfied himself of the performance of the installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CAM Project Manager that the installations comply with all the statutory requirements.

(g) The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities and instruments for the witnessing and checking of such tests, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for



294

testing and satisfying himself of the adequacy of the installation beforehand.

(h) The Contractor shall make complete records of the tests as carried out and when the tests have been successfully completed, he shall provide the CAM Project Manager with test records in triplicate on a form to be agreed upon.

(i) All instruments shall have been recalibrated within 6 months of the start of commissioning or testing. The Calibration of all instruments shall be certified by the instruments manufacturer or an approved calibration agency.



295

8.1 Specification

8.1.1 Statutory obligations and Design Requirements

Mechanical ventilation and Air-conditioning (MVAC) Services Systems for this fit-out work contract are designed based on and shall comply with following codes:

The Contractor shall make full reference to the technical and design standards/specifications appended as annexes of this section and adopt the same or better design concept and installation provision wherever applicable.

Direccao dos Servicos de obras Publicas e Transportes (DSSOPT) – Applicable codes and standards

Regulamento de Seguranca Contra incendios (RSCI) – Dec.Lei 24/95/M of 09.06.1995

Regulamento de Aguas e de Drenagem de Aguas Residuais de Macau (RADARM)) (Dec. Lei 46/96/M of 19.08.1996)

RSIUEE - Regulamento de Seguranca de Instalacoes de Utilizacao de Energia Electrica

(RSIUEE) (Dec. Lei 740/74 of 26.12.1974)

RSICEE - Regulamento de Seguranca de Instalacoes Colectivas de Edificios e Entradas (Dec. Lei 740/74 of 26.12.1974)


Servico de Abastecimento de Aguas de Macau (Macau Water) – Supply Rules and Relevant Water Supply Ordinance

Companhia de Telecomunicacoes de Macau (CTM) – Supply Rules and Relevant Communications Supply Ordinance


Hong Kong Building Energy Efficiency Ordinance from EMSD HKSAR

Any other authorities having jurisdiction over the installation The installation materials and equipment shall be supplied and installed using the best available quality materials and workmanship and shall comply with the latest requirements of the standard codes, guides and other documents issued by the authorities, institutions and organizations referred to in various sections of the Specifications, including the following:





8 Specifications and Standards for Mechanical Ventilation and Air-conditioning Services



296








Design Criteria

Outdoor Design Conditions:

Summer: 33.5 deg C DB, 68% RH

Winter: 7.0 deg C DB, 40% RH

Indoor Design Conditions:

Room / Space

Indoor Design Condition

Design Occupancy

Min. Fresh Air Rate per person

Acceptable Noise Level

Summer Winter

General Office

22-24 degC,

50-60% RH

18-20 degC,

50-60%RH

Note (a) 10 l/s/psn

NC45

Arrival & Departure Hall

22-24 degC,

50-60% RH

18-20 degC,

50-60%RH

Note (a) 5 l/s/psn

NC45

Nursing Room

22-24 degC,

50-60% RH

18-20 degC,

50-60%RH

Note (c) 10 l/s/psn

NC45



297

Smoke Lounge

22-24 degC,

50-60% RH

18-20 degC,

50-60% RH

Note (c) 10 l/s/psn

NC45

Lobby & Corridor Area

24degC,

50-60% RH

- - 0.3 l/s/per m2

-

Toilet 24degC,

50-60% RH

- - Note (b)

NC45

IT room/ ELV equipment room

20-22 DegC,

50-60% RH

20-22 DegC,

50-60% RH

- - -

Notes:

(a) The design occupancy of arrival & departure hall shall refer to latest approved patronage data from CAM.

(b) To provide the base provisions, e.g. chilled water and fresh air provisions, with control & isolation valves / dampers at boundary of F&B areas for future tenant’s connection. The design occupancy rate & minimum fresh air rate shall satisfy to latest licensing requirement of F&B / restaurant. The kitchen exhaust & makeup air system would be designed by future tenant.

(c) The occupancy density shall be provided by client.

Temperature and Humidity sensors shall be located at various locations to measure the indoor and outdoor conditions. The BMS shall be programmed to enable the free cooling mode when the outside air temperature and enthalpy are less than the indoor air temperature and enthalpy. Independent thermostat and sensor shall be provided for each IT/ELV room.

CO2 sensors shall be provided in the return air ducts to measure the CO2 levels under 1000 ppm in the concourse areas. The modulating type return and fresh air dampers are designed to provide optimum fresh air as per the measured CO2 levels.



298

Dry contact shall be provided from the ventilation RI/O or I/O modules for VAC shut down the affected area non-emergency equipment in case of fire.

Toilet

The Contractor shall check and alternation the existing Mechanical exhaust system for all male, female and disable toilets with mechanical exhaust capacity can provide of not less than 15 air changes per hour. The exhaust system shall comprise of Inline centrifugal duct type exhaust fan with exhaust air ducts connected to the exhaust grilles for discharge, and the exhaust air discharge shall arranged at location without short circuiting to any building fresh air intake points.

Corridor Lobby

Air-conditioning shall be provided to the Corridor Lobby using chilled water fan coil units.

Technical services Rooms

An additional Clean Agent Fire extinguishing system - Novec 1230 and exhaust duct system shall be providing for technical room if existing system are not available.

Smoke Lounge

Air purifier shall be installed inside the smoke lounge. The performance of air purifier shall be able to remove odour and tobacco dusts, etc. Therefore, the air purifier shall be composed of different types of filter in order to filtrate different kind of air pollutants in the lounge. The room environment shall better than <Air Quality Guideline at Smoking Room in Japan> standard.

Other Areas

All other areas where not been addressed in this document, the

contractor shall design and proposed the system performance

requirement for Authority & Client acceptance.

All flexible duct used for connection shall not exceed 2 m length.

The louvre, grille, diffuser selected shall ensure face velocity not

exceed 2m/s.



299


(a) The Contractor is required to responsible for the overall

planning, organizing, coordinating, supervising and monitoring

of the testing and commissioning works and also certifying all

results and reports from the testing and commissioning works.

(b) The Contractor is required to provide, at no cost to the

Employer, all necessary equipment, apparatus, tools and

materials for carrying out of testing and commissioning works.

(c) The Contractor is required to submit detailed inspection, testing

and commissioning methods and procedures together with

report formats for reporting inspection, testing and

commissioning results for the client’s approval at least one

months before commencement of the testing and

commissioning works.

(d) The Contractor is responsible for provision of all labour and

both consumable and non-consumable materials for carrying

out testing and commissioning works at their expenses.

Electricity supply, water and LP gas and town gas for carrying

out of testing and commissioning works shall also be arranged

and provided by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer.

(e) The Contractor is required to supply the calibrated equipment

and instrument for testing and commissioning works in

accordance with the requirements as requested by CAM

Project Manager.

(f) The Contractor shall liaise with all concerned parties for the

timely completion of all works affecting the final MVAC

installation inspection by Authority including the whole MVAC

installation, normal and essential electrical power supply,

control equipment, and all related builder’s works, etc. before

the submission of relevant application forms to Authority

requesting for inspection.

(g) Any defects of workmanship, materials and performance,

maladjustments or other irregularities which become apparent

during commissioning or testing shall be rectified by the

Contractor at no cost to the Employer and the relevant part of

the commissioning or testing procedure shall be repeated at the

Contractor’s expenses.



300

(h) The Contractor shall carry out all tests for equipment and

installation to be covered up before proceeding further any

work, such as hydraulic test for chilled water supply system

piping and ductwork leakage test before the installation of false

ceiling, etc. to the satisfaction of the to the CAM Project

Manager. The Contractor shall be liable of all possible

consequences if he fails to do so.

(i) If considered appropriate, the Contractor shall be required to

carry out demonstration to dismantle those parts/components

of the Installations which are considered difficult/impossible for

maintenance access. The Contractor shall be responsible for

carrying out all necessary modification work at no extra charge

to the Employer to alleviate the difficulties associated with

dismantling or maintenance access.

(j) After having satisfied himself of the performance of the

installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction

of the CAM Project Manager that the installations comply with

all the statutory requirements.

(k) The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities and

instruments for the witnessing and checking of such tests, but

this shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for

testing and satisfying himself of the adequacy of the installation

beforehand.

(l) The Contractor shall make complete records of the tests as

carried out and when the tests have been successfully

completed, he shall provide the CAM Project Manager with test

records in triplicate on a form to be agreed upon.



301

9.1 Scope of Work

In this MIA fit-out works for PTB North Extension, the following ELV

systems will be involved as minimum:

Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System


Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) System






Information on the work scopes undertaken by the North Extension PTB

(RFQ-198) can be referred to the Appendix E.

On the other hand, the Contractor shall be responsible to the following

airport systems which have no alteration or expansion works to be

carried out:



Immigration Desks and Display Systems

Advance Visual Docking Guidance System (AVDGS)(option)

All Works shall be covered to areas within the North Extension PTB

which will involve with the fit-out works under this contract and the

interception area between Extension Building and Macau International

Airport Terminal. The works area shall be referred to the room data

sheets under this project. The following list has indicated the types of

ELV and Airport provisions provided to the locations which shall be

seamless to the existing arrangement for reference. The Contractor

shall :

Fit out Work Locations

System Enhancement provisions

ELV Rooms / CCTV rooms /

EOC

CCTV system; ACS system; BMS system and Radio Communications system

Public access area/ Corridor

PA system; CCTV system; WLAN system;

9 Specifications and Standards for Airport Systems



302

(front of house)/ Passenger

staircase

ACS system; and Radio Communications system

Toilets (public/ staff/ Disabled)

PA system; and WLAN system

Office area/ Corridor (Back of house)

PA system; CCTV system; ACS system; and Radio Communications system

CIP Lounge

PA system; FIDS; MATV; WLAN system; and Radio Communications system

Smoking Lounge

PA system; CCTV system; WLAN system; BMS system and Radio Communications system

Staircases/ lobbies (back of house)

PA system; CCTV system; ACS system; BMS system and Radio Communications system

Equipment & Plant Rooms

CCTV system; ACS system; BMS system and Radio Communications system

All the works under this project shall follow the current MIA operation

and existing system arrangement to re-configurate the existing terminal

systems without reduce the performance of existing system. The

contractor shall extend all the Airport / ELV systems to the new EOC.

The Contractor shall submit the Systems and Interface Management

Plan for system interface with the existing system - re-configure or

modify the software in the central computers to accommodate the

additional equipment into the existing system, including the

implementation of the new configuration. Modification of all

software/firmware is needed if necessary, which including but not be

limited to the software and databases that reside in the headend

processors, controllers, databases, server and all workstations.



303

The Contractor shall relocate, remove or modify all the existing facilities

while the works of Airport / ELV system under this project is affected the

existing facilities. These replacement or relocation works shall be

submitted for review without objection by the CAM Project Manager

prior to manufacturing and installation. All the new installation

equipment and modification work shall be considered as part of this

project. The Contractor shall provide the installation program to CAM

Project Manager without objection to show that no interruption for the

existing system operation.

The Contractor shall provide the cable containment system and power

provision for Airport and ELV system.

Final testing and commissioning of the overall system inclusive of the

Contractor’s works and demonstrate the final system performance

including at the headend of the existing system to the satisfaction of the

CAM Project Manager. Any changes to the original design shall not be

made prior to the review without objection by the CAM Project Manager.

The final T&C works shall follows the Design requirement Brief clause

9.4.

9.2 Design Standards

The following design codes and standards will be referenced in the

Airport systems Design:

ICAO Annex 17, Security

ANSI/TIA/EIA SP2840 Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard

EIA/TIA 606 Administration Standard for Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications in Commercial Buildings

BS 7671 Regulations for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring

Regulations 17th Edition or the latest edition

BS 6833.2 Apparatus Using Cordless Attachments (Excluding

Cellular Radio Apparatus) for Connection to Analogue Interfaces of

Public Switched Telephone Networks

BS EN60950 Specification for Safety of Information Technology

Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment

IEC 61082 – Preparation of documents used in Electrotechnology

IEC 65 - Safety requirements for mains operated electronic and

related apparatus for household and similar general use



304

Relevant Customer Technical Guides of FTNS Operator(s)

Laws and Regulations of the Bureau of Telecommunication

Regulations, Macao

CCITT Q.931 Standard – ISDN User Interface Layer 3 Specification

for Basic Call Control

CCITT Q.761 Standard – Functional Description of the ISDN User

Part of Signaling System No 7

CCITT I.420 Standard – Basic Rate User Network Interface

CCITT I.421 Standard – Primary Rate User Network Interface

CCITT G.703 Standard – Physical/Electrical Characteristics of

Hierarchical Digital Interfaces

CCITT G.704 Standard – Synchronous Frame Structures Used at

Primary and Secondary Hierarchical Level

EIA RS-232C – Specification of the Mechanical and Electrical

Characteristics of the Interface used for Connecting Data Circuit

Terminating Equipment and Data Terminal Equipment

EIA RS-422A – Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage

Digital Interface Circuits

EIA RS-449 – General Purpose 37 Pin and 9 Pin Interface for Data

Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment

Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange

EIA/TIA 568 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring

Standard

EIA/TIA 569 – Commercial Building Standard for

Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

BS EN 50173:2007 Information Technology – General Cabling

Systems

BS EN 50174:2001 Information Technology – Cabling Installation

ANSI/EIA/TIA Technical Services Bulletin TSB36

EIA/TIA 570 – Residential and Light Commercial

Telecommunications Wiring Standard

ETS GSM 11.10 – GSM DCS 1800 Mobile Station Conformity

Specification

IEEE 802.3 – CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer

Specifications (Ethernet)

IEEE 802.5 – Token Ring Access Method and Physical Layer

Specifications

IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ac Wireless LAN standard

IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet over Fibre Optic

IEEE 802.3z 10G b/s Ethernet standards

IEEE 802.3a 10G b/s Ethernet over Twisted Pair

IEEE 802.3a Link aggregation for parallel links

IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet

IEEE 802.3ae 10G b/s Ethernet over Fibre Optic



305

IEEE 802.1q VLAN Tagging

IEEE 802.1p Traffic Class Expediting

IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol

IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Network Access Control

IEC 529 – Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment

IEC 11 – Limits and Methods of Measurement of Electromagnetic

Disturbance Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical

Radio-Frequency Equipment

IEC 79-7 – Increased Safety Requirement for Electrical Equipment

for use in Explosive Atmospheres

IEC 79-11 – Guidelines for Design and Assessment of Intrinsically

Safe Circuits

IEC 79-15 – Requirements for Non-Sparking Electrical Equipment

BS 6513 Wideband Cabled Distribution Systems

EIA-422-A Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital

Interface Circuits

IEC 96-3 Radio Frequency Cables, Part 3 - General requirements

and tests for single unit coaxial cables for use in cabled distribution

systems

CCIR Recommendation 500-3, 562-2, 567-2

The relevant codes and guides published by the Building Services

Research and Information Association (BSRIA-UK)

EN55022 / CISPR 22 Class A standards issued by the European

Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)

IEC Display Monitor Standard 60065

IEC Display Monitor Standard 60950

BS 5954 Dimensions of Mechanical Structures of the 482.6 (19 in)

series Part 2 Specification for Cabinets and Pitches of Rack

Structures; Part 3 Specification for Subracks and Associated Plug-

In Units

BS 6527 Specification for Limits and Methods of Measurement of

Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology

Equipment

BS 7151 Representation of Dates and Times in Information

Interchange

EIA 422-A Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital

Interface Circuits

EN50081 Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic emission

standard Part 1 Residential, Commercial and Light Industry

EN50082 Electromagnetic compatibility: Generic immunity standard

Part 1 Residential, Commercial and Light Industry



306

ISO/IEC11801- Information technology –Generic cabling for

customer premises

ISO/IEC 24764 - Information technology -- Generic cabling systems

for data centres

TIA-942 - Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards for Data

Centers


This section of Particular Technical Requirements (PTR) specifies the

particular technical and performance requirements for the ELV and

Airport systems to be affected by the fit-out works in the PTB North

Extension Project in MIA.


The system shall be an extension of the existing MATV system

provided in the Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) in the MIA to

provide carries signals for the airport passengers.

The Contractor shall be responsible for design, supply, install of the

MATV equipment with all necessary equipment and accessories.

The Contractor shall coordinate with relevant stakeholders for the

completion of the installation.

All new equipment to be supplied under this Contract shall integrate

into the existing MATV system.

The Contractor shall be responsible for sourcing technical

information including from the relevant existing system

management contracts and Operation & Maintenance manuals to

ascertain the details of the interface requirements.

Any works to be carried out by the Contractor shall not affect the

normal operation and current accepted performance of the systems,

unless with the no objection from the Project Manager. The works

shall also be planned to minimize disturbance to the airport

operations.

In order to maintain continuous services and not to disrupt the

normal operation of the airport terminal, night time working shall be

required for certain works which would cause downtime of the

affected system and affect the normal operation of the system. The

Contractor shall make allowance in this regard in arranging their

work tasks.

http://global.ihs.com/search_res.cfm?RID=TIA&INPUT_DOC_NUMBER=TIA-942

http://global.ihs.com/search_res.cfm?RID=TIA&INPUT_DOC_NUMBER=TIA-942



307

In general, the works shall include but not be limited to the supply,

installation, testing and commissioning of the followings:

– Video splitters and distribution taps;

– Optical RF splitters, RF / data optical transceivers;

– MATV (Television) outlets;

– Amplifiers;

– MATV Distribution Frame (MTF);

– The TV sets (including mounting frames and brackets)

and the final drop leads (coaxial) for connecting the MATV

outlets with the TV sets.

– All RF coaxial and fibre distribution cabling among CRs and

from CRs to MTFs / MATV outlets; and

– All RF and optical fibre patch cables, RF cable leads, drop

cables, patch cables and other necessary components and

sundry items required to make the entire MATV system fully

functional and operational.

The MATV system performance shall follow the existing MIA MATV

general requirements and standards.

The Contractor shall provide documentation to the Project Manager

for review without objection. These shall include, but not be limited

to, the followings:

– Single line schematics for the MATV system;

– As Constructed Drawings;

– Wiring diagrams;

– Equipment cabinet layouts;

– Equipment cabinet mounting details; and

– O&M manuals.

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for review

without objection samples and the accompanying manufacturer's

design documentation which shall include but not be limited to:

– Samples of splitters, TV outlets, faceplates, signal cables;

– Samples of equipment, such as amplifiers, RF / data optical

transceivers and cable labels; and



308

– Other equipment that shall be installed in public areas or shall

interface directly with architectural, structural or building

services elements of this contract.

The minimum MATV signal level measured from any MATV outlets

in the MATV shall be better than:

– Carrier to Noise Ratio: 46dB or higher;

– Carrier to Cross Modulation: 54dB or higher;

– Carrier to Composite Triple Beat: 54dB or higher;

– TV signal to be at least 65dB ; and

– Tilting among various channels shall not exceed 6dB.


The signal source shall be an extension of the existing system

provided in the Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) in the MIA.

In general, the works shall include but not be limited to the following:

– Provision of all necessary hardware and software as described

for the works. All the proposed equipment shall be compatible

with the existing FIDS installed in the existing PTB;

– The design and configurations of the mounting brackets/poles

and necessary accessories shall be reviewed without objection


installation;

– Provision of all necessary local cable containment for the power

and control cables required;

– Prepare complete performance test plan and test schedules for

review without objection by the CAM Project Manager before

testing and commissioning; and

– As the minimum requirements, the FIDS display panel shall be

provided with 46 inch LCD displays in the departure areas; the

FIDS workstations shall be provided at VIP Lounge. The

location of FIDS equipment shall be reviewed without objection


installation;



to, the followings:

– Single line schematics for the FIDS system;



309





– O&M manuals.

The Contractor shall supply and install the patch cabling for the field

equipment and shall assist the Employer for the overall testing and

commissioning of the systems.

The FIDS system performance and FIDS equipment hardware

requirements shall be compatible to the existing system

performance.

Immigration Desk Equipment and Display System (IDEDS)

The Immigration desk equipment shall be connected to the existing

system provided in the Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) in the

MIA.


a) Provision of all necessary hardware and software as described

for the works. All the proposed equipment shall be equivalent

and compatible with the existing IDEDS installed in the existing

PTB;

b) The Contractor shall coordinate with the fit-out works Contractor

in order to propose installation arrangement for the Immigration

Desk equipment which shall be reviewed without objection by

the CAM Project Manager prior to manufacturing and

installation;

c) Provision of all necessary local cable containment for the power

and control cables required;

d) Prepare complete performance test plan and test schedules for

review without objection by the CAM Project Manager before




to, the followings:

– Single line schematics for the IDED equipment;



310





– O&M manuals.

The Contractor shall supply and install the patch cabling for the field

equipment and shall assist the Employer for the overall testing and

commissioning of the systems.

The system performance and IDED equipment hardware

requirements shall be compatible to the existing system

performance.

Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Enhancement System

The Contractor shall be responsible for all the works with associate

to the fit-out works including but not limited to the CCTV system

equipment design, supply, installation, modification, relocation,

testing and commissioning, documentation, and the interface co-

ordination with the main existing CCTV system. The works shall

include but not be limited to the provisions of all necessary

hardware and software as described in this PTR for the works.

Such hardware shall include but not be limited to:

a) IP fixed and pan/tilt/zoom cameras, lens, housing and brackets.

The camera shall have at least 720p high definition video

quality for general surveillance and 1080p high definition video

quality for critical areas such as Bosch 50022 series or

equivalent;

b) CCTV POE network switches such as CISCO 2960 series or

equivalent;

c) Equipment enclosures, power supplies, optical transceivers

with fibre cable organizers;

d) Mounting brackets and poles;

e) Surge arresters for all outdoor equipment installations;

f) Fibre patch cord and horizontal fibre cables to and from

cameras to new or existing ELV Room(s) and their termination

and accessories;

g) Coaxial cabling and coaxial patch cords, their termination and

accessories; and

h) All necessary local cable containment for the power and control

cables required connected to the main trunking.



311

The Contractor shall carry out the design and installation of the

mounting brackets/poles and necessary accessories, which shall be

submitted for review without objection by the CAM Project Manager

prior to manufacturing and installation.

Alternative equipment proposed by the Contractor will be subject to

review without objection by the CAM Project Manager.

The Contractor shall design, install, test and commission all the field

devices as well as the main CCTV existing system.

The Contractor shall provide documentation to the CAM Project

Manager for review without objection. These shall include, but not

be limited to, the following:

a) Detailed, coordinated shop drawings including CCTV System

field equipment installation and detailed connection method and

maintenance access arrangement together with equipment box

locations;

b) Single line schematics for the CCTV system with interface

demarcation with the existing system shall be indicated;

c) camera layout plan including camera location and coverage

drawings, if there are any proposed alternatives;

d) wiring diagrams;

e) equipment cabinet layouts;

f) equipment cabinet mounting details;

g) all types of camera and monitor installation including masts,

winches and mounting details;

h) Testing and commissioning records; and

i) as-constructed drawings and O&M Manual.

Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) Enhancement

System

All telephone system services for airport staff and public use at

various locations in the Extension Building, such as gate desk

phone and help phone, shall be served by existing PABX system in

PTB.


to the fit-out works including but not limited design, supply,

installation, modification, relocation, testing and commissioning,



312

documentation, and the interface co-ordination with the existing

PABX system. The works shall include but not be limited to the

provisions of all necessary hardware and software as described in

this PTR for the works. Such hardware shall include but not be

limited to:

a) Provision of analogue telephone set which is equivalent to

Avaya series;

b) Provision of 8-pairs telephone cables with the local cable

containment and appropriate type of phone jack for the end

devices;

c) Coordinate with other services for the mounting design /

claddings of the telephone at each location; and coordinate with

the other parties on interfaces issues;

d) Prepare a complete performance test plan and test schedules

for review without objection by the CAM Project Manager before


e) Prepare documentation such as shop drawings, installation

drawings, as-built drawings, cable termination schedule, test

procedures/specifications and operation and maintenance

manuals.

The system shall be an extension of the existing Avaya system

installed in the Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) in the MIA.

Each telephone point shall be equipped with one analogue

telephone set. Locations and quantities of telephone points shall be

liaised with relevant stakeholders.

All cables shall be PVC insulated, and shall be housed in

galvanized-screwed or PVC conduit and/or galvanized trunking,

unless higher quality trunking is required by any applicable

regulation.

The Contractor shall terminate all telephone cables at the existing

IDF in the PTB Extension, whereas PABX System configuration and

programming and cable jumpering shall be provided by others.



to the fit-out works including but not limited to the ACS system

equipment design, supply, installation, modification, relocation,

testing and commissioning, documentation, and the interface co-

ordination with the main existing ACS system. The works shall



313

include but not be limited to the provisions of all necessary



a) Door controller with 2 hours UPS backup facilities and other

access control devices such as card readers, integrated card

reader with PIN pad, door release button, biased magnetic

sensors, breakglasses, and the like, including all

interconnections, field equipment cabling, and cabling back to

the associated Controller(s) (i.e. Honeywell PW-Series) located

at new IDF room in PTB Extension.

b) Provision of all containment as required for the connection to

the final field equipment devices. This shall include but not be

limited to cable trunking, trays, cable ladders, concealed

conduits, back boxes, termination boxes, flexible conduits, etc.

All such last-run connections in conduits shall be concealed

unless otherwise specified.

c) Provision for interface with the fire services system by means of

the electromagnetic (EM) door lock. The Contractor shall study

the existing arrangement and implement the same arrangement

at the new EM door locks into the new controlled doors for the

fit out works.

All the proposed ACS equipment shall be compatible with the

existing Access Control System (Honeywell PW series or equivalent)

in MIA.

The Contractor shall provide documentation to the CAM Project

Manager for review without objection. These shall include, but not

be limited to, the following:

a) detailed, coordinated shop drawings including ACS System field

equipment installation, relocation, detailed connection method,

maintenance access arrangement together with equipment box

locations;

b) single line schematics for the ACS system;

c) access control type connection and installation diagrams;

d) wiring diagrams;

e) equipment cabinet layouts;

f) equipment cabinet mounting details;

g) O&M manuals; and

h) as-constructed Record Drawings.



314


The system is a flexible data communications system implemented

as an extension to the existing airport wide Wireless LAN system.

Using radio frequency (RF) technology, the system transmits and

receives data over the air, minimizing the need for wired

connections.

The system standard to be used shall be based on IEEE 802.11b

(Wi-Fi) standard and also IEEE 802.11a/g. The existing Wireless

LAN installed in the airport is based on IEEE 802.11b standard but

shall also support the IEEE 802.11g standard.


to the fit-out works including but not limited to the Wireless Lan

Access Points equipment design, supply, installation, modification,

relocation, testing and commissioning, documentation, and the

interface co-ordination with the existing WLAN system. The works

shall include but not be limited to the provisions of all necessary



a) The Contractor shall review the wireless LAN coverage base on

the fit-out work arrangement, and shall allow provisions of

Access Points with wireless controllers to the blind spot

locations;

b) Coordinate with other services for the mounting design /

ceilings of the Access Points location; and coordinate with the

other parties on interfaces issues;

c) The Contractor shall provide all necessary horizontal cabling

from the new and existing ELV rooms for all the Access Points

and a POE Network Switch (i.e CISCO 2960 or equivalent)

connection. The Contractor shall coordinate with the existing

system for system configuration and arrange system testing

and commissioning.

d) Provision of all necessary hardware and software in order to

complete the system;

e) Design and develop equipment mounting brackets/poles and

necessary accessories, which shall be subject to review without

objection by the CAM Project Manager prior to manufacturing

and installation;

f) Provision of cables with the minor cable containment for the

end devices;



315

g) Prepare a complete performance test plan and test schedules

for review without objection by the CAM Project Manager

before testing and commissioning; and

h) Prepare documentation such as shop drawings, installation

drawings, as-built drawings, test procedures/specifications and

operation and maintenance manuals.

The quantities and locations of Access Points shall be restricted by

the available ports at POE edge switches and licenses on the

wireless controllers. The Contractor shall evaluate the coverage

based on the particular equipment to be provided, and develop the

layout in details with coordination among other related services

including architectural and electrical. The Contractor shall submit,

for review without objection by the CAM Project Manager, the

equipment details and locations to demonstrate the required

coverage and performance can be met before implementation.

The Contractor shall undertake detailed site survey and signal

strength measurements for the review without objection by the CAM

Project Manager, to confirm the final quantities and locations of the

Access Points to achieve or ensure acceptable signal coverage in

the areas required.



to the fit-out works including but not limited to the Radio Antenna

system equipment design, supply, installation, modification,

relocation, testing and commissioning, documentation, and the

interface co-ordination with the main existing Radio Communication

system. The works shall include but not be limited to the provisions

of all necessary hardware and software as described in this PTR for

the works. Such hardware shall include but not be limited to:

a) Provision of all necessary hardware as described for the fit-out

works. The Contractor shall review the radio coverage based on

the fit-out work arrangement to design for the system

enhancement for the radio antenna coverage;

b) All the proposed equipment shall be compatible with the

existing radio communication system (Motorola TDMA Trunk

system) installed in PTB;

c) The design and configurations of the mounting brackets/poles

and necessary accessories shall be reviewed without objection



316


installation; and

d) Provision of all necessary local cable containment for the power

and control cables with all cables and associated cabling /

termination as required.

The Contractor shall provide the documentation including

equipment submission (with equipment specification), signal

strength calculation (i.e. link budget calculation), design / calculation

on coverage prediction / analysis, antenna mounting design

drawings, installation drawings and etc. to obtain review without

objection by the CAM Project Manager.

e) The Contractor shall base on the existing signal source to

design and develop the antenna network in order to strengthen

antenna signal to other blind spot areas in the fit-out locations.

f) The modification works on the existing system shall be carried

out by Others.


The voice and data cabling infrastructure design in the Extension

Project shall be modelled on the existing voice and data cabling

arrangement in MIA.

All outdoor cables for both copper and fibre cables, e.g. passing

through external ducts, if any, shall be armour-type cables suitable

for external outdoor use. No direct buried cable installation shall be

allowed.

All voice and data cabling outlets, fibre and copper termination

frames, media converters, junction boxes, termination boxes,

faceplates, etc. which are installed in exposed outdoor environment

shall be provided with suitable weather-proof housing by the

Contractor with a minimum standard of IP65 rating.

The Contractor shall develop, construct, programme, supply, deliver,

install, set up, test and commission the system works as hereunder

described, as well as any works not specifically mentioned but

required to complete the works.

The Contractor shall construct extra new IDF in the new ELV

room(s) which would take care all various signalling service and

networking provision under the fit-out provisions.



317

The design and implementation of new IDF, shall follow the local

code, international standard and industry requirement such as

ISO/IEC 11801, ISO/IEC 24764, TIA-942, etc. Where there is a

difference or conflict between such international standard and in the

Macau local codes, Macau local codes shall prevail.

The structure cabling system in the new PTB extension shall not be

separated from the existing structure cabling system. The design

shall connect or integrate the new system into the existing system

to form a complete System in order to allow a smooth and effective

operation in the PTB including its new extension, or even to other

buildings within MIA.

The scope of works of the Contract includes the following as a

minimum:

a) All cabling for airport systems described in this PTR including

all fibre and copper cables carrying voice, data or multimedia

traffic;

b) Supply, installation, diversion, testing and commissioning of

cabling components including but not be limited to the following

components as a minimum:

c) Multipair / UTP / STP copper cables;

d) Single mode / Multimode fibre cables;

e) Patch panels and patch cords;

f) Termination frames including mounting frames, termination

blocks and cable management modules for the termination

frames;

g) Data / voice / fibre socket outlets and faceplates;

h) Equipment cabinets in new IDF Room and/or closets

i) Equipment cabinet accessories such as cable management

rings, channels, wiring managers, in-cabinet containments,

ventilation fans, equipment shelves, raised floor tile grommets,

floor-cut-outs, etc;

j) All copper, coaxial and fibre cable connectors;

k) Termination boxes and back boxes;

l) Cross connecting cables for the jumpering of voice and data

connections across frame verticals;

m) Cable labelling, numbering and marker for all cables, patch

panels, equipment racks, frames, outlets, patch cords, etc; in



318

particular, all the external cables shall be labelled properly in

each drawpit at cable entry and exit points;

n) Final connections (jumpering / patching) from the new VDC

infrastructure to the existing infrastructure to connect necessary

circuits;

o) All other relevant accessories and sundry items required for the

complete operation of the VDC system; and

g) All cabling provisions shall be low smoke and fume (LSF/LSOH)

type and shall apply to optic fibre and Cat 5e or Cat 6 UTP

cables.

h) Voice and Data Outlets (VDO) and Distribution Frames in all

locations shall be marked on the Contractor’s Design Drawings.

i) Allocation and recording of the cable utilization records and

coordination of the utilization cable space and positioning in

risers, cable trays, cable ducts, etc, to ensure efficient and neat

utilization of commonly used cable routes. This shall include

but not be limited to BMS, ACS, CCTV, WLAN, FIDS, PA,

MATV, PABX, etc;

j) Installation of associated necessary items such as secondary

cable containment such as cable tray, conduit, trunking and

other such items will be required to connect to the backbone

tray and trunking scheme;

k) Contractor's Drawings (shop drawings, design calculations, etc);

l) As-built Record Drawings with the indication of cable length and

cable paths from the VDOs to the distribution frame;

m) Testing and commissioning of all system components; and

n) Operational and Maintenance Manual


Any works to be carried out by the Contractor shall not affect the

normal operation and current accepted performance of the system.

The works shall also be planned to minimize disturbance to the

airport operations, night time working may be required. The


work tasks.



319

The PA system provided at the PTB Extension shall be an

extension of the existing Bosch Digital PA System and be fully

operated within the PTB Extension both in system control and

management.

The Contractor shall include the engineering, design, development,

construction, supply, delivery, installation, fabrication, assembly, ,

installation set up, testing and commissioning, documentation,

training and warranty of the PA System.

Should there be any modification, reconfiguration, addition of Public

Address devices, the overall system performance of the existing PA

system shall not be degraded in any form and be carried out by

others

The Contractor shall obtain sufficient information from the supplier

or maintenance contractor or even site inspection of the existing PA

system to formulate the design criteria and concept and to ensure a

smooth integration/changeover to the extended PA system in PTB

Extension without service interruption.

The Contractor shall base on their design to install the PA System

equipment at the new IDA Room(s) and provide associated cabling

works for the field PA Speakers. Suitable quantity of PA system

equipment cabinet(s) shall be supplied and installed by the

Contractor.


a) Provide all system engineering and design necessary to

develop the complete systems such as system schematics,

hardware drawings, system diagrams, schedules and lists;

b) Provision of all necessary hardware

c) Provide design, supply, install and configuration of the

mounting brackets/poles and necessary accessories, which

shall be subject to review without objection by the CAM

Project Manager prior to manufacturing and installation;

d) Provision of all necessary local cable containment for the

power and control cables required;

e) Submit a detailed changeover plan with necessary

fallback/contingency plans for review without objection by

CAM Project Manager.

f) The modification works on existing system shall be carried

out by others.



320


The Contractor shall supply, install, configure, test and

commissioning the BMS installation, including provision of all

necessary hardware, software and associate software license,

testing at the manufacturer's works, delivery to Site, interfacing

work for other services, certificates and guarantees.

Should there be any modification, reconfiguration, addition of BMS

devices, the overall system performance in the existing BMS

system shall not be degraded in any form or causing implication to

the operations of the existing BMS system;

The Contractor shall include and provide all interface components

for BMS, including dry contacts, relay, high level interface, cables,

trunking, conduits and local I/O panel etc. to interface with the

Building Services (BS) / Electrical & Mechanical (E&M) equipment;

The Contractor shall be responsible for the completion of Building

Management System (BMS) as specified including but not be

limited to the following:

a) Supply and install the complete communication networks which

consist but not be limited to optical fibre cables, Cat 5e copper

cables, network switches, optical fibre transceiver and receiver

and routers. The BMS shall be interfaced to the existing BMS

system. The Contractor shall provide all the hardware and

software for transmitting and receiving BMS signals to and from

the PTB.

b) Supply and install of all necessary cables and cable

containment facilities (trunkings, conduits etc.) for the complete

system installation.

c) Supply and install all necessary field control cabling and

containment systems for cables run between the I/O panels and

monitoring/controlling devices;

d) Preparation of all colour graphical displays including system

schematic diagrams and all layout plans for the system from the

highest level (Site overview) to the lowest level (field

equipment). If the PTB extension layout shall be displayed at

the existing BMS Workstation, the graphical configuration works

shall be carried out by others.

e) Perform a full testing and commissioning of the complete

system.



321

f) Liaison and co-ordination with all interfacing disciplines for

testing and commissioning of the complete BMS system and

connected systems for building services and electrical &

mechanical plants and equipment installed in the PTB

extension generally.

g) Provision of full sets of operation and maintenance manuals for

all the equipment including hardware, software with licence and

the circuit diagrams, such that the end users shall be able to

modify the system to their needs without interaction to the

manufacture or vendor.

h) Provision of full training with not less than three sessions and at

minimum ten staff per session to the Employer’s staff for proper

operation and maintenance including circuit diagram description,

for the operators to self repair, maintain and trouble shoot the

system without the assistance from the Contractor. The training

shall enable the operators to achieve self-development and

modification of the entire BMS systems without consulting the

Contractor.

i) The Contractor shall be responsible for sourcing technical


management contracts and Operation & Maintenance manuals

to ascertain the details of the interface requirements, system

operation procedure and method.

j) Any works to be carried out by the Contractor shall not affect

the normal operation and current accepted performance of the

systems. The works shall also be planned to minimise

disturbance to the airport operations.

k) The Contractor is required to develop a full point schedule

listing the exact quantities of devices for each type of field

devices requested in the BMS Point Schedules according to the

respective E&M System if necessary. Such schedule shall

include the location of the I/O panel, and the field equipment

under the monitoring and control by the I/O PLC and I/O

module. The Contractor shall be required to design, supply and

install the BMS I/O panels, with sufficient quantities to control

and monitor all the field equipment type required in the BMS

Point Schedules;

The following typical point schedule is for reference:

System Signal Action

Escalator Emergency Stop Alarm



322

Fault Stop Alarm

Down Status

On/Off Status

Up Status

HVAC Temperature Measure

Exhaust Fan Control –

Start/Stop

Command

Exhaust Fan - Running Status

Jet Fan Control –

Start/Stop

Command

Jet Fan - Running Status

AC Unit - Running Status

AC Unit Common Alarm Status

ELV Call Circuit - Fail Alarm

Fire Alarm

Power Failure Alarm

Limit Exceeded Alarm

Passenger Emergency Alarm

Up Status

Down Status

Emergency Safety Circuit Alarm

Display Segment Status

Electrical Dist. Feeder CB – Open/Close Status

Incoming CB –

Open/Close

Status

Incoming HV CB –

Open/Close

Status

TX high Temp Trip Alarm

Max Demand Metering Metering

Lighting

Control

Circuit – ON/Off Status



323

Circuit - Control Command

Toilet Distress Alarm – On/Off Alarm

l) The Contractor shall submit for review without objection by the

CAM Project Manager all necessary documents, design

development, testing & commissioning results.

m) All modification and re-configuration works for the existing

Honeywell BMS shall be carried out by others.

Option A - Advance Visual Docking Guidance System (AVDGS)

Provision

The following equipment shall be designed, supplied, installed and

commissioned by the Contractor for the new parking stand with all

associated mountings, housings and necessary accessories:

a) AVDGS display unit (equipped with 3D-scanner and AVDGS

controllers /processors);

b) AVDGS Operator Panel with emergency stop button;

c) Optical transceiver and receiver; and

d) Associated transmission equipment and data/communications

cablings with secondary cable containment; and

e) Mounting and with all necessary fixing and housing for the

equipment.

The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the design,

development, manufacture, configuration, installation and testing &

commissioning of the system.

The AVDGS shall be building mounted which shall follow from the

same arrangement as the existing parking stands.

All new equipment to be supplied under this Contract shall integrate

into the existing AVDGS system.

The AVDGS system shall be required to interface with other

systems. The Contractor shall coordinate with other system

provisions to ensure the successful completion of the interfaces as

required.

Due to the specialist nature of the system, any integration works

shall be planned and coordinated with the Employer and Other



324

Contractors and will be submitted to the CAM Project Manager for

review without objection before the works are carried out.

The Contractor shall be responsible for sourcing technical


management contracts and Operation & Maintenance manuals to

ascertain the details of the interface requirements.

In order to maintain continuous services and not to disrupt the

normal operation of the airport terminal, night time working shall be

required for certain works which would cause downtime of the

affected system and affect the normal operation of the system. The


work tasks.



to, the followings:

– Single line schematics for the AVDGS system;





– O&M manuals.


The Contractor shall refer to all related international standards, code of

practices and guidelines for the inspection, testing and commissioning

of the aforementioned systems. The Contractor shall take into account

of, but not limited to, the following:

Systems requirements

a) All testing and commissioning shall be pre-planned and

scheduled in order that it is fully coordinated with other relevant

services and shall be carried out in a safe and efficient manner

with a minimum of inconvenience to all concerned.

b) The installation shall be tested progressively as construction

progresses and then finally on completion to ensure that the



325

installation complies with the requirements and operates

correctly under normal, emergency and fault conditions.

Control, protection and operative devices shall be checked for

correct adjustment and rating. Records of all testing shall be

kept and reviewed without objection by the CAM Project

Manager.

c) All equipment or materials found to be faulty during testing shall

either be replaced or repaired free of charge.

For cable testing, the Contractor shall:

a) Test all point to point wiring, where applicable.

b) Provide documentary evidence of all cable test results of point

to point wiring installation.

c) Report the extent of any failures identified during testing which

may affect the installation programme.

d) Correct any wiring faults discovered during the testing and

commissioning at no additional cost to the Contract.

The Contractor shall also note:

a) The installation shall be thoroughly tested by the Contractor so

as to ensure every point and item of plant is being controlled

and/or monitored correctly.

b) The Contractor shall carry out all of the tests and any other

tests required by the CAM Project Manager to demonstrate that

the complete system is fully operational and satisfactory, and in

accordance with the requirements of the PTS. The Contractor

shall provide all equipment and personnel required for the

testing and commissioning.

c) In the event of any test indicating failure to comply, that test and

those proceeding tests, the results of which may have been

influenced by the fault indicated, shall be repeated after the

fault has been rectified.

d) If failure to provide the required and reliable coverage for the

Extension Building areas, the Contractor shall be responsible

for modifying the proposed design to achieve the required

standard and specification at no additional cost.

e) It is a requirement that the system is tested and commissioned

by personnel who have gained an intimate understanding of the

project throughout its design stages. These personnel must

also have had at least five years of experience in the related



326

field. Should any commissioning personnel not meet these

requirements the Contractor shall apply and shall obtain review

without objection by the CAM Project Manager prior to allowing

the said commissioning persons on site.

f) The Contractor shall submit the testing and commissioning

details for the review without objection by the CAM Project

Manager before implementation.



327

10.1 Requirements

The LOD 300 definition used in the the fit-out BIM model will be in line

with the industry leading standard “Level of Development Specification

© 2015 by BIMForum“.

The “Level of Development Specification © 2015 by BIMForum“ could

be downloaded from:

http://bimforum.org/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/Files-1.zip

10.2 Software Requirements

The Contractor shall use Autodesk Revit 2015 to create the fit-out BIM

model.

10.3 Deliverable Requirements

The Contractor shall submit the native Autodesk Revit 2015 file for

CAM Project Manager.

The Design model is to be submitted with the detailed design

deliverable drawings.

The as-built model is to be submitted with the as-built drawings.

10 BIM Model Files

http://bimforum.org/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/Files-1.zip



328

11.1 Scope of Work

The Contractor shall be responsible for the civil works in the area

surrounding the Passenger Terminal Building extension, which shall

provide a paved interface between the Terminal Building extension and

the existing roads and car parks. The scope of the work shall include

design, construction, testing and commissioning of the following items:

Bus Staging Area layout and configuration;

Site clearance, and utility diversions if required;

Bus Staging Area pavement;

Footpath island pavement and pedestrian canopy;

Surface water drainage;

Perimeter fencing.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for:

Topographic, geotechnical and utility surveys, prior to undertaking

the works.

The Contractor shall note that the site area is currently classified as

“airside” but may temporarily revert to “landside” as part of the

commissioning of the Contractor’s works.

11.2 Design Standards

The following design standards shall apply:

Highway and pavement design: Macau DSAT Highways standards;

Road markings: Macau DSAT Highways standards;

Paving Blocks: BS 6717 Part 1 1986;

Hot-Rolled Asphalt: BS EN 13108-4 and BS 594987;

Surface water drainage: Serviço de Abastecimento de Á guas de

Macau (SAAM) – Supply Rules and Relevant Water Supply

Ordinance;

Manhole covers: BS EN 124:1994;

Pedestrian Canopy: refer to Structural section;

Chain-link fences: BS 1722 Part 1; BS 4848 Parts 2 and 4.

The Contractor shall ensure all working methods and material

selections minimise the risk of debris occurring in the airside areas,

which may later lead to damage to airside equipment or aircraft (known

11 Specifications and Standards for Civil Works



329

as “Foreign Object Damage” or “FOD”), e.g. the risk of spalling concrete

shall be minimised by sealing joints and chamfering edges of exposed

concrete.


11.3.1 Surveys and Inspections

The Contractor shall carry out all surveys deemed necessary to

understand the existing constraints, facilities etc. and to minimise

disturbance of existing facilities during construction of the works. The

surveys shall include:

topographic survey;

below-ground utility survey, and

geotechnical investigation to determine the subgrade type and

subgrade bearing capacity for pavement design purposes.

Prior to the commencement of site clearance and demolition, and after

completion, the Contractor shall undertake joint inspections with the

CAM Project Manager of all existing structures to be retained within the

Site and produce a Condition Survey Report submitted to the CAM

Project Manager for review. Any damage noted to the structures during

the second inspection shall be made good by the Contractor to the

satisfaction of the Project Manager. Photographic records, taken by the

Contractor and reviewed without objection by the Project Manager,

shall be kept as part of the joint inspection.

11.3.2 Bus Staging Area Layout and Configuration

The Contractor shall design the Bus Staging Area to accommodate 8nr

bus parking spaces adjacent to the terminal building extension, and 4nr

remote bus parking spaces.

The design passenger bus shall be the Cobus 3000, or as otherwise

agreed with the CAM Project Manager.

The layout shall take into account the safe manoeuvring of the buses

and the swept path of the buses during their manoeuvring in and out of

the parking spaces. The Contractor shall use swept path analysis



330

software such as AutoTrack for this purpose and present the swept

path analysis drawing to the CAM Project Manager for review.

The Contractor shall design the road layout and road markings in

accordance with Macau DSAT highway standards. The markings

design shall take into account the existing road markings, traffic

direction, traffic speeds, sightlines, proposed bus manoeuvring and

access into the loading dock (currently being constructed by others).

The proposed road markings layout design shall be agreed with the

CAM Project Manager before implementation.

11.3.3 Site Clearance and Utilities

Following the topographic and below-ground utility survey, the

Contractor shall propose the facilities to be removed, diverted or

retained and agree them with the CAM Project Manager prior to

commencing the site clearance works. As a minimum, the Contractor

shall break out and remove existing pavement/hard-standing/spoil

within the footprint of the new pavement area, and carry out earthworks

to excavate and remove existing fill material, to facilitate the pavement

construction. The Contractor shall note that the existing concrete

pavement in the remote bus staging area is a temporary pavement and

shall be removed.

For any live utilities crossing the site and affected by the construction

works, the Contractor shall design and construct temporary or

permanent protection, or diversions to their routing. Any phasing for

this work shall be agreed with the CAM Project Manager before

implementation. Any unchartered utilities shall be recorded and the

scope of protection or diversion work shall be subject to agreement with

the CAM Project Manager.

Any existing chambers, or any new chambers required as part of a

proposed diversion of existing utilities, shall have a cover and frame

specified as E600 loading category.

11.3.4 Bus Staging Area Pavement

The Contractor shall design and construct highway pavement to serve

the Bus Staging Area. The pavement system shall comprise

interlocking precast concrete paving blocks laid on bedding sand and a

lean concrete base, or other material system (e.g. asphalt pavement)



331

proposed by the Contractor and agreed with the CAM Project Manager.

The blocks shall be suitable for vehicle loading and joints between

paving blocks shall be filled with a joint sealing compound.

The pavement design method shall follow an appropriate Macau

highways standard design method proposed by the Contractor and

agreed with the CAM Project Manager.

The pavement design life shall be 40 years (or 20 years if an asphalt

pavement system is used) and shall cater for an appropriate number of

standard axle passes over the design life, as determined by the

Contractor and agreed with the CAM Project Manager. The subgrade

strength shall be determined by the Contractor from the geotechnical

investigation. For asphalt pavement (if used), the Contractor shall

propose the asphalt mix properties and the mix design.

Earthworks shall be carried out as follows prior to the pavement works.

Topsoil, grass, and other organic matter shall be removed. Soft spots,

boulders and other materials which are unsuitable or unstable shall be

removed. The Contractor shall prepare the formation by compacting

suitable fill material in layers to a stable condition as soon as

practicable after deposition, to achieve the required in-situ density as

specified in the selected design method.

Prior to commencement of block paving construction, the Contractor

shall construct a trial area of at least 500m². The trial will be used to

determine the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment, placement

methods and ability to meet the specified tolerances

The pavement grading shall be designed to effectively drain, with

minimum gradient of 0.5% and maximum gradient of 5% falling towards

new or existing surface water drainage gullies or channels. There shall

be no flat spots and no ponding water. The pavement levels shall

match surrounding kerb levels and pavement levels at the interface

points and shall permit a smooth transition to existing pavement

gradients, i.e. no abrupt change of gradient and no level difference.

Where the pavement will interface with the footpath currently being

constructed by others, the pavement shall tie-in to the underside of kerb

level along the new footpath, allowing a kerb height of 125mm.

The Contractor shall provide new road markings for the bus parking

spaces and other required markings using highways-grade

thermoplastic paint proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the CAM



332

Project Manager. Marking details such as colour, setting-out etc. shall

follow Macau DSAT highway standards.

11.3.5 Footpath Island and Pedestrian Canopy

The Contractor shall design and construct a footpath island as an

extension of the footpath currently being built by others. The paving

material and kerb heights shall match the footpath currently being built

by others.

The Contractor shall design and construct a pedestrian canopy as a

free-standing structure but continuing the alignment of the canopy

currently being built by others. The visual appearance including

structural form, material selection, colour, steel member sizes etc. shall

match the canopy currently being built by others. The canopy shall be

sufficient to protect pedestrians from rain but shall not obstruct the

sightlines for vehicles using the road or bus staging area, and shall be

high enough not to strike buses or other road vehicles.

The canopy shall be drained using downpipes discharging to the

surface water drainage system.

11.3.6 Surface Water Drainage

The Contractor shall survey the existing surface water drainage network

and assess its condition and its capacity for accommodating the

discharge from the new bus staging area.

The Contractor shall design surface water drainage to serve the new

catchment. Such new drainage shall comprise gullies, drainage

channels, pipes and the like, to achieve the following criteria:

No ponding after a 100 year return period storm;

Self-cleansing velocity of 1m/s.

The Contractor shall be responsible for temporary drainage during the

construction works and shall agree the temporary drainage scheme

with the CAM Project Manager prior to implementation.

11.3.7 Perimeter Fencing

The Contractor shall provide an airside security fence along the

perimeter of the bus staging area. The design shall match the existing



333

fence details and the new fence shall integrate seamlessly with the

existing fence.


11.4.1 General

This document is intended to be a guideline for the required testing and

commissioning for the civil works. The Contractor shall be

responsible for preparing and submitting a fully detailed testing and

commissioning (T&C) specification for the works, as part of his quality

plan which shall be submitted to the CAM Project Manager for review.

11.4.2 Pavement Formation

The following tests shall be included in the T&C Plan for earthworks:

Moisture content;

Particle Size Distribution;

Maximum Dry Density and In-Situ Dry Density to determine Relative

Compaction;

Bearing strength tests e.g. CBR value as required by the selected

design method.

11.4.3 Pavement Works

All pavement materials shall be subject to testing of their material

properties before being selected for use and at regular intervals during

the construction.

Level survey of the finished course shall be performed by the

Contractor at all changes of gradient and on a 5m grid. Finished

pavement levels shall be within a tolerance of +/-6mm from their design

level.

The finished surface course shall be tested for surface regularity on a

grid layout agreed with the CAM Project Manager using a rolling

straightedge. The finished surface of each course shall not vary in

regularity by more than 4mm per 3m.

All paving blocks shall be visually inspected to ensure that no joint

spacing or differences in level between adjacent paving blocks exceed

the absolute maximum specified.

For asphalt paving materials (if used), the mixture shall be tested per

batch for particle size distribution, bitumen content and specific gravity.

After placement, cores shall be extracted from the asphalt pavement



334

and tested for compaction, layer thickness, air voids content and the

like, as required in accordance with the selected pavement design

method and technical specification. Granular sub-base courses shall

be tested for in-situ density (relative compaction).

11.4.4 Drainage Works

The cleanliness, bore, linearity and joints of pipelines of 450 mm

diameter or less shall be checked by pulling a mandrel through the

completed pipeline, or parts of the pipeline if permitted by the CAM

Project Manager, after cleaning. The mandrel shall be 750 mm long and

12 mm less in diameter than the nominal diameter of the pipe.

Batches of pipes and fittings shall be tested for their material properties.

Gravity pipelines shall be tested by water test or air test after the pipes

have been jointed and the bedding has been placed and immediately

before haunch or surround is placed or fill material is deposited; and

after haunch and surround has been placed and fill material has been

deposited and compacted.

11.4.5 Fencing Works

The commissioning shall include security matters related to converting

the landside site to “airside”. The commissioning of the perimeter

fencing will not be deemed to be complete until the site has been

restored to “airside” category. The Contractor shall phase the works in

a manner agreed with the CAM Project Manager and other related

stakeholders to ensure the site complies with all aviation security

aspects at all times.



335

12.1 Introduction

The Contractor shall build one (1) set of new Remote Boarding Gate

at new loading bridge for facilitating the normal boarding operation and

avoid excessive concentration of passengers at north remote

boarding gates in Departure Airside level. The Remote Boarding

Gates shall be connected to the existing Passenger Boarding Bridges.

The Contractor shall provide all required professional provisions to the

design works, site survey, off-site fabrication and site

construction/installation of the aforesaid 1 set of Remote Boarding

Gate and its interfacing.

The Contractor shall provide for CAM Project Manager’s approval the

preliminary design and final design reports that include the

structural/foundation design, design calculations, all plans, sections,

elevations, interior & exterior finishing schedule, and related E&M

system, etc. for construction. The contractor shall also consider the

theme of “Cultural Airport” and other aviation elements, reflecting

the current architectural themes inside the terminal building and

aviation elements. Moreover, all design work shall comply with the

legislation and technical regulations of Macau SAR.

Design reports must be signed by Macau registered Engineer and

architectural drawings must be signed by Macau Registered

Architect, complying with current ICAO/IATA standards if necessary.

Three dimensional (3D) views showing the overall effect to the adjacent

MIA facilities/buildings shall be required. Declaration letters of Design

Engineer(s) and Architect(s) registered at DSSOPT, namely

affidavit, must be provided to prove relevant design qualifications in civil,

electrical, HVAC, fire service design, etc. All designs and drawings

must be signed by aforesaid engineer(s) and architect

The Contractor shall perform the physical works based on the approved

final design including but not limited to the following items for

completing the Remote Boarding Gates;

Civil, Structure and Builder’s Works

- All necessary removal/ demolition/ diversion works;

- Ground works;

12 Remote Boarding Gate (Optional)



336

- Foundation works;

- Roofing system and waterproofing system;

- External works (e.g. pavement, service utilities, etc.);

Electrical & Mechanical Systems

- Electrical system;

- Communication system;

- HVAC system;

- Fire services system and Drainage system;

- Necessary electrical & mechanical works;

Specialist systems

- Signage system;

- Public Address system;

- CCTV system.

Declaration letters of Instruction Engineer(s) registered in DSSOPT as

instruction category, namely affidavit, must be provided to prove

relevant instructing qualifications in the construction works.

See Architectural Appendix 11 for reference on image.

12.2 Technical Requirement

- These remote boarding gates will be constructed at the

emergency stairs connecting the existing boarding bridges at

aircraft parking stands . The gross floor area shall be ascertained and

specified by the bidder after site investigation. The construction works

are basically to build a cover on the emergency stairs of the existing

boarding bridges so that they can be used for remote boarding

purposes. Therefore, it is suggested to use a metallic structure and

glass envelope similar to the existing boarding bridges and MIA

Passenger Terminal Building Facades;



337

- The Contractor shall measure the existing emergency staircase on

site and calculate the exact dimension of cover during the design phase;

- Stairs finishing material should be the same as that of boarding

bridges floor;

- The Contractor shall take the responsibility to review the original

structure design calculation of exiting boarding bridges emergency

stairs and must reinforce the structure if it is required after checking.

- The covered remote gate should have one door at the access to the

fixed boarding bridge. The remote gate should have two doors at the

bottom: One for passenger boarding to Co-Bus and one for emergency

exit;

- A parking area for Co-bus should be considered;

- Air-conditioning and Electrical system shall be installed inside

the gate cover accordingly;

- The Contractor shall optimize the land usage to enable passengers

walking in a smooth flow and undisrupted manner;

- The staircase should have some windows for natural lighting;



338

13.1 Introduction

The Contractor is responsible to supply, furnish all labour, equipment

and film materials to perform the work necessary for completing the

project stipulations. The Contractor shall take site visit for actual

measurement and get familiar with the project premises and analyze

the effect on existing conditions during their service period which will

affect ongoing execution of work. The Contractor shall ensure no

misunderstanding arises as to the character or as to the extent of the

work to be done, and shall advise and acquaint themselves with all

precautions to be taken in order to avoid injury to person or property of

another. No additional compensation will be granted to the Contractor

because of any unusual difficulties or CAM Project Manager’s special

requests that may be encountered in the execution of any portion of the

work. The scope of works under this Contract shall include but not

limited to the following:

See Architectural Appendix 6 for reference on image and location.

The Contractor shall be responsible to fabricate the approved

decorative film as specified in the B.Q. and to place the film on Upper

Part of glass façade in the North Extension Airside Departure Hall.

Details of the design theme shall be provided after contract award.

A mock-up on selected section is required for approval prior to

implementation of entire replacement works.

13.2 Work requirements

-The decorative (solar) film shall be 3M brand or equivalent products as

specified in the Bill of Quantities. The bidder must provide technical

submission and project catalogue in supporting the quality of the

proposed products during the tendering stage.

-In general, the applied decorative film shall be suitable for application

to interior glass, exterior glass and panel surface and perfect in

decorative and architectural applications. The proposed decorative film

or decorative vinyl should be of high quality and best fit for the localized

application and design graphics.

13 Decorative Solar Film Replacement on Upper Part of Glass Façade in the Airside Departure Hall



339

-The film material should be excellent in abrasion and chemical

resistance, dimensionally stable, and should repel stain coatings and be

non-flammable.

-For the filming on the terminal façade, additional features shall be

possessed, namely resistance against prolonged sunlight exposure and

temperature control.

-The adhesive method and workmanship should follow the industry

standard and supplier’s recommendations.

-The applied solar film should block 99% UV rays, reduce heat (at least

40%) and glare, possess low-emissivity for improving the insulation

properties.



340

14.1 Requirements

The Contractor shall in accordance with any instruction issued during

the Defects Liability Period:

a) Investigate the cause of any defect, imperfection or fault related

to the work under the Contract; and

b) Execute maintenance work including any work of replacement,

repair, rectification and making good any defect, imperfection,

settlement or other fault (whether intermittent or otherwise) identified

before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. The work shall be

executed within such period as instructed, or in the absence of such

instruction, as soon as is practicable.

All the above work shall be fully finished before the completion of the

Defect Liability Period.

14 Rectification of Defect Requirements during Defects Liability Period



341

Appendices

Appendix A. Concept Layout ___________________________________________________________________ 342 Appendix B. Room Area and Finishes Schedule ____________________________________________________ 343 Appendix C. Architectural Appendix _____________________________________________________________ 344 Appendix D. Room Data Sheets ________________________________________________________________ 345 Appendix E. Scope of Works carried out by Contract RFQ-198 ________________________________________ 346 Appendix F. Drawings ________________________________________________________________________ 350 Appendix G. Demolition _______________________________________________________________________ 363 Appendix H. Requirements of Statutory and Detailed Design Documents ________________________________ 365 Appendix I. Requirements of Construction Documents ______________________________________________ 367 Appendix J. Requirements of As-built Documents __________________________________________________ 370 Appendix K. Requirements of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual and user Manual __________________ 372



342

A.1 Concept Layout

Drawing Number Drawing Title

MMH-365511-A-C-000-1100

CONCEPT LAYOUT GROUND FLOOR (ARRIVAL LEVEL)

MMH-365511-A-C-000-1200

CONCEPT LAYOUT M FLOOR (STERILE CORRIDOR LEVEL)

MMH-365511-A-C-000-1300

CONCEPT LAYOUT 1 FLOOR (DEPARTURE LEVEL)

MMH-365511-A-C-000-1400

CONCEPT LAYOUT 2 FLOOR (MEZZANINE LEVEL)

MMH-365511-A-C-000-1500

CONCEPT LAYOUT 3 FLOOR (OFFICE LEVEL)

MMH-365511-C-0001-0

CIVIL WORKS LAYOUT

Please refer to the A1 Concept Layout folder

Appendix A. Concept Layout



343

Please refer to the B Room Area and finishes schedule folder

Appendix B. Room Area and Finishes Schedule



344

Please refer to the C Architectural Appendix folder

Appendix C. Architectural Appendix



345

The room data sheets (RDS) provided in this document is for reference

only. The Contractor shall further develop the details and consult all

related stakeholders to finalise the requirements in the design before

implementation.

The finalised RDS shall be confirmed by CAM Project Manager before

proceeding into construction / implementation.

Please refer to the D Room Data Sheets folder

Appendix D. Room Data Sheets



346

Appendix E. Scope of Works carried out by Contract RFQ-198



347



348



349



350

F.1 Contract RFQ-198 Drawings for Information

The drawings from the PTB extension contract RFQ-198 is provided for

reference. They are subjected to further development as the

construction is currently in progress.

The Contractor shall coordinate with the RFQ-198 contractor for the

details during all stage of this project.

Please refer to the D2 Drawings for Information folder

F.1.1 Architectural


AR-001 Location Plan

AR-002 Master Plan

AR-003 Axes Setting Out Plan

AR-004(a) Arrival Level Plan (a)

AR-004(b) Arrival Level Plan (b)

AR-005(a) Sterile Corridor Plan (a)

AR-005(b) Sterile Corridor Plan (b)

AR-006(a) Departure Level Plan (a)

AR-006(b) Departure Level Plan (b)

AR-007(a) Mezzanine Level Plan (a)

AR-007(b) Mezzanine Level Plan (b)

AR-008(a) Office Level Plan (a)

AR-008(b) Office Level Plan (b)

AR-009(a) Roof Level Plan (a)

AR-009(b) Roof Level Plan (b)

AR-010 Setction A-A & Section B-B

AR-011 Setction C-C & Section D-D

AR-012 Elevation N1-N5 & Elevation N5-N1

AR-013 Elevation NA-NJ & Elevation NJ-NA

AR-014 Elevation Dimensions N1~N5

AR-015 Elevation Dimensions N5~N1

AR-016 Elevation Dimensions NA~ND

Appendix F. Drawings



351

AR-017 Elevation Dimension NE~NJ

AR-018 Elevation Dimension NJ~NE

AR-019 Elevation Dimension ND~NA

AR-020 Stair - STR1 - Plans & Section



AR-023 Typical Details of Stairs

AR-024 Roof Details

AR-025 Expansion Joints Details

AR-026 Doors & Windows Schedule (1)

AR-027 Doors & Windows Schedule (2)

AR-028 Express Link Fencing & Gate Plan & Elevations

AR-029 Express Link Fencing & Sliding Gate Details

AR-030 Glass Balustrade Details

AR-031 Elevator Pit Ladder Details

AR-032 Water Tank Access Door and Ladder Details

AR-033 Indoor Manhole / Road and Walk-way Details

AR-034 Pavement Details

AR-035 Traffic Signage



352

F.1.2 HVAC


NF-AC-001 LEGEND, SYMBOL AND ABBREVIATION – I

NF-AC-002 LEGEND, SYMBOL AND ABBREVIATION – II

NF-AC-011 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE– I

NF-AC-012 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE– II

NF-AC-013 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE– III

NF-AC-014 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE– IV

NF-AC-015 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE– V

NF-AC-201A HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ARRIVAL LEVEL (A)

NF-AC-201B HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ARRIVAL LEVEL (B)

NF-AC-202A HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (A)

NF-AC-202B HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (B)

NF-AC-203A HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR DEPARTURE LEVEL (A)

NF-AC-203B HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR DEPARTURE LEVEL (B)

NF-AC-204A HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR MEZZANINE LEVEL (A)

NF-AC-204B HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR MEZZANINE LEVEL (B)

NF-AC-205A HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (A)

NF-AC-205B HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (B)

NF-AC-206A HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL (A)

NF-AC-206B HVAC AIR SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL (B)

NF-AC-402A HVAC WATER SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (A)

NF-AC-402B HVAC WATER SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (B)

NF-AC-403 HVAC WATER SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-AC-404 HVAC WATER SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR MEZZANINE LEVEL



353

NF-AC-405A HVAC WATER SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (A)

NF-AC-405B HVAC WATER SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (B)

NF-AC-406 HVAC WATER SIDE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL

NF-AC-501 AIR SIDE SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

NF-AC-502 WATER SIDE SYSTEM DIAGRAMS– I

NF-AC-503 WATER SIDE SYSTEM DIAGRAMS– II

NF-AC-504 AIR BALANCING DIAGRAM AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-AC-505 AIR BALANCING DIAGRAM AT STERILE CORRIDOR

NF-AC-506 AIR BALANCING DIAGRAM AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-AC-507 AIR BALANCING DIAGRAM AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-AC-508 AIR BALANCING DIAGRAM AT OFFICE LEVEL

NF-AC-601 INSTALLATION DETAIL– I

NF-AC-701 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS– I

NF-AC-702 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS– II

NF-AC-703 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS– III

NF-AC-706 LMCP SCHEDULE– I

NF-AC-707 LMCP SCHEDULE– II



354

F.1.3 Electrical Services System


NF-EL-001 LEGEND AND ABBREVIATION

NF-EL-101 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (HV)

NF-EL-102 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (LV)

NF-EL-103 LV SWITCHBORAD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-EL-104 EXIT SIGN AND STAIRCASE LIGHTING SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-EL-105 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

NF-EL-106 UPS SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-EL-110 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DETAIL - I

NF-EL-111 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DETAIL - II

NF-EL-112 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DETAIL - III

NF-EL-113 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DETAIL -IV

NF-EL-201A LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-201B LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-202 LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR

NF-EL-202A LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (A)

NF-EL-202B LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (B)

NF-EL-203A LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-203B LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-204A LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-204B LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-205A LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-205B LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-206A LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL (A)



355

NF-EL-206B LIGHTING LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-300 11KV CABLE ROUTE LAYOUT PLAN

NF-EL-301A ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-301B ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-302 ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR

NF-EL-303A ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-303B ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-304A ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-304B ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-305A ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-305B ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-306A ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT ROOF LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-306B ELECTRICAL POWER LAYOUT PLAN AT ROOF LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-401A CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-401B CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-402A CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR (A)

NF-EL-402B CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR (B)

NF-EL-403A CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-403B CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-404A CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-404B CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-405A CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL (A)



356

NF-EL-405B CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-406 CABLE CONTAINMENT LAYOUT PLAN AT ROOF LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-501A EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-501B EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-502A EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR (A)

NF-EL-502B EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR (B)

NF-EL-503A EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-503B EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-504A EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (A)

NF-EL-504B EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL (B)

NF-EL-505A EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL(A)

NF-EL-505B EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL(B)

NF-EL-506 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING LAYOUT PLAN AT ROOF LEVEL

NF-EL-701 INSTALLATION DETAILS - I

NF-EL-702 INSTALLATION DETAILS - II



357

F.1.4 Plumbing System


NF-AG-001 LEGEND, SYMBOL AND ABBREVIATION

NF-AG-201A PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR ARRIVAL LEVEL (A)

NF-AG-201B PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR ARRIVAL LEVEL (B)

NF-AG-202A PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (A)

NF-AG-202B PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (B)

NF-AG-203A PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR DEPARTURE LEVEL (A)

NF-AG-203B PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR DEPARTURE LEVEL (B)

NF-AG-204A PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR MEZZANINE LEVEL (A)

NF-AG-204B PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR MEZZANINE LEVEL (B)

NF-AG-205A PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (A)

NF-AG-205B PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (B)

NF-AG-206A PLUMBING LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL (A)

NF-AG–501 PLUMBING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-AG–601 INSTALLATION DETAILS – I

NF-AG–602 INSTALLATION DETAILS – II



358

F.1.5 Drainage System


NF-EG-001 LEGEND, SYMBOL AND ABBREVIATION

NF-EG-011 SCHEDULE

NF-EG-201A DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ARRIVAL LEVEL (A)

NF-EG-201B DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ARRIVAL LEVEL (B)

NF-EG-202A DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (A)

NF-EG-202B DRAINAGE LAYOWUT PLAN FOR STERILE CORRIDOR (B)

NF-EG-203A DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR DEPARTURE LEVEL (A)

NF-EG-203B DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR DEPARTURE LEVEL (B)

NF-EG-204A DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR MEZZANINE LEVEL (A)

NF-EG-204B DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR MEZZANINE LEVEL (B)

NF-EG-205A DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (A)

NF-EG-205B DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR OFFICE LEVEL (B)

NF-EG-206A DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL (A)

NF-EG-206B DRAINAGE LAYOUT PLAN FOR ROOF LEVEL (B)

NF-EG-501A DRAINAGE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – I

NF-EG-501B DRAINAGE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – II

NF-EG-501C DRAINAGE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – III

NF-EG–502 RAIN WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-EG–601 INSTALLATION DETAILS – I

NF-EG–602 INSTALLATION DETAILS – II

NF-EG-603 INSTALLATION DETAILS – III



359

F.1.6 ELV Systems


NF-ELV-101 CCTV SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-ELV-102 PA SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-ELV-103 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-ELV-104 WLAN SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-ELV-105 RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-ELV-106 VOICE/DATA CABLING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-ELV-107 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NF-ELV-201 CCTV SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-202 CCTV SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR

NF-ELV-203 CCTV SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-204 CCTV SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-ELV-205 CCTV SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL

NF-ELV-206 CCTV SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ROOF LEVEL

NF-ELV-301 PA SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-302 PA SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR

NF-ELV-303 PA SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-304 PA SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-ELV-305 PA SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL

NF-ELV-401 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-402 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT STERRILE CORRIDOR

NF-ELV-403 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-404 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-ELV-405 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT



360

OFFICE LEVEL

NF-ELV-406 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ROOF LEVEL

NF-ELV-501 WLAN SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-502 WLAN SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT STERRILE CORRIDOR

NF-ELV-503 WLAN SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-504 WLAN SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-ELV-505 WLAN SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL

NF-ELV-601 RADIO COMMUNICATION LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-602 RADIO COMMUNICATION LAYOUT PLAN AT STERRILE CORRIDOR

NF-ELV-603 RADIO COMMUNICATION LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-604 RADIO COMMUNICATION LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-ELV-605 RADIO COMMUNICATION LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL

NF-ELV-701 VOICE/DATA CABLING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-702 VOICE/DATA CABLING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR

NF-ELV-703 VOICE/DATA CABLING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-704 VOICE/DATA CABLING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-ELV-705 VOICE/DATA CABLING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL

NF-ELV-801 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-802 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT STERILE CORRIDOR

NF-ELV-803 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-804 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL



361

NF-ELV-805 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL

NF-ELV-806 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM POINT SCHEDULE

NF-ELV-901 MAIN TRUNKING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT ARRIVAL LEVEL

NF-ELV-902 MAIN TRUNKING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT DEPARTURE LEVEL

NF-ELV-903 MAIN TRUNKING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT MEZZANINE LEVEL

NF-ELV-904 MAIN TRUNKING SYSTEM LAYOUT PLAN AT OFFICE LEVEL



362

F.1.7 Fire Services System


NF-FS‐001 Fire Service Diagram

NF-FS‐002a/b Arrival Level Plan

NF-FS‐003a/b Sterile Corridor Plan

NF-FS‐004a/b Departure Level Plan

NF-FS‐005a/b Mezzanine Level Plan

NF-FS‐006a/b Office Level Plan

NF-FS‐007a/b Roof Level Plan

NF-FS‐D‐001 Hose Reel and fire hydrant installation detail

NF-FS‐D‐002 sprinkler installation detail

NF-FS‐D‐003 Fire inlet and street hydrant installation deta

NF-FS‐D‐004 Dry fire devices installation detail



363

G.1 Departure Level

Demolition and modification of existing part of Passenger Terminal

Building and re-build a wall within an existing room (room 11065,

highlighted in yellow colour) on departure level, please refer to Bill of

Quantities – Bill Nr. 3 for details:

Appendix G. Demolition and A&A Works



364

G.2 Mezzanine Level

Demolition, modification and expansion of existing room (room 12061,

highlighted in yellow colour) of Passenger Terminal Building on Mezzanine

level, please refer to Bill of Quantities – Bill Nr. 3 for details:



365

H.1 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT

The Contractor shall provide drawings in electronic format as required

in the following clauses.

H.2 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

H.2.1 Drawing Submission Schedule

The Contractor shall submit a statutory and detailed design drawing submission schedule and programme to CAM. The Contractor shall allow reasonable time in the programme for vetting of the installation drawings by CAM and for drawing resubmissions as necessary. The Contractor shall submit to the CAM a comprehensive “Submission Schedule” of installation drawings and builder’s work drawings within 2 weeks after the acceptance of Tender, taking into account of the overall programme of the Installations including any Specialist Works and works by the utility undertakings. No equipment shall be delivered to the Site and no Installations shall be executed until the installation drawings have been checked by CAM without any objection. The Contractor shall ensure that installation drawings and builder’s work drawings are progressively submitted in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”.

The Contractor shall provide at least 7 hard copies and one electronic

copy, unless otherwise specified in the Contract or the Sub-contract as

appropriate, of the installation drawings to CAM for distribution.

H.2.2 Size of statutory and detailed design Drawings

For statutory submissions, the Contractor shall follow the Macau regulations for the drawing scale and size. Design and construction drawings submitted by the Contractor shall only be of standard sizes from A0 to A4 or B1 size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.

H.2.3 Contents of statutory and detailed design Documents and

Drawings

The Contractor shall provide all statutory and detailed design report, specifications, calculations and drawings with contents according to requirements as stated in design brief and all AACM/DSSOPT requirements including but not limit to the requirements in guidelines and manuals as follows:-

Appendix H. Requirements of Statutory and Detailed Design Documents



366

(a) <Conjunto de Instruções para Elaboração de Projectos de

Obras de Construção e de Ampliação>

a. <Á rea de Arquitectura> b. <Á rea da Engenharia Electromecânica> c. <Á rea de Gases Combustíveis ou de Combustíveis> d. <Á rea de Engenharia Civil>

(b) <Instruções para Apreciação, Aprovação, Vistoria e Operação

dos Equipamentos de Elevadores>

(c) <Directrizes para os Projectos de Iluminação Pública de

Macau>

(d) <Manual de Procedimentos Técnicos para Conservação de

Energia em Edifícios de Macau>

(e) <Critérios de Apreciação de Projectos de Obras de Construção

e de Ampliação e Instruções de Procedimentos

Administrativos>

The Contractor shall ensure all statutory and detailed design drawings are accurate representation of the Installations, before submitting them to CAM. All installation drawings shall be fully dimensioned and suitably scaled showing construction, sizes, weights, arrangements, operating clearances and performance characteristics. The statutory and detailed design drawings shall be dimensioned and

showing construction, sizes, weights, arrangements, operating clearances, performance characteristics and the necessary builder’s work involved. Installation drawings for conduit layout shall clearly indicate the proposed position and size of conduit runs together with the number of cables, size and circuiting of the cables therein.

H.2.4 Statutory and Detailed Design Documents and Drawings

Unless otherwise agreed by CAM, the Contractor shall submit the detailed design documents and drawing to the CAM in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”, 7 copies of drawings showing details of all detailed design work required



367

I.1 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT



I.2 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

I.2.1 Drawing Submission Schedule

The Contractor shall submit a detailed installation drawing submission schedule and programme to CAM. The Contractor shall allow reasonable time in the programme for vetting of the installation drawings by CAM and for drawing resubmissions as necessary. The Contractor shall submit to the CAM a comprehensive “Submission Schedule” of installation drawings and builder’s work drawings within 2 weeks after the acceptance of Tender, taking into account of the overall programme of the Installations including any Specialist Works and works by the utility undertakings. No equipment shall be delivered to the Site and no Installations shall be executed until the installation drawings have been checked by CAM without any objection. The Contractor shall ensure that installation drawings and builder’s work drawings are progressively submitted in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”.

The Contractor shall provide at least 7 hard copies and one electronic

copy, unless otherwise specified in the Contract or the Sub-contract as

appropriate, of the installation drawings to CAM for distribution.

I.2.2 Size of Installation Drawings

For statutory submissions, the Contractor shall follow the Macau regulations for the drawing scale and size.

Installation/Construction Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall only be of standard sizes from A0 to A4 or B1 size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.

I.2.3 Contents of Installation Documents and Drawings

The Contractor shall provide all Installation documents including but not limit to material submissions, schedules, proposals, calculations, method statements, samples and drawings with contents according to requirements as stated in design brief and all DSSOPT requirements including but not limit to the requirements in guidelines and manuals as follows:-

Appendix I. Requirements of Construction Documents



368


Obras de Construção e de Ampliação>

a. <Á rea de Arquitectura> b. <Á rea da Engenharia Electromecânica> c. <Á rea de Gases Combustíveis ou de Combustíveis> d. <Á rea de Engenharia Civil>




Macau>





Administrativos>

The Contractor shall ensure all installation drawings are accurate representation of the Installations, before submitting them to CAM. All installation drawings shall be fully dimensioned and suitably scaled showing construction, sizes, weights, arrangements, operating clearances and performance characteristics. Installation drawings shall be dimensioned and showing construction, sizes, weights, arrangements, operating clearances, performance characteristics and the necessary builder’s work involved. Installation drawings for conduit layout shall clearly indicate the proposed position and size of conduit runs together with the number of cables, size and circuiting of the cables therein.

I.2.4 Builder’s Work Documents and Drawings

Unless otherwise agreed by CAM, the Contractor shall submit the builder’s work drawing to the CAM in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”, 7 copies of drawings showing details of all builder’s work required e.g. the weight and the load on each support of equipment. Such drawings shall clearly indicate the details and positions of all openings, holes, trenches, ducts and cutting required and construction details for plinths and equipment bases.

I.2.5 Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings

The manufacturer’s shop drawings are drawings for equipment or plant to be manufactured by a specialist manufacturing supplier in their own workshops and places away from the Site.

The drawings shall show detailed construction, principal dimensions,

weights and clearances for maintenance, etc. Immediately after placing

of any order or at any event within 4 weeks unless otherwise approved



369

in writing by CAM, the Contractor shall forward to CAM for comment, 4

copies of manufacturer’s shop drawings indicating detailed construction,

principal dimensions and weights, clearances for withdrawals and/or

cleaning, etc. No Installations shall proceed on or off Site unless

drawings requiring approval are so approved in writing by CAM.



370

J.1 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT



J.2 Submission of As–built Drawings

The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the first draft prints of as-built drawings upon construction completion in accordance with the Contract

to CAM for checking. CAM after checking the above draft prints shall

return one set of the marked up copies of these as-built drawings to the Contractor with comments. The Contractor shall within a further 21 days from the date of receiving the CAM’s comments on the draft as-built drawings re-submit to CAM for his review another 3 sets of the second draft prints of as-built drawings with CAM’s comments incorporated. This process of submission and approval shall continue until the final review of CAM on these as-built drawing is obtained. The final checked as-built drawings without objection shall be in 7 sets of hard copies and 7 sets of electronic copies. These shall be submitted within 14 days from the date of checked without objection. Each electronic copy shall be in the form of CD-ROM, labelled, with cross reference to a printed list of files explaining the contents and purpose of each file and supplied in sturdy plastic containers. The detailed requirements and the media of as-built drawings set out in the Contract shall be followed as appropriate.

J.3 Size of As-built Drawings

As-built drawings shall follow Macau Regulations and be of standard sizes of A0, A1 or B1 size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.

J.4 Content of As-built Documents and Drawings

The Contractor shall provide all Installation documents and drawings with contents according to requirements as stated in design brief and all DSSOPT requirements including but not limit to the requirements in guidelines and manuals as follows:-


Obras de Construção e de Ampliação> a. <Á rea de Arquitectura> b. <Á rea da Engenharia Electromecânica> c. <Á rea de Gases Combustíveis ou de Combustíveis> d. <Á rea de Engenharia Civil>



Appendix J. Requirements of As-built Documents



371


Macau>





Administrativos>

The Contractor shall ensure all as-built drawings are accurate representation of the Installations, before submitting them to CAM. The as-built drawings required to be provided by the Contractor for various types of BS/E&M installations shall include, but not limited to the following:

(a) Building services layout plans such as ducting arrangement, trunking arrangement, piping arrangement, etc;

(b) System schematic diagrams, control diagrams and wiring diagrams;

(c) Concealed work layout plan such as concealed conduit routing, etc; and

(d) Installation details and assembly drawings such as L.V. cubicle switchboard layout, motor control cubicle layout, etc.

As-built drawings shall show the positions of all conduits, cables, switchgear, distribution boards, luminaires, lightning protection and earthing and all other items which have been installed.

J.5 Framed Drawings

The Contractor shall provide framed drawings to each major switchroom and electrical room showing the schematic wiring diagrams, tables or charts to indicate the type and composition of circuits, identification and location of item of equipment from that switchroom and electrical room. The framed drawings shall be fixed to the wall in such a way that it can easily be removed for reference.



372

The Contractor shall provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for

different installations bounded into separate volumes.

The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include:-

(a) Project Information

(b) System Description

(c) List of installed Equipment

(d) Spare Parts Lists

(e) Manufacturer's Certificates/ Guarantees/ Warranties

(f) Safety Precautions for Operation and Maintenance

(g) Operation Instructions

(h) Maintenance instructions, Maintenance schedules

(i) As-built Drawings

(j) Technical Literature

Appendix K. Requirements of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual and user Manual